Home

TrainPlayer/TrackLayer Manual

1. 133 227 226 222 270 173 17 45 43 61 50 92 153 227 226 222 45 43 61 9 92 ITI 227 225 222 45 172 291 33 43 61 39 oe 133 227 226 258 201 172 45 435 61 Se a2 1S3 P27 221 P22 45 49 G1 59 92 dod fa 220 173 172 45 49 61 59 Fe oe _ Zit sc r al EDER EEN Dim r Interthange war aa herrea Dim r Lyons interch 32 17 s Route 4 Sherman Deret Lycncinterch 49 2 5 iz Dewar Interchange i ii Denar byg b 37 7 5 7 Route 17 Sherman Derwer Interchange as 4 ig aun a 183 173 TET a3 43 i 92 153 173 221 222 45 172 291 3343 61 59 92 153 175 228 222 22 230 241 33 43 61 59 92 153 173 220 227 226 222 45 43 Gl S3997 Denver Lyons niech 42 4 5 F Route 293 Sherman Dems r a Interchange k aie e E F Rewer Lyons imi 286 5 H EEE ui or os Ta gesevate ruled daien From ond Te enoees than ob Ga Spey keien by choca emer Gane pem OF jinete i was Dimar pos ie W217 3 Hiria ARNA r M Dimar iiarchage Ha Li DEMET s Cpa a IAF 8 Demrar Reerchenge M4 i benet ea Lie a Pal Tals Dinei Lyetaiterch 4705 it bemear interchange aS 12 Hima SL Teas L At the moment this is as far as you can go with this tool Routes are not saved anywhere or used by the ops generators In a future version we may make further use of this tool NOTE The Route
2. Colors dialog 4 Choose or adjust the color using either tab of the dialog Width thickness of the border line in Width pixels Set width to zero if you do not want a border line Maximum width Is 8 pixels Style of the border line solid dashed dotted etc Pattern Line styles apply only to lines of width 1 If a different width is chosen the Pattern menu is not available This may change in the future Scenery Properties Text Text properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See also Editing Scenery Properties General Scenery Properties Background Properties Line Properties General Background Line Tex e Show text i Rotate text with image Wrap text This dialog is used to add text to an object and specify its style You may enter a single line or multi line block of text to be displayed in the box aligned left right or center If multiple objects are selected the text Is applied to each individually Ifa grouped object is selected the text is displayed on top of the group Dialog controls Check this box to have text displayed on the object In order to see text on the object you must both check this box and enter a text string Show text If this box is unchecked the rest of the dialog is inactive The text string to be displayed on the Text object Enter w
3. Name Name of the car type Enter a short descriptive name suitable for display on the icon in the car chooser General category of car Choose one unless you are assigning an AAR code in which case the class will be automatically set to match the code For more see Car Classes below cians To choose an AAR code from the dialog select AAR Codes the last item on the drop down menu Note if you want a car of this type to have power choose Diesel or Steam as its class A one to three letter code specifying the car type in detail You can either type a code into this box or choose from a list See AAR AAR Codes below Size Dimensions of a car of this type length x width as seen from above Displayed in the units selected in the drop down Units Units for size values If you change the units in this drop down the choice will apply throughout the program Arrows lt gt Buttons for scrolling through the list of car types in the collection Index Position of current car type within the collection You can type a number in this box to go to a specific index Add Click to add a new car type to the collection See Adding a New Type below Delete Click to delete the current car type from the collection Default Load Choose a load to be associated with any car created of this car type Load can be overridden for individual cars Show load Check to display the load in the images in this
4. At Startup Show open layout dialog lf Show last open layout 7 Check for program updates Il Show industry names on stations Show station color codes as outlines Select type of units for dimension and speed displays throughout the program Note Metric units are turned on whenever you select one of the metric choices in the units drop down in various dialogs Check to display bitmap images for car tops uncheck to display tops as solid colors Layout sounds Running sounds Mouse wheel zoom Options at program startup Show splash screen Show open layout dialog Show last open layout Check for program updates Other general options Show control panel Check to activate all sounds except loco running sounds These include train horns switch throws couplings sounds associated with stations Switchlist completion sounds and others Check to activate speed dependent engine running sounds These sounds can also be turned on or off from the layout context menu For more information see Running Sounds Check this box if you want the mouse wheel to zoom the layout in and out Uncheck if you prefer to use the wheel for default behavior vertical scrolling Display the splash screen for a few seconds Click takes it down Bring up the Layout Chooser Automatically open the latest layout from the Most Recently Used list Check the website to see if a newer version of the program I
5. button Name to be given to the published layout file This is usually the layout name plus rrw extension Errors encountered while processing list of external links if any Click to carry out the publish operation Click to abort without publishing Web Layout Chooser The web layout chooser is for downloading layouts from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser Name a ie Aquebogue Light Railwa C Gateways NMRA 9 Space Mouse 1mm mg k Ey ER TES Hary Vig For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Layout The web layout tree shows layouts available for download from the web The folders you see in the tree may show the entire collection or a subset of it depending on the license you purchased 1 Ifa folder has a Sign next to it click to expand it and show its subfolders if not click the folder to show its contents in the list window 2 Click a layout in the list to see Its preview This requires a short download 3 If you like the layout and want to use it click Download to download It and add It to your local collection The dialog then switches to the Local Layout Chooser so you can open the layout The downloaded version will go into the same folder in your local tree as its folder on the web For example in the above illustration if you click
6. e Rails lines perpendicular to the bridge representing rails on which it rides These are non functional just for display You can change the number of them or remove them default is to show four rails e Bridge narrow rectangular platform which moves across the pit You can adjust the width default is 3 in HO By default the bridge is shown as Solid grey but you can instead display a scenery object if you wish e Bridge Track track on which the engine rides Sits on top of the bridge and bisects it This is a normal section of live track e Bridge Scenery an optional scenery object representing the bridge not shown in the above illustration Several are a in us Miscellanous scenery collection such as There is no special tool for creating transfer tables You first create a scenery object for the pit then convert it to a transfer table as described below To create a transfer table 1 Choose the Rectanglel ool Tool on the Scenery Toolbar Eii 2 Draw a rectangle for the pit below left Size position and rotate to suit on the layout 3 Right click the rectangle and choose Convert to Transfer Table Load Bitmap Select All Properties This adds a vertical bridge bridge track and rails above right The table is now ready to hook up and use 4 Try it Double click anywhere in the pit and the bridge will move Double click again to stop To connect external tracks The transfer t
7. The LRHGP is a branch line which services the Hercules Cement Co located in the countryside near a limestone quarry Hoppers deliver stone from the quarry to the kiln where cement is produced and dumped into gondolas for the short trip to the main plant There itis bagged and set out on the loading dock to be transported in boxcars to an interchange with the main line to Portland We modified the original design by adding a branch along the south edge to represent this interchange The first step in setting up for operation is to define the load unload locations This is done with the Station tool In the above screen shot we added the four Stations where goods will be exchanged at the quarry next to the kiln by the main plant and at the interchange Now we establish the industries One way to do this is to use the Industry Browser to see if a suitable one is already available In this case we are in luck there is a Cement industry in the Mining section showing typical in and out loads for this type of industry It doesn t quite work for our purposes but we can use it for reference To define an industry we need to specify the incoming and outgoing loads at each station The quarry will ship out limestone the kiln will take in limestone and ship out cement the plant will take in raw cement and ship out bags We will also need coal or fuel and chemical agents for the factory but let s keep it simple To input this information we go to
8. Track Preferences Settings for displaying and building track Called from menu command File gt Preferences Snap Toangle v 4 Iw HG 2 A Cs To parallel 2 Toradius wv 18 HO J 2 24 E fis Track display options The track color options work in conjunction with the Color commands on the Track context menu By default track is all the same color as setin this dialog The track context menu lets you change specific sections to some other color If you want to draw a Set of track all in some other color set the For New Track color then begin drawing Click to change the default track color the color applied to all Default color track not specifically colored otherwise Click to set the color to be applied to track you are about to draw For new track This allows you to draw a section of track yard mainline etc all in the same non default color Thickness Width in pixels of track lines on the screen The same width is used in printing and exporting an image file Rail options If you are displaying double rails around the track See Double Rail Display you can adjust the color and rail Separation here To display rails use View gt Rails on the main menu Color Separation Click to set the color for display of rails Default is silver Enter the distance between rails in current selected units Default is 0 9 HO or about 6 1 2 feet on the prototype Check Track Check to ha
9. e Ifyou are using the Text tool you are prompted to enter a line of text e Ifyou are using the Bitmap tool you are presented with an Open File dialog so you can choose a graphics file 5 Adjust the object Click somewhere in the interior of the object to select it so it shows drag handles on the sides and corners as shown at right then Load Bitmap e Move pointto the interior of the object cursor b Cut Ctrl X changes to four headed arrow press and drag to Copy Ctrl C move the object Delete Delete e Resize point to any drag handle except the upper right cursor changes to a double headed arrow press and drag to move that side or corner Hold down Shift as you drag to resize the object without changing its proportions e Rotate point to the upper right handle cursor changes to a circle press and drag to rotate the object Select All Ctrl A 6 Set properties To change the attributes of the object color style fill text etc point to it press the right mouse button and select Properties from the context menu as shown above This brings up the Scenery Properties dialog described in detail under Editing Scenery Drawing Polygons For most objects a single press and drag operation creates the object For polylines and polygons a multi step procedure is required as follows 1 Choose the Line Polygon tool 2 Press and drag to create a line segment 3 With the cursor s
10. Delete the chop tracks You now have two unwanted straights and two switches at the tunnel entrances The next step is to get rid of them Point to the lower segment so it highlights as shown at right then press the Del key The segment and switch disappear Repeat with the upper segment You have now created two junctions such that the portion of the curve between tunnel entrances is an Isolated section of track al ae i Chyrier flay a AAH y bath Hide the tunnel Position the cursor on the tunnel track so it highlights and press the right mouse button You see the track context menu as shown Choose Hidden This marks the selected track section and displays itas a dashed line Any train passing over this section will appear hidden Delete Track d Hidden Tunnel Untouchable Al Petouchable Pe Chyrter Hay alge qe fe Place Train Here fe tri Add Car Here Paste Here Completed track Congratulations The track for the Rockport amp Oyster Bay is complete Add properties Choose File Properties Enter the layout name add some comments and save the completed layout Add trains and enjoy Use Train New Train to create a train LESM SY Sa E pu on the layout You re We a A Shee Ye ready to begin operating i o r ee W a Dimensions The first part of the process of developing a layout in TrackLayer i
11. Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Windows and Views Some appearance features were described in Adjusting the View Others are available on the Window menu window O Me al wiry g mL L Cascade HA Tile Horizontal Tile vertical Window Manager 1 turtlecreek rew e New Window creates a new window with a separate view of the same layout Views In separate windows may be resized or zoomed independently Trains runs in all visible views e Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical rearranges the windows on the screen e Window Manager brings up a standard Windows dialog for selecting and arranging multiple windows shown below e lt Active Window gt all open windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu choose one to activate and bring it forward Select window Activate det urtleCreek rw Uk Save Close Wiridouy s Minimize An effective way to view a running railroad is to set up one window showing the overall layout and another zoomed in and following the train as shown here L644 rrwe2 a z i To setup a dual view with a layout on the screen 1 Choose Window New Window to create a second view of the layout 2 In the original view use View Zoom In to geta close view of the train Right click the layout and make sure Auto Follow is checked 3 Choose Window Tile pick a direction based on the layout orientation to arrange both windows together 4 In the second w
12. Defaults Help Switch display Check if you want to see highlight squares on the two tracks forming the open route through a switch The default color is green but you can change it using the color button Open lights Check if you want highlights showing the other track Closed lights s not on the open route Default color is red change with color button Highlighting Distance to frog Light size Switch operation Open lights Closed lights Highlighting Distance to frog Light size Barrel through Color of the highlight indicating when the mouse Cursor is pointing to the frog center of a switch and can be thrown Note if you are in TrackLayer this color applies only when the Run tool is active Distance in arbitrary units between the center of the Switch and the open closed light Size of highlight square in arbitrary units Check if you want to see highlight squares on the two tracks forming the open route through a switch The default color is green but you can change It using the color button Check if you want highlights showing the other track S not on the open route Default color is red change with color button Color of the highlight indicating when the mouse Cursor is pointing to the frog center of a switch and can be thrown Note if you are in TrackLayer this color applies only when the Run tool is active Distance in arbitrary units between the center of the Switch
13. Edit button unlock selection to allow editing This button is dimmed if the selection is in the local layout folder local industry definitions can only be edited in Station Properties Clicking Edit activates the name and load boxes so you can modify their contents To validate and commit the changes click OK or select a different record in the list OK validate save changes and dismiss dialog The same validations apply as in Station Properties If you click OK you save all the changes you have made to the industry list Cancel discard changes and dismiss dialog All changes made to the list are discarded not just those on the current record Help Brings up the appropriate Help page Route Finder If the switchlist tells you to deliver a string of hoppers to Punky J unction the first thing you ll need to Know is how to get there Even on a small layout it s not always easy to figure this out That s why we developed the Route Finder a device which calculates all possible routes between two points and displays them interactively so you can choose one To use select the Route Finder menu command or click the Find Routes toolbar button You see this dialog B Route Finder To generate routes select From and To kecabons than ciek Go ai 1 Sherman Denver miem ET gr J EF 17 226 222 221 173 if2 45 43 61 So oF Route 2 Sherman Denwer Fierchinga ar g 2
14. Loads Out Folder Hercules loading do _ Portland cement Ib Lame e sh Hertu Portland ees b Pi cinco fc limestone quamy Guary limestone Layout Lime Ridge Hercu E Fam Related Industries cattle poultry pork beef poultry produc Agriculture Feed amp Grain M Agricultural co op dry chemicalsfeed s alfalfa com soybea Agriculture Feed amp Grain M Grain Mills Hevators wheat com barey c Agriculture Feed amp Grain M E Petroleum refining clay crude oil propa asphalt av gas fuel Chemical Plants amp Refineries Layout Lime Ridge Hercules amp Portland RR Loads Incoming Outgoing chemicals cement bulk a limestone Hep At the bottom of the control is a panel displaying the details of the current selection dimmed by default to prevent accidental editing Click Edit and this panel works pretty much the same as the corresponding set of boxes in Station Properties Controls in this dialog Grid control foldered grid display of the industry template list Most of the operation of the grid is done via the context menu below but other operations are possible e To change column width horizontally drag the divider between two column headers e To reorder columns press a column header button drag and drop to the left or right of another header button e To expand or collapse folders groups click the sign at the left end of the fold
15. The Yard Finder looks around the layout for patterns of track which meet certain requirements If it finds one it creates a yard style station around the area and gives it a unique name starting with Yard Requirements are every track must be straight not curved and must be a Spur i e a dead end Each track must have a neighbor parallel to it and a specific distance away from it where that distance Is the parallel distance found in the track snap settings All sections collinear with the end section are included i e if a long straight spur is made of five short segments all five are used For example here is a typical find four parallel straight stubs highlighted in green When creating the yard the Y ard Finder includes tracks connecting the parallel sections This example has three one crossover and two end sections What this scheme tries to do is find one or more yards suitable for use in ops sessions It is not designed to find all yards It does not find those with curved track with connections on both ends or with tracks not parallel or not equally spaced If your layout has yards like those you will need to specify them by hand see Yards and Interchanges Interchange Generator The Interchange Generator attempts to find one long spur which can serve as an interchange track It starts by finding all spurs Industry Generator Industries are stations where goods can be exchanged An industry has a name
16. TrainPlayer TrackLayer User s Manual Version 5 2 Oct 2012 TrainPlayer TrackLayer User s Manual copyright 2005 12 TrainPlayer Software Plans from 701 Track Plans for Model Railroaders and Model Railroader are copyright Kalmbach Publishing used with permission TrainPlayer Contents Introduction Welcome to TrainP layer What s New in Version 5 2 What For About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help Getting Started About Files Opening a Layout A Tour of the Screen Layout Properties About Sizes and Scales Adjusting the View Layout Printing Exporting Images What s Next Running Trains About Trains The Control Panel Moving Trains By Hand Yard Mode The Train Window The Train Toolbar Switches Building The Train Tree Ops Generators Ops Windows Ops Setup Wizard Scripting About Scripts Playing a Script Recording a Script Developing a Script Command Reference Scheduling Clock Schedule Window Customizing Operation Preferences Switch Preferences General Preferences Track Preferences Train Preferences Style Preferences Road Preferences Customizing Toolbars The Customize Dialog Windows and Views Introduction Getting Started Tutorial Dimensions Straight Track and Switches Curved Track Turntables and Transfer Tables TrackLayer Contents Starting the Program Layout and Image Files The Overall Process The Rockport amp
17. choose bmp Save the image file with the offered name i e Same name as the ral file Note for best resolution zoom the layout to large size before saving the image Then exit or minimize the program return to TrackLayer and click OK to proceed 5 The import proceeds with a progress bar displaying status On completion the layout is ready to test and run 6 Save the converted layout as rrw file p lt I TrackLayer Cary Grant RR2 rrw M ox ax Importing from AnyRail To convert from AnyRail you must have an installed copy of AnyRail 3 11 or above You will need to export the layout from AnyRail before you can import it into Tracklayer pres ai coe as ort a 1 IOUS 10 Ji K Help aon Mouse lost cre To import from AR 1 Start AnyRail and open the layout to be converted 2 Choose File gt Exportas TrainP layer If you do not see this command on the File menu see notes below Choose an output file name You are actually saving two files one a file with extension xml containing the data the other a jpg of the graphics 3 Start TrackLayer and choose File gt Import AnyRail Open the xml just created The import proceeds with a progress bar displaying status On completion the layout is ready to test and run 5 Save the converted layout as rrw file aN CAP MUM SCRL Notes 1 A common problem in a converted layout is gaps in the track
18. rs TNC AT If you prefer you can have only the green lights show or only the red or you can change to different colors For details of settings regarding switches see Switch Preferences Press the space bar to throw the next switch the selected train will cross For details see Upcoming Switch below The Switch Window W The Switch Window provides a close up of the area around a switch The chosen switch is shown in the 9 center of the window surrounded by a rectangular frame zoomed in without background so that you can 4 easily see and operate it E aN A To bring up the window choose View Switch Window The window can be positioned anywhere on the screen resized or docked to any side of the frame ae When the switch window is on display and you position the cursor over a switch on the layout the display zooms in on that switch By default the window automatically updates every time the train goes across a switch so that it shows the next switch in the direction of travel This feature can be disabled see below r m To throw the switch centered in the switch window click the blue highlight or press the space TEUN throw any other switch visible in the window click its frog point To change characteristics of switches or the switch window see Switch Preferences Upcoming Switch As you drive the program knows what switch is coming up next along your direction of
19. 5 Operate Operate as you normally would using mouse and keyboard The recorder captures speed and direction changes uncouplings switch throws and turntable rotations Recording is not time sensitive so if you pause between moves it will not affect playback 6 Stop or pause Click the Stop button on the Script toolbar Recording will stop You can then rewind and play back what you recorded or click Record again to continue recording where you left off or both 7 Save the recording 0 save the recorded script save the layout There are other methods too described below 8 Edit The recording mechanism is not perfect nor probably were your operations To make repairs or polish the script you can edit it by hand or record over bad sections Both require some familiarity with the command language read on Developing a Script Developing a script by hand is an exercise in programming It s not for everyone But the language is not hard to understand the program provides tools to help with the job and if you re a model railroader then you are likely to be of a do it yourself mindset so why not give ita try With a little practice you can type out a whole series of operations in a few minutes A script is a series of commands stored in a text file Each command carries out an operation you would normally do with the mouse sets the speed changes the direction throws a switch etc Most commands are preceded by a wait condition
20. The Denver Flyer gives you The Denver Flyerl However if you cut and paste the name does not change Train Properties Properties of the selected train Called from Properties on the Train context menu See also About the Properties Dialog Dialog controls Shows side view of the train image If the train is too long to fit in the window you can enlarge the dialog This train window Is for display only and is not interactive The train s name used to identify it in the Train Tree on the Train menu and in scripts Name The initial name assigned to a train is blank Once you assign a name it stays with the engine as the train consist changes For more information see Naming Trains Horn Running Default Car Collection Choose the sound to be generated by this train when pressing the Horn button on the control panel or using Sound Horn from the Train menu Choose one of the four built in loco sounds or choose Other to bring up the Sound Chooser The sound you select for this train will remain attached to the engine if the train consist changes Choose the sound to be generated by this train whenever it is moving Sounds vary depending on speed Default is either Steam or Diesel depending on the train s engine type For more information see Running Sounds The car collection to be available on menus and toolbar when this layout Is active For more information see Default Car Sets The
21. We use the term generator to mean a device which comes up with a random set of something It produces a list of candidates according to some rules ranks them by desirability according to other rules then randomly picks some number of them starting at the top For example the interchange generator attempts to find a long spur which might serve as an Interchange point with another railroad It looks at the list of all sours on the layout ranks them according to length and location and picks a random one from the top few choices Ops uses several generators as listed here and described below You don t really need to Know how these work but if you re curious read on Station generator creates stations at random locations around layout Yard finder identifies all yard areas on layout Interchange generator identifies one interchange track per layout Industry generator selects one random industry per station Waybill generator creates one random waybill per industry Switchlist Ops generator creates switchlist from subset of waybills The first four of these are called up from the Ops Setup Wizard the last two from the Generate Ops command Station Generator We didn t originally plan to offer a station generator Stations are not that hard to create and if they are to match the layout scenery they need to be made by hand Still on a big layout spending an hour making stations is a barrier to getting started with ops so we looked into
22. Without holding the shift key press and drag a grid intersection point The grid resizes while it remains square Red lines do not move 6 Release when the grid is aligned with the image If the grid on the image is not square you can get a better fit by adjusting horizontal and vertical spacing independently dragging lines instead of intersection points Layout Properties 7 Check your work Right click the layout choose Properties Layout tab and Car Train Layout see if the indicated size is what you expect In this example the dialog says the layout is roughly 4x6 in HO which corresponds to the size in the book Hame Reddy River amp Piedras RR 8 While you re in Layout Properties choose a modelling scale and take a Scale HG Sharp Curves minute to enter a name and a few comments describing the layout 9 Save the file Size 3 9 a 59 7 Layout inches a The file you started with was an image jpg bmp gif etc but once you ve set up the grid you have a layout and must save itas a TrainP layer rrw file Once the grid is adjusted you can use View Grid HE to turn it off and forget about it What if there is no grid on the diagram If your image does not have grid lines you will need to set up the program grid by some other criterion e If you know the overall size of the layout set the origin at the upper left and drag until the number of grid lines matches the dimensions you want For example
23. click the Play button on the dialog The Schedule window comes up and the script begins operating Sitback and watch If all goes well a switcher engine will deliver empty hoppers to locations on the mountainside and return with two gondolas full of ore To learn more click the El Edit button The Script Editor comes up where you can view the script edit it play Stop or rewind it watch the commands as they execute Most scripts have comments at the top describing the operations to be carried out for a challenge try running through these operations yourself before playing the script Check Don t show this message again if you do not wish to see this alert on opening a scripted layout You can bring it back if you change your mind later do this using the Show script announcement checkbox in the Advanced Scripting Options dialog To stop the script click Stop on the toolbar or press ESC To resume where you left off click Play again To Start over at the beginning click Rewind then Play The Script Toolbar After you have seen the Scripted Layout alert a time or two you can dismiss it and use the Script toolbar instead Buttons work as follows e Record begin recording Button turns red when recording green when playing back Clicking this button while recording has the same effect as clicking Stop Button is dimmed if selected train has no engine and thus cannot be scripted If the selected train has no scr
24. if your image represents a 10 x 6 layout adjust until the first grid line is at the left the tenth at the right and there are nine in between for a total width of ten feet If your image is drawn to scale and based on a square grid then the height should take care of itself and come out to six feet e If you know the horizontal or vertical distance between two points on the layout adjust the grid spacing so it matches that distance For example if your picture shows a doorway you know to be 3 wide adjust the grid so that three squares just fit the doorway or six in N scale etc The placement of the grid doesn t matter the separation between grid lines is the important thing And even that Is not terribly critical the only consequences of having the grid adjusted wrong are a the sizes of the cars will not be accurate relative to the layout and b the Layout Properties dialog will show the wrong overall size Resizing and Rescaling In a computer simulation of a scale model of the real world the term resize can have different meanings Until now the way to resize a layout was to adjust the grid changing the mapping of the virtual layout onto the real one For example if you have a 4x8 HO layout and you drag the grid to double the number of squares you end up with an 8x16 version of the same layout as if you somehow Stretched it to take up twice as much space in your garage TrackLayer offers a dual purpose tool which giv
25. it is in a file with the same name and path as the top image but with f instead of t atthe end If you want to view the large image in Paint make this change in the Top Image box and click Paint But then be sure to click Cancel You do not want either of the paths in this dialog to point to a large image Collection Tab This tab is for editing properties of the overall collection Car Collection Default Steam Properties Car Type Images Collection Name Defaut Steam Info 1930 19605 Steam Ops default collection C Users Jlim App Data Roaming TrainPlayer C Name This can be any name you like but best to keep it short Info Description and author If the collection is of your own creation include some information about it Path Full pathname to the xml file defining the collection You cannot change the path in this dialog Export Copy collection data to output directory and prepare for publication see Car Collection Publisher Adding a New Car Type To add a new type to a collection click the Add button on the Car Type tab This creates a new undefined type and blanks the dialog for entry of data To provide a complete definition you will need to enter data into both the Car Type and Images tabs size 5 5 X 1 4 Name Provide a short descriptive name of the new car type Class AAR Choose a car class or an AAR code Size Units Specify the car size length x width in the selecte
26. then there are no scripts you can play 2 Locate a scripted train There can be more than one script per layout each associated with a particular train To see which trains have scripts view the Train Tree and look for s next to a train name 3 Examine the script Even if you re not planning to edit a script you might want to take a look atit For one thing it might begin with comments telling what it is supposed to do To view the script click Edit Script in the alert dialog or on the toolbar or choose Train gt Script gt Edit If the selected train does not have a Script this action creates a new Script For details about the Script Editor see Developing a Script 4 Rewind A Script will not start correctly unless trains are in the expected positions The Rewind command puts them there If you have moved some trains around click Rewind to put them in place before playing the script 5 Play To begin playing a script click the Play button on the alert dialog or the toolbar or choose Train gt Script gt Play The recording light on the toolbar turns green the Schedule window comes up and the script begins 6 Stop To stop or pause click Stop on the toolbar or press ESC Both the script and the train stop immediately To resume click Play or to start over click Rewind then Play 7 Drive You can operate trains while a script is running including operating a scripted train However if you obstruct or tinker with a
27. which organize the data into trees and allow you to browse preview images For details see Choosers Where do you find the TrainP layer files on your computer The answer to this question has changed over the history of the program as Windows conventions have evolved In the latest version most of your data files are found in your application data folder a system defined location on disk which depends on your operating system As of Version 3 3 1 you can find this location easily by choosing the new command Open Data Folder from the File menu This opens Windows Explorer to your TrainP layer directory which looks more or less like this this one from Windows 7 F i CiUsers lt user App Data Roaming rainPlayer oF Include in library Share with New p TrainPlayer E Name Cartypes nyp uid sounds d0 Layouts ra gt Layouts hi Scenery a di SCENEry dO Sounds n di Cartypes Application Data carcodesd tet Contacts ss _excludes tst Cookies choosers33 xml DQ Neskton E If you are Windows savvy you can rearrange many of the files in this directory to suit yourself but there are restrictions For one thing you must not change the names or locations of the four main folders Sounds Layouts Scenery and Cartypes For another you should not change any subfolders under Sounds In general you will avoid confusion if you keep your local setup aligned with that on the web Opening a Layout When you start
28. 14 04 degrees 1 is 45 degrees Angle snap choices are disregarded unless To Angle is checked This allows you to turn the feature on and off without losing your preferred set of snap angles An alternative to the To Angle To parallel To radius Units check box is the toggle Snap On Off on the Track context menu Applies in similar situation as angle snap with one additional condition the switch you are creating must be within a certain distance of an adjacent switch This distance is setin the edit box to the right Refer to the right diagram below When parallel snap is in effect and you start to draw anywhere near B the starting point snaps to exactly B where the distance to the neighboring track is as Specified default is 2 in HO After the starting point snaps into place then angle snap will Kick in as you drag so that the track at B remains parallel to its neighbor Sometimes parallel snap can prevent you from creating a switch at a desired place When this happens hold down the Shift key as you begin to draw so you can place the endpoint where you want then release Shift as you continue to drag so angle snap will take effect Applies when you are modifying the radius of a circle drawing a new circle with the Shift key up or editing a circle with Shift down When the radius is close to one of the checkmarked choices it snaps to the exact value The radius is displayed on the status bar as you drag You may
29. 18 loadable cars p industries Ibis ready to prepare tor operations Click Hest to proceed g Back Cancel Stations page Calls the Station Generator to create new stations if you want or need them Ops Wizard Stations Lreate random stations around layout This layout has 5 stations 1 yard O interchanges f Use existing stations 0 Keep existing stations add yards and interchange C Generate all new stations Fou with to create stations by hand cancel out of the wizard and use the Station tool Back Cancel Choose one e Use existing stations Leaves the stations as they are This is the default if your layout has Stations and yards Click Next to go to the next page e Add yards and interchange Leaves the stations but creates new yards and interchange replacing any existing ones This is the default for layouts with stations but no yards Click Next to create without going to the next page e Generate new stations Replaces all existing stations with new stations and yards This is the default for layouts with no stations Click Next to do the generation and remain on this page If you select one of the two latter choices clicking Next does not take you to the next page Instead it does the generation displays the new stations on the layout and then moves the radio button to Use Existing Stations At that point you can click Next to go on or make a different choice and repeat the generation
30. 5 shee md mathina shop i urban buildings 5 vegetstion a waren ies gantry crane big Cre ce new e Objects you see in these folders must be installed to your disk before you can add them to your layout Here s how 1 Click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the middle pane This may take a minute the program has to download the folder before it can display the images 2 When you find the object or set you want click Install This copies the downloaded files into your Scenery folder It then switches back to the Local tab and selects the installed folder so you are ready to proceed to add objects as described previously 3 Orclick Install All This downloads and installs the entire set of web scenery onto your disk Chances are you will eventually want to use a lot of it so you might as well take a couple of minutes to get it all at once For details regarding the download procedure see Managing Scenery Drawing Scenery r If you are building a layout on a plywood sheet you can use the Scenery Chooser to plop a few buildings and trees on it and you re set But the more serious layout will require ground cover water roads and other fanciness which can only be constructed by drawing This section describes how to draw your own scenery objects Drawing New Scenery Objects The general procedure for drawing a new scenery object is as follows 1 Selecta layer Choose one o J Edit Foregro
31. Bitmap This brings up a file dialog so you can specify an image file The result is the same Cut Ctr as if you had used Browse on eens Delete Delete Select All Ctri A TS YES Ambi i X Delete Delete Select All Ctrl A Properties Transparency note This feature allows you to feather the look of an image as photographers often like to do This option can be very useful if you are attempting to trace over an object to make a copy of it LSS Eee oe ee ape NOTE the Transparency level selected affects both the Line and Text property features associated with an object Local Scenery Chooser The local scenery chooser is for selecting scenery objects and adding them to the layout ae ae J background J cars and trucks etc tree 12 bmp tree 11 bmp tree 1 3 bmp For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add Scenery to the Layout 1 The local scenery tree shows folders of scenery objects residing on your disk Click a folder to see its contents as icons in the list window 2 Click an icon to see a larger view in the preview window 3 To add the selected object to your layout point to Its icon press the mouse button and drag the object to a spot on your layout Alternatively click OK to deposit the selected object in the center of the layout and take down the dialog The scenery chooser is a modeless dialog it remains on the screen so you can keep adding scenery unless you c
32. Dimensions Height 4 0 Layout inches width o 2 Ifyou wanta layout of standard size and dimensions try the Size drop down and see if your choice Is there The program offers a collection of standard layout arrangements including various NTrak modules If you choose one of the standard sizes you can skip the rest of this section and just click OK OR 3 Choose the scale you want in the Scale drop down and enter the dimensions you want in the Height and Width boxes Click OK to dismiss the dialog and create the new drawing space You can select the units you want to use for display and data entry using the drop down at the right Units you select in this drop down will become the defaults throughout the program The Overall Process Here are the basic steps in preparing a layout for TrainPlayer use All are described in more detail throughout the manual 1 Prepare the image If you re starting with a picture of a track plan you ll need to turn it into a graphics file on your computer If the image is on paper you ll need to scan and crop it if on a website download it if in a CAD program export it The result needs to be a high resolution graphics file in any of several Standard formats You don t actually need a background image You can start with a blank screen and just lay track freehand 2 Adjust the grid To create an accurate layout you need to establish the relationship between the image on your s
33. ISI 227 226 222 221 173 i72 231 NAb wR Route J Shemen Denver Lyora libe 32 1 7 1 l 153 227 226 222 45 43 Gi 59 92 Roube 4 Sherman Denvera Lore Interch 49 25 iz F Fa P55 227 226 222 45 172 231 33 4361 T3 oF Route 5 Sherman Demar interchange aa i ii 3 Si T3 227 226 298 79 172 4543 61 59 Se Route Sherman Demar Lyorsinterch 34 6 1 14 E BS 153 AAT 226 298 291 172 173 221 fe 45 43 61 92 Route 7 Sherman Oeover interchange 32 9 1a a 63 WS3 227 226 238 231 33 43 ot 59 oe Route H Sherman Denver Lyons Inbench 33 7 5 a E G2 U53 22 220 227 45 435 GL S Ge Route g Sherman Denver Lyons Inber 50 3 iz 75 P55 277 220 222 45 L72 211 FF 4961 59 OF Route 10 Sherman Dene a lerchange 41 8 4 T3 a Gz ISa 227 221 222 226 238 291 172 45 43 61 59 92 Route 11 Shennan Demer Imerchange a7 A iz 4 75 P55 227 21i 222 226 238 251 13 43 61 59 92 Route 12 Sherman Demer Lyordinterch 51 3 6 15 4 Lt BSS 227 221 174 172 45 272 Am6 2S 33 43 6 5907 Route 13 Sherman Gener interchange M44 10 3 ra 153 227 221 173 172 45 43 61 59 92 Route 14 Chenmen Bernver imterchange 47 5 HI d s S3 227 221 LFS i72 231 3343 61 59 92 Route 15 Sherman Davor Lyons tenth SF 103 H 1 PE ISa ddr dat L73 1rd ddl 238 26 did 43 43 81 S 22 Route 16 Sherman Oerver LyorsInterch 319 LS g 3 MSs 73 L72 5 dtd dil dir ddo dde ddi dd 43 Gl 39 Fe Route 17 Sherman Denver Lyons Iniberch 20 7 4 LF 4 96 Sa Lo Le 45 222 26 238 151 J3
34. Module Manager and some module related ones in the assembled layout The drop down menu at the top gives you a choice of display elements you choose one then specify whether you want it visible and set its color font and line width or whichever apply Choices you make In this dialog apply immediately in the Module Manager window so you can experiment with different options and see what they do This does not apply to items with in Assembly in the name these do not apply until you click OK to leave the Module Manager to create the assembled layout If you Cancel out of this dialog the Module Manager display reverts to its previous state Module Manager Settings dialog controls Select a feature of the display to be edited The full list of features is Shown in the screen shot above where these features appear in the display is shown in pictures below Settings in this section of the dialog apply only to the selected feature Show this Check this box if you want the selected item to appear in the display Applies to all items except Floor Click to choose a color for the selected item Applies to all items except Color Background in Assembly Font Click to specify a font for the selected item Applies only to Module Label and Label in Assembly Choose a line width in pixels for the selected item where zero means thinnest possible Applies to Module Frame Module Highlight Track Line and Frame in Assembly Line
35. Paint 1 Use View gt Zoom gt Large Size or Ctrl PgDn to enlarge the image so you can see what you re doing 2 Use paint tools to color or modify the image to suit Read the technical details below regarding sizes and shapes 3 Save the file either using File Save or confirming save when closing the window Do not use Save As 4 Return to TrainP layer the modified image will show up in the Car Collection Editor Changes made and saved in Paint cannot be undone or cancelled If you want to modify factory supplied images we recommend you first make your own copy using the Save As button and work with that If you accidentally change a factory supplied image and want to revert to the default download a new copy of the collection Note if you prefer to use a program other than Paint when you click the Edit button this can be arranged There is a registry value called PaintExeName which you can set to the name of a program This value is located under HKCU S oftware TrainP layer TrainPlayer S ettings For help modifying this value send e mail to support 4 0 6 0 tank_t Paint F U b 0 tank z Paint File Edt View Image Colors Help SUS eS ean ieee Seca ree Side view images must be sized correctly so they will look ok when mixed with other cars and so they will fit in the train windows e Use a drawing space 32 pixels high e Draw the image so it touches the bottom Do not exceed a height of 26 pixels otherwise
36. Print Grid Print entire grid 2 Expand All Items Show contents under each group 3 Collapse All Items Hide contents under each group 3 Field Chooser Group By Box Column Auto Resize Grid Editable Show Waybill Zoom to Properties Notes Show dialog for choosing grid columns to display Show header to allow grouping If checked columns always adjust to fill window If checked grid rows can be edited Display waybill for selected row Zoom layout in to location of selected object Show properties dialog for selected object 1 Applies to editable grids only i e Grid Editable must be checked on the context menu 2 Applies to text data only no images 3 Applies to grids which have grouping in effect 4 Applies to Switchlist Window only 5 Applies to the object represented by the clicked row and column a car station industry load or train Ops Setup Wizard To start the wizard choose Tools gt Ops gt Ops Setup Wizard from the menu or click the Wizard button t on the toolbar Then follow along Welcome page Shows some information about your layout If the layout is not suitable for ops for example has no trains this page will say so and give you the opportunity to cancel and make itso Click Next to continue Saal Wes fecal r bp Are noe IAA T lel gi _ _ ire a M S Per a ata yee Saale pe he Welcome to the TranPlayer Ops Wizard This layout has 5 stations 1 pard U interchanges
37. The electronic track on a TrainP layer layout is like sectional track from the hobby shop It consists of an interconnected set of line segments mostly straight but some curved The point where two segments join together IS a junction and the train rolls right across it The point where three or more segments meet is a switch which you can throw to choose between alternate routes Unlike sectional track TrainP layer track segments can be any length and joined at any angle Switches can have any number of branches Track segments can have special properties like the ability to hide the train or cause it to jump instantly from one end to the other And of course TrainPlayer track never needs cleaning Straight track is easy to work with you just draw a series of line segments and you re ready to drive trains Draw three or more tracks to the same point and you automatically get a working switch Since you can draw any curve as a series of short straight segments it is possible to build the entire layout using nothing but straight track but you ll get better results if you take the trouble to learn about curves too Before you work on a real layout we suggest you start with a blank screen and learn some of the basic drawing operations The tool you use most in TrackLayer is the Straight Track tool A used for creating straight track segments and switches Since curves can be represented by a series of short segments you can build the
38. These should be made presentable for other users If the comment box is empty you should add descriptive information and author name You might consider doing this to the original layout instead of here cancel this dialog edit in Layout Properties then publish 3 Choose an output folder You do not need a new folder for each layout typically you have one output folder where you put all published layouts If this layout has already been published to the output folder you are prompted to confirm overwrite 4 Inspect the output filename Keep this name simple but descriptive Warning if there are other layouts with links to this one changing the filename will break the connections 5 Click Publish The new published layout is created and the dialog is dismissed 6 lf you want to send the layout to another user zip the three files created in the output folder Dialog controls Name Comments Input file Output folder Output file Notes Publish Cancel Name of the layout This can be any name you like Changing the name here will affect only the published layout not the original Description and author If this box is blank please provide some information to be included in the published version Full pathname of original layout file This file is not modified by the publish operation Destination for the published layout Three new files will go in this folder To select a new output folder use the Browse
39. This tab allows you to add or remove buttons on toolbars To add a button to a toolbar locate the command in this dialog and drag it onto the toolbar where you want It to go To remove a button from a toolbar drag it off the toolbar and drop it anywhere this only works when the Customize dialog is visible Dialog controls Select a menu to see its commands on the right Or choose All Categories Commands to see the complete list of commands from all menus Note the New Menu item in the list is not useful Locate a command in this list point to it press the left mouse button and drag the command onto any toolbar If the command does not have an icon the toolbar button will show the command name Commands Customize Toolbars For choosing toolbars to be displayed Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbars Reset All Train Tools Help Close Dialog controls Choose which toolbars are to be visible Most can also be made Toolbars visible from View gt Toolbars on the menu Reset the selected toolbar to factory settings This synchronizes Reset the toolbar with the menu and positions it in default docking position Reset all toolbars to factory settings This may be necessary after Reset All upgrading to a new version if toolbar buttons do not seem to be working as expected Customize Keyboard For assigning keys to menu comman
40. TrainP layer list is adapted from that on the Great Northern Empire site we appreciate the author s permission to use this list Foran informative article on the subject see AAR Freight Car Codes from the Model Railroad Operations SIG e In TrainP layer a two or three letter code refers to a specific type where one letter is a generic type For example a code of GD means a Sside dump gondola suitable for gravel G means a general purpose gondola suitable for loads which can be carried in any type of gondola The complete list of AAR codes available in TrainPlayer can be seen in the AAR Codes Dialog accessible when editing car properties Each car has both a class and an AAR code If you create or edit a car type and give itan AAR code the program assigns the appropriate Class This can usually be done by looking at the first letter of the AAR code any code starting with F is a type of flatcar G a gondola etc Conversely if you choose a class for a car type the program gives ita matching AAR code a one letter generic code Example choose Class Flatcar and you get AAR code F Car loads have their own sort of AAR code a list of individual codes indicating cars able to carry a given load For details see Load AAR Strings Car IDs Every car on the layout has two forms of identification e a numeric ID assigned and managed by the program and not editable by you This is used internally for keeping track of cars The progr
41. Triggers events which cause animations to start and stop We have in mind a variety of these but for the time being there are only two Station trigger animation starts when the lead car of a train any train enters a given station and stops when the last car leaves This is the same scheme which controls sounds attached to stations so if you want a sound to play at the same time the animation moves use a Station trigger on the animation and specify a sound on the same Station Junction trigger animation starts when the lead car of a train crosses a given junction and ends when the last car crosses it Triggers are specified using the Scenery Properties Animation tab as described below Adding Animation to Your Layout There are two ways to add animated images to your layout from the Scenery Chooser or via Load Bitmap The first is easier the second more flexible Using the Scenery Chooser The initial release of this feature comes with a small set of sample animations in both gif and anm formats More will become available over time in the web scenery collections To add one of these to your layout 1 Bring up the Scenery Chooser using Tools gt Scenery gt View Scenery Chooser or the button on the scenery toolbar El Scenery a background G chem plant_refinery L coal_ore mines sand c 5 factories i 9 lumber saw paper mils a miscellaneous roads and streets station_m buildings 2 urban buildings engi
42. a narrow Stripe along the edge of each layout for any junctions at the ends of straight track segments 2 Aligning the modules A specific connection point on each edge the one closest to the front of the module is designated as the registration point The two modules are adjusted front to back until their registration points line up 3 Introducing gaps Ifthe connection points on a module are at the very edge then there will be no room to insert connecting track The program detects this situation and backs the connection point junctions a little ways from the edge 4 Adding connecting tracks Wherever a connection point on one module has a partner at the same position on the other a segment of straight track is added between the two points 5 Detecting loop closures After fusing one end of a module the program looks at the other end to see if it is touching any other module Ifso it means there is a loop and one more fusion will be required to finish the job The overall process of building a modular layout is a matter of marching down the list of modules fusing each to the next closing loops when necessary Building a Module The general procedure for constructing your own virtual module is the same as for building any layout in TrackLayer You can start from scratch draw your track plan and carefully make sure it conforms to specs Or you can take an easier and more reliable approach start from a preconfigured plan or
43. a number of ways e Anew Merge Background mode is designed for layouts with lots of scenery especially roadbed and ties It draws the scenery into the background image then deletes it from the layout and swaps in the new background The result Is a richer background underneath a simpler more responsive track scenery layer e Anew graphics engine is now doing the export This produces better output and allows higher resolution e The exported image is no longer limited to what you see on the screen You can now choose at export time which features you would like to see in the output track trains scenery Stations etc e Output sizes are now more sensible The default is the native size of the current background adjustable within reasonable limits e Anew wizard leads you through the steps of the process To export or merge choose File gt Export Image This brings up the Image Export Wizard Image Export Wizard Welcome to the TrainPlayer Image Export Wizard This wizard saves a picture of the layout to a ae y graphics file either for extemal use or to replace the Welcome screen i l curent layout background Introduces the wizard Shows the current layout background image if any with its hee mw TR V a E RE size in pixels Reports whether the layout has scenery and if so how much This layout has no scenery objects Click Next to proceed Export Mode Choose Export Image if you wish to create a graphics file
44. are editing scripts you may wish to save your edits without overwriting the full layout file the Update button serves this purpose Turns on or off IDs on cars mentioned among the comments at the top of the active script This is useful when you are trying to understand an annotated script The script author can mention car IDs in the instruction comments so that you can use this toggle feature to highlight the relevant cars Displays an alert whenever you open a layout having scripts The alert informs you of this fact and gives you an opportunity to start or edit If you uncheck this box you will not see the alert but can Still tell that scripts are available when you see SCRIPTED on the status bar Echo script comments Use autopause in playback Selects whether or not to show comments in the schedule window as a Script runs Normally the schedule window shows arrivals and departures at defined stations If you check the Echo Comments box then all comment lines from the script will be shown in the window as they are executed This gives the script author a way to inform you of what Is happening as the Script runs If you uncheck this box no script comments will be shown in the schedule window just arrival and departure data Determines whether scripts will automatically employ autopause while running Autopause causes the script to pause when a train is stopping reversing coupling etc Checking this box has th
45. as DXF or EPS you will need to export to the supported format and then convert You can find conversion programs on the Internet for example a search for DXF to J PG turns up several programs for converting CAD files to graphics As a last resort you can take a screen shot 1 Open the layout in your CAD program and adjust to make the image as large as possible 2 Press Print Screen on your keyboard 3 Start Paint the system bitmap editing program On most systems Paint is found under Start gt Programs gt Accessories 4 Choose Edit Paste The screen image you captured is brought into P aint 5 Move the image When you paste the image Is automatically selected and ready to drag Drag so that the top left corner of the layout is at the top left of the Paint window 6 Crop Use the Select tool to draw a rectangle just around the border of the layout then Edit Copy File New Edit Paste You should now have a picture of just the layout without desktop or other Surroundings 7 Save as PG or BMP Loading an Image To load an image file e Choose File Open e Open a file of type J PG J PEG BMP GIF PNG or TPG The image appears on the screen overlaid with a default grid Creating a New Blank Layout If you don t have an image and just want to sketch track on a blank screen start by creating a space with the dimensions you have in mind 1 Choose File New The New Layout dialog appears SIZE Scale HG
46. below k Oom A 4ta With both Background and Rectangle active use a left mouse click and drag and draw a large box across your basic grid pattern Adding Grass 2 methods oo 1 Locate the Scenery Chooser icon on the Scenery BA KEE left mouse click on It and it will bring up the main Scenery Chooser window This window provides you with a thumbnail view of the BMP image Scroll through the selections in each folder When you find the image you want left mouse click on it and drag it onto your layout to be positioned Y ou will need to manually adjust the selected image to fit the shaded box Hint You will likely use the Scenery Chooser most frequently because it has the handy thumbnail sketch 2 Alternatively you can place your cursor anywhere inside the shaded area and use a right mouse click to bring up a submenu select Load Bitmap Hint Using this method fills the shaded box completely fy Ta a E Load Bitmap Cut Copy Delete Select All Properties Ctrl x Ctrl C Delete Ctrl A Look in E Scenery a A et E background My chem plant refinery My Recent coal ore mines _ sand coal loaders Documents PENRE factories That click opens another window which lists your TrainP layer files Look in gt background 4 and should direct you to your Scenery folder Click on your Scenery directory to expand and display the sub folders there Click on the backg
47. contents of folders in chooser trees can be exported to text or xml files This is an expert feature used mostly by us to manage our file collections but you might find it useful in various ways The exported file contains the same data as what you see in list not icon view item name filename date etc for each file under the folder you are exporting To export the entire tree right click the root item Exported data can be in one of two formats comma delimited text or structured xml To export 1 Right click a folder and choose Export This will export data about all files contained in the selected folder and its subfolders 2 In the file dialog specify the output file and format txt for delimited text xml for structured xml 3 Click OK The file is generated Take a look at it in a text editor or web browser Local Layout Chooser The local layout chooser is for selecting a layout to open and run Shady Grove amp Shenill The St Paul Central For general information about choosers see Choosers To Open a Layout The local layout tree shows folders of layouts which reside on your disk 1 Ifa folder has a sign next to it click to expand it and show its subfolders if not click to show its contents in the list window 2 Click a layout in the list to see its preview 3 To open the previewed layout and take down the dialog click OK The local layout chooser has features not available in other choosers For o
48. descriptions appear dialogs tooltips Class Names Car ID Label Style Settings in this area are for adjusting the appearance of car top labels as described in Car ID Display Click to bring up the system Font Selector dialog to select font style and size to be displayed on car top labels Choose a font which is not so Font large that it exceeds the size of the car image Click to bring up a system Color Chooser to specify the background color Background you want behind car labels This color is overridden when color coding is in effect Turn Off Labels Check this box if you want car labels to be hidden while cars are moving then automatically displayed again on stop Style Preferences Settings for application style Called from menu command File gt Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches Style Road Application Style Train Player Layout background Window background Application Style The application style refers to the overall color and design scheme used for windows menus toolbars and dialogs Several choices are available not all of them work or look good on all operating systems The thing to do is choose one from the drop down the change takes effect immediately so you can see how you like it before you commit Clicking Cancel in this dialog will revert back to your previous app style The TrainP layer style is one we developed to match the brass and wood motif of the
49. drop down in Train Preferences e British folder opened when you bring up the Layout Chooser e Carclass names translated to British terms This choice is available in Train Preferences and in the AAR Car Types dialog Whether you are British or not you will benefit from other features of 5 1 e Folder download Now you can click a folder in any web chooser tree and download the entire thing at once including subfolders Or you can choose to download only those items you do not yet have on your local machine e Improved car descriptions Tooltips and dialogs are now more consistent in displaying car type and car class names See the updated definitions under About Cars e Improved handling of car and scenery errors f you open a layout requiring external cars or scenery the alert dialog is now more sensible and more useful and now includes a page of help e Plenty of bug fixes and small improvements e Internal work related to Mac development and change of web host For a complete list of what has changed see the Readme What Was New in 5 0 Modular Railroading Version 5 brings you the ability to create exposition size layouts the same way they do at the train shows by hooking together pre built modular units Choose from our large collection of modules and module templates or build your own then snap them together on a virtual show floor in your choice of arrangements One click turns the assembly into a fully connected modula
50. empty based on its current location The results are presented as a set of lines in a text window and a set of rows in an ops window a new type of interactive grid window You can use either or both as your work orders The text presentation is more readable the grid more interactive A lot of data is required for this process Each industry ships and receives particular types of goods each car is capable of carrying specific types of load This information comes from databases provided by the program but modifiable and extendable by you In generating a switchlist the program has to make Sure the cars loads and industries match for example you will not be told to deliver a flatcar of logs to a dairy or an empty coal hopper to a lumber mill Ops Reading Matter There is a lot of gadgetry associated with Ops Practically everything mentioned above is new in Version 4 0 industries car loads switchlists waybills along with new ops related menus toolbars interactive display windows and internal computational devices You don t need to master all this but if you care to read about it here is a handy guide to the various parts If not skip it and go to the next section How To Use Ops Car Loads goods you can transport in cars Industries locations where goods are shipped or received Yards locations where cars are stored and assembled into trains Interchanges locations where cars are exchanged with other railroads Waybills orders
51. from A to B with several stops in between You will need to know the average time it takes to get from one stop to the next The scheduling features help you with this by reporting when the train arrives and departs at stations along the way You can use these reports to calculate travel times for your schedule In TrainP layer the travel times are likely to be in minutes rather than hours as the prototype would take For this reason there is a scale clock a clock which runs faster than the one on your wall so that say ten minutes on the layout equals an hour on the railroad So you can run your simulated eight hour shift all the way from A to B and still be done in time for lunch This chapter used to be bigger With the introduction of Ops the part about Stations was removed and expanded Into its own chapter Clock Schedule Window Clock When operating a model railroad it may take one minute to travel from Cincinnati to Columbus Such time spans don t make for very convincing schedules The model railroader s solution to this is the scale clock which runs at some multiple of normal speed If that multiple is say 6 then it appears to take 6 minutes to make the trip which Is still record time but at least more manageable TrainP layer offers an adjustable speed railroad style scale clock in its own dockable resizable window You can use It to time your operations or start it and let the program refer to it as it keeps track
52. go to the missing linked layout Tour of the Screen The first time you open a layout there is a lot to take in Here is the Turtle Creek Central surrounded by various gadgets Train Tree Layout Main Toolbar Train Toolbar Car Toolbar script Toolbar Train la yar Turtle Creek Central 10 E WF Ele Ed Yew Tools Tfn Recording Wedow Heip jgjxi eit tek Ea ee MAHA e a GG ce Gd ee im Sne ate ees _ oo Henar J Pemi ft a Toa arg Pan ana oo iF Turtle Creek Central f a Turtle Cresk Miang Co cow mine Turtle Creek Central if ord bah Hey 2 Freight Char teeter PR Eih iraha ee PRR interchange E E439 Diel A o i hl EF Hil Boce EE 6445 Boocar at Hi Hopper eer H451 Hopper a T454 Tanker BE C436 Caboose Cera d 1 g Fig 2 TRATH PIAH Tumia Crei igna t bida dna Coone X alnbech Publishing Co d ten Ba wissen anton mel cert list osling Dock PRE Interchange Clock Schedule Window Switch Window Control Pane 1 Toolbars TrainP layer comes with a menu bar and several toolbars o Main toolbar for standard file and edit operations zoom in and out station editing Car toolbar for adding cars to the layout Script toolbar for recording and playing back a sequence of operations Train toolbar for running trains as an alternative to the control panel Track toolbar not shown for drawing track available in TrackLayer only Oo O 2 Clock The
53. in the vicinity of another Restricts the distance between parallel tracks to a Specific value Parallel snap is designed for creating ladder tracks such as those shown in the diagram above Once you have drawn the base section and the branch you create each ladder track by pressing on the branch and dragging away from it When parallel snap is in effect the starting endpoint of a new track is not exactly where you press but snapped to a nearby point such that the distance between the new track and its neighbor is a fixed value default is 2 in HO e TO radius applies when you are creating a circle Restricts the radius to one of up to four choices When you are using the Circle tool and dragging without the shift key pressed then you are adjusting the radius of a circle as you drag When radius snap is in effect if the radius is near one of the predefined values it snaps to that value More details about snap features are given in Track Preferences Track Coloring Not all the track on your layout has to be the same color You can give individual sections or entire regions of track their own colors You might use this feature for example to distinguish standard from narrow gauge lines in a mixed gauge layout Hidden Tunnel Display Untouchable Default color Link to Layout Track Color d For new track II Fail color Thickness BE Select All Ctr A To color a single track section 1 Use the T
54. it highlights as shown press and drag to move tt into position 13 Release when the junction is on the circle 14 And so on Mark the second curve untouchable 15 Draw the next circle Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Rebouchable Add Car Here d 16 Draw the segment to connect to the previous handle 17 Release when connected 18 Draw the upper approach track tangent to the topmost circle 19 Fix the kink in the previous layer Be careful when moving this junction that it does not land on top of the earlier one e do not release where you see a green highlight square 20 And you re done 21 Test the helix Add a loco on one of the approach tracks give it some speed and watch the show It should make two complete loops around before exiting Notes e For best appearance the train should hide as it goes around the lower loops and appear when it gets to the top one You can arrange this by marking track as hidden starting with the lowest loop and continuing until the top loop Mark each track as you add it and be sure to apply the hidden mark before you mark a track untouchable otherwise you wont be able to In the above example tracks added in each of the following steps should be marked hidden before going on to the next step 3 4 8 10 e If you mark a track untouchable by mistake you can no longer select itso you can t unmark It Instead choose
55. it will not show fully in the control panel e The width can be whatever you need to change the width drag the tiny blue dot at right center A good rule of thumb is that one pixel equals about a foot on the prototype so a 50 foot car is around 50 pixels wide Note that the size in pixels is shown on the status bar as you drag the dot e The transparent color is whatever color is in the top left pixel If the top left pixel is pink then all pink pixels in the image will become invisible when the image is displayed In the above example the transparent color is light grey Top view images may be any size or shape the program scales them as needed to fit the car tops on the layout e Top images must be oriented vertically with the nose of the car at the top e The transparent color of a top image is taken from the lower left pixel Car Collection Errors When you open a layout it may require cars not found among your installed collections When this happens you are presented with an alert showing several choices MS Car Collection Errors This layout requires car types not Found in your chooser Collection not Found PLsamples OK Proceed using standard cars Cancel Cancel opening the layout Download TF button is not dim click to get collections from web Convert Change to standard cars takes effect on next save OK ignore the errors for the current session substitute cars from the standard set for the ones specifie
56. least go through the TrackLayer tutorial The manual is organized by topic The first chapter tells how to open a layout what you ll See and how you can adjust the screen as you like The next two chapters describe how to run trains and how to assemble and dismantle them The next two chapters cover advanced features scheduling and recording Lastis a chapter on how to tailor the program to suit your preferences The TrackLayer portion begins with an introduction and some basic information about files and images followed by a tutorial which goes through the process of building a layout Subsequent chapters go into detail about drawing track curves switches and turntables The manual assumes a basic level of familiarity with Windows You should how to operate a drop down menu and what it means to navigate in a file dialog Menu commands are given as phrases sometimes in bold type Tools Customize refers to the Customize item on the Tools menu About the Layouts TrainP layer Software is proud to be associated with Kalmbach Publishing Co the place where model railroading began We are working together to bring you the world s finest collection of track plans on your screen and runnable with TrainP layer ae Pms cme ee me res indera m a a a ha i one i Bo Sere acca irda ao an Since the first release of TrainPlayer we have featured the most popular book of track plans in history Linn Westcott s classic 101 Track Plans for Mode
57. menus differ depending on what type of object Is highlighted When you delete a turntable or its bridge track both the circle and the track are deleted To delete multiple tracks or objects 1 Select the objects as described below 2 Delete with the Del key or a menu command as in step 3 above Selecting objects To move or delete a collection of objects you must first select the ones to be modified You can choose them one ata time or several at once by dragging a selection box To select individual objects 1 Choose the Edit tool bs 2 Click a track segment circle or turntable The object is selected and turns navy blue 3 To select another object press Shift and click the object 4 To unselect a selected object press Shift and click the object To unselect all objects click an empty spot on the layout To select all objects choose Edit Select All or press Ctrl A To select all objects in a given region 1 Choose the Edit tool bs 2 Press and drag to form a selection rectangle see B Any track or object intersecting the rectangle is highlighted in green It is not necessary for the track or object to be completely enclosed by the rectangle 3 Release Highlighted track becomes selected see If you hold down the shift key while dragging the newly selected items will add to the previous selection Moving objects Once a network of track is laid and interconnected it s a little tricky to move it
58. of measure select from a Units drop down in some dialog which has one e g Layout Properties e Switches number of switches the route passes through e Turns number of junctions where the train is going to have to reverse direction along the route e Overlap a measure of similarity between this route and some other route in percent For example a value of 50 means that exactly half the track on this route is the same as on some other route e Switches a list of junction numbers along the route where switches are located 3 If the resulting list is too long click the F ilter button to bring up the Route Finder Filters dialog Route Finder Filters J J Ux Exclude routes v have more than 12 switches v have more than 3 turns v have greater than a overlap with another route lare longer than 1 5 times shortest route cancel Here you can trim down the number of results by eliminating those which are too long or have too many switches or turns or which overlap too much with another route Changing the settings does not require a new route calculation the list is filtered instantly Using the filters shown above we reduce the 29 routes in the first figure to a more manageable list B Route Finder To generate routes Select From and To balona then dkE Go Spociy location by choosing ether station came or junction Fyer
59. of the track plan Image files can come from a variety of sources An image file suitable for TrackLayer use has these characteristics High resolution The resolution should be 300 DPI pixels per inch so that it will look good in close up views A typical high resolution image file is around 1MB in size Cropped The image should be cropped tightly around the edges of the layout with a minimum of white Space surrounding This makes better use of your screen space and allows the program to calculate the layout size accurately Standard format TrackLayer accepts standard PG GIF BMP and PNG formats as well as our own called TPG the TrainP layer Protected Graphics format an encrypted form of a PG file The encryption prevents the image from being used in programs other than TrainP layer and TrackLayer and protects the file from opening without the appropriate license If you are licensed to use a layout in TrainP layer then you can open the TPG file in TrackLayer to use as background Layouts distributed with TrainP layer are installed in the trainplayer layouts directory rrw files and trainplayer layouts images tog When you create a new layout with TrackLayer you can store it in the same directories and it will Show up in the Open Layouts dialog The rrw file contains the name and relative location of its image file The two files need not be in the same location Preparing an Image Images on Paper f you have a tr
60. page Is to click the Help button on the dialog The Scenery Properties dialog has a preview pane showing a picture of the selected object s with changes as they are being applied The changes do not affect the objects on the layout until you click OK or Apply TO change the properties of one or more objects Scenery Properties General Background line Text 1 Select the object s bane Rectangle 2 Right click a selected object and choose Properties as shown above This brings up the Scenery Properties dialog 3 Change values in the dialog as desired Refer to the above helo pages for details A sample drawing of the object s shows how the changes will look 4 Click Apply to apply the changes to the selected object S without taking down the dialog or OK to apply the changes and dismiss the dialog or Cancel to dismiss the dialog without applying the changes Any changes made in the Scenery Properties dialog can be undone using Edit Undo Managing Scenery Ci I sm4 This section contains semi advanced information for users who want to create and manage their own scenery images or troubleshoot scenery problems About Scenery Files Most information about scenery objects shape style position text etc is stored in the rrw file along with the layout What Is not stored there are the Images associated with bitmap filled objects If you ll be working with scenery it s useful to know where these file
61. pick a random industry or Choose to pick one yourself from the list The Choose button brings up the Industry Browser described on the Industries page Either way you can see what the generator came up with and cancel or do it again if you don t like the results Ops Generator This creates a scheduled train with switchlist and instructions It is a multi step process which does this 1 Chooses an engine This may be from the selected train or the choice you made in the wizard or a random choice 2 Chooses a set of outgoing cars A random selection is made from cars attached to or in the vicinity of the chosen engine The number of cars it chooses depends on a setting you can make in the wizard minimum about 5 maximum 20 3 Chooses a destination for each outgoing car Choices are limited to industries which can receive or dispatch that car type a random selection is made from these 4 Selects some cars to be picked up at some of the destinations If you are going to be making a delivery at 0e s Lumber and oe has an empty flatcar on his siding you might need to pick it up as you pass through 5 Expands some of the selected cars to include cuts If you have two identical coupled hoppers then the switchlist is likely to send them both to the same place 6 Selects one of the destinations as the end point of the trip and creates a scheduled train to go there 7 Creates a switchlist from the car destination choices and att
62. presses any key 17 Definitions definition notes number of junction or switch may be preceded by 18 exact position on track t d percent of the way from jxn 19 hours minutes seconds on 24 hour layout clock or wall clock 11 name of a station on the layout speed in miles per hour metric not available car position within train 1 behind lead car 2 behind 1 etc 3 W car identifier as shown in label box of car props or by show car ids Switch position 0 or 1 for normal switch higher for multi way 20 variable name as found in settings section of registry value of settings variable line of script to which a goto statement may jump seconds to pause after stop reverse couple any string of text quotes not required O oOo N A number of turntable as shown by tooltip or properties Examples description at 15 30 speed 10 after 0 0 10 stop at Js5 throw 99 1 on couple forward after edville speed 40 uncouple B13 uncouple BOS F12 echo reached harbor dock autopause 3 set AccelFactor 20 rotate 321 96 when clock says 3 30PM set speed to 10MP H start train if not moving wait 10 seconds then stop train when train crosses junction 35 throw switch 99 to the 1 position after coupling occurs set train direction to forward after last car of train leaves Edville accelerate to 40 MPH uncouple on side of car B13 closest to engine uncouple on side of car B05 closest to car F12 print string in schedule window from th
63. problems so that you can fix them before anyone derails Annotate and save Give the layout a name add descriptive or historical comments and credit to the designer then save the file and you re ready to run Add trains and enjoy Actually you can add trains at any point during the building process and drive them over whatever track is available TrackLayer Tutorial The Rockport amp Oyster Bay This tutorial takes you through the steps of preparing a layout for TrainP layer use starting with a background image file We ve chosen a simple one the Rockport amp Oyster Bay layout 21 in the 107 Track Plans collection If you have the complete collection you can start with the tpg file you already have otherwise you can download the jog from the web The R amp OB is a small loop with two branches Follow along in TrackLayer and see if you can build It Open the image file Use File Open to open the graphics file For this tutorial use L21 tpg from your trainplayer layouts images directory or click here to download the same image in jpg format download rockport jpg Copy or save the file to a convenient directory and open it from there The image opens the grid appears in a default position and the Edit Tool K becomes active Align the grid Point to an intersection point on the grid press the Shift key the cursor becomes a 4 headed arrow and drag until the red lines
64. program For pictures of other styles see Sample Application Styles below Some styles have adjustable colors TrainPlayer is one of them With one of these styles in effect you can move the Hue and Saturation Sliders to adjust the colors and brightness of the theme There is no recipe for doing this fool with it until you get Something you like Background Colors ce eri a There are two types of background on the TrainP layer screen You can choose your favorite colors for each of these window background Layout background color of the layout surface for a new layout or one which does not have a background image The default for this color is off white To seta different background color for a particular layout use the Color button O o Window background color surrounding the layout when it does not fill the document window Default is a light gold To change one of these colors click the appropriate color button in the dialog and select from the system color chooser Sample Application Styles Ex TrackLayer Ft Dodge Elk City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help a ie ed i l oh EO LO Se GQ 50 100 150 200 400 6B 2 A EAS SS D ee 0 ce Os ee ed as load Unload Cut Load Unload Train Publish Check Track Options Office 2007 Er Track La EL Ft rie do File Edit View Tools Train Window Help 50 100 150 200 400 7 k amp amp Ez Fa ad Cut Load Unload Tr
65. scale the track relative bo the background To dismiss the tool press ESC or click outside the blue box To correct mistakes use Edit Undo This alert is shown only once per session Check the box below to remove it permanently Don t show me this again Two rectangular frames appear a pink one around the outer border of the layout and a blue one surrounding the track 4 Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry layout border a 4 Original copia Kalmbach P ORI mS OPEC I ta TP Ss tw 3 Press and drag the pink outer rectangle by any side or corner The overall layout space changes while the bitmap remains in position or becomes cropped Keep your eye on the status bar which displays the size as you drag 4 If you make a mistake or don t like the result use Edit gt Undo 5 To dismiss the tool a press ESC b click a spot inside the pink but outside the blue rectangle or c choose a different TrackLayer tool 4 Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry Orignal copyright Kalmbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Develope T NT Rescaling or moving track relative to the background 1 Do steps 1 and 2 as above 2 Press and drag the blue inner rectangle by a corner to resize or by the middle to move Note the blue border cannot be dragged by a side The entire set of track moves or rescales proportionately 3 See steps 4 and 5 above K Elizabeth amp Rahway River Ry T TEX Straight Track and Switches
66. showing module names and c rectangular objects with background images or colors for modules which have them All of these are scenery objects created during the assembly process They reside in the background scenery layer and can be edited when that layer is active You can change the styles and colors of these objects or get rid of them using the Module Manager Settings dialog e No background image A modular layout does not have a single bitmap background Image Instead if there is a background image behind any module it becomes a scenery object in the modular layout Modular Layout Files A modular layout is stored in an rrw file like any other layout but with an additional section containing module information This section contains sequence and position information about the modules It does not contain the modules themselves but filenames pointing to them When you open a modular layout file it displays the full layout If you bring up Module Manager it displays the assembly based on information stored in the rrw file If you then click OK each module is reloaded from its stored pathname and a new modular layout is created from them This is a one way operation modules are read only not dynamically linked So e If you make changes to a module the changes are not reflected in the modular layout Changes will be seen only if the layout is rebuilt from its assembly e Ifyou make changes to a modular layout they a
67. taking it down and it offers an easy drag and drop mechanism for adding objects to the layout Because the list pane Is in icon view there is no real need for a preview pane You navigate through the collections using the tree find what you want drag it onto the layout and adjust its size and location to suit Using the Chooser To add scenery to your layout 1 Select the layer you want to work in using Edit Foreground 4 or Edit Background 4l Added objects will go in this layer 2 Click the Scenery Chooser tool E or select Tools gt Scenery gt View Scenery Chooser from the menu This brings up the Scenery Chooser g Scenery i background i cars and trucks atc ij chem plent_refinery a Com Of miras pad oni iors i cranes ii Factories i edyan mi i lumber_saer paper mils buidngi brg budinga Erg Aj roads and crass Ui station _rr buildings Mi steel ad machina shop butingz Garvagi bavilcinape brig 3 Click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the middle pane 4 Point to the object you want press the mouse button drag to a location on the layout then release The object appears on the layout possibly somewhat resized 5 Click the object to select it so itshows drag handles on the Sides and corners as shown here To move the object press and drag by the middle To resize drag one of the handles To rotate drag by the handle at the upper right For more information s
68. template and modify to suit This is the method our artists used to create the scenic layouts already available Module Starting Points e From an existing physical module Ifyou already have a real module you take to shows to work with it in Module Manager you will need to construct a virtual replica of it using TrackLayer First you will need to convey the track plan to electronic media for example by taking a scan of an overhead photo then trace over it applying track This process is described in the Getting Started chapter of the TrackLayer manual The procedure is the same whether you are creating a module or a regular stand alone layout e From a sample plan We provide a generous collection of NTrak and HO sample modules some just track plans others with structures and scenery The set you get installed with the product is small the rest are found in the Web tab of your Layout Chooser under the Modules folder You can add or remove track or scenery or otherwise modify as desired e From a template Inthe Components folders under Modules HO or NTrak you will find a series of bare bones module templates of various sizes Here for example is a picture of the two foot NTrak template Each NTrak template comes with five tracks going all the way across HO templates have three These tracks form different railroad lines running around the layout Each is labelled according to its purpose as follows ML1 main line 1 4 bac
69. the entire set of track 2 Right click and choose Add Ties from the context menu Ties are created along all selected track sections Notes Each tie is an individual scenery object a solid rectangle rotated To modify ties use the Scenery Edit tool zoom in so you can see the ties clearly then click one ata time and resize or rotate To adjust tie spacing size and color select options from the Road tab in File gt Preferences To delete all the ties there is no easy way unless you delete all the scenery If you generate both roadbed and ties you are likely to have a lot of scenery objects and may wish to take advantage of the new Merge Background feature described elsewhere Ties are truncated in the vicinity of switches so that they don t overlap e f you want both ties and roadbed generate the roadbed first so the ties will be on top Editing Scenery Drawing or choosing scenery is the equivalent of taking a pre built structure out of the box Editing is the rest of the job placing it where you want making It the right size and shape painting labelling and adding trim This section describes how to edit scenery objects whether drawn by hand or dragged in from the chooser About Editing Scenery The Scenery Toolkit is designed to make it easy to move scenery objects around on the layout One of the most convenient features is that it doesn t matter what tool you have selected you can still select move or otherw
70. the mainline in two segments A B and B C 2 Draw the branch in either direction B D or D B J unction B highlights when you begin or end drawing the branch OR 1 Draw the mainline in one segment A C 2 Draw the branch in either direction B D or D B The track segment AC highlights when you begin or end at B J unction B is created by this Operation chopping AC into two parts As soon as you release the mouse button using either method the switch is created and the stop go lights appear You can test the switch by clicking atB To draw a multi way switch Simply draw more than three segments to a switch Whenever more than three segments join a multi way switch is formed with more than two routes through it Each throw opens a different route In this picture the current open route is A B D The first throw opens route A B C the F second E B D the third goes back to A B D i To draw a crossing Draw tracks which cross but do not join In this example AB and DC cross each other but there is no junction in common so trains cannot go from one track to the other Track Snap Snap features assist you in drawing precise switches and curves Snap MW Toangl iv 4 i 6 i 90 degrees E i To parallel 2 Toradius w 15 Ho iw ao 24 E 15 Units Layout inches h Disable Settings oom oom On Drag Loco Sounds Snap takes effect only when you are dr
71. though they are not marked as such This sounds confusing but the behavior is reasonable Car ID Display Itis often useful to see car identifiers on the layout These can be turned on and off for all or selected cars Note this section has been updated for version 4 1 Think of car id s as lighted signs on top of the cars There are two mechanisms for controlling them 1 inside each car is a switch to turn its own sign on and off and 2 there is a master power Switch to disable or enable all lighting The idea is that you can display id s on a set of cars of interest and with one click turn them on or off without losing the selection This model is in effect unless you are running an ops session and color codes are on In that case the program controls the id display and overrides your settings Another feature affecting car id display is the option Turn off labels while moving in rain Preferences This causes id s to be suppressed when Cars are moving re displayed when they stop This applies both in and outside of ops The appearance of the id display can be customized You can set font and background color in Train Preferences To turn id s on or off for specific cars 1 Right click a car and choose Show Car ID This displays the id on the selected car and turns on the master switch if necessary So you can see it If the id is already showing the command changes to Hide Car ID Choose that to turn off the id 2 To t
72. to service the waybill To make this a bit more descriptive we introduce the symbol to mean car is loaded during this move Now the schematic becomes Y gt S gt R gt Y meaning the car is empty for two of the three legs of the trip loaded for the other If the industry is receiving goods instead of shipping them the same schematic applies except in this case S is the offline shipper R is the receiving industry on the layout so the cycle of moves is Y gt interchange S gt industry R gt Y How Waybills Are Used Each time you generate a new ops session a waybill is created for each industry on the layout Each industry has a list of incoming and outgoing loads the waybill generator picks one randomly and chooses whether the industry will be shipper or receiver These waybills are then used as input to the switchlist generator Each move in the generated switchlist is associated with a waybill and represents one step in its cycle To see the waybill for a switchlist move right click a row in the Switchlist grid and choose Show Waybill This brings up a dialog like that pictured above This dialog is read only you can view but not modify it In the current version of the program you cannot view the complete list of waybills you have to view them one ata time Also waybills cannot be saved and reused you get a new set for each ops generation Both of these are likely to change in the next version Generators
73. to ship or receive goods at an industry S witchlists sets of instructions for picking up and delivering cars Generators internal devices for creating random ops sessions Ops Windows tables of data about cars and switchlists Ops Setup Wizard step by step procedure to prepare a layout for ops Ops Toolbar buttons for quick access to ops commands S witchlist Window docking grid window showing current switchlist Cars Window docking grid window showing layout car inventory Schedule Window window showing textual switchlist instructions Route Finder dialog for identifying track routes between given points Color Codes colored cues for visualizing car moves Ops Limitations In the current version Ops supports only freight traffic not passenger the two types of activity are just too different to be handled by a single scheme We plan to support passenger ops in a future version Another limitation at present is that Ops will not extend beyond a single layout if you work with linked layouts watch for them to be supported in a future release Ops Setup Case Study To make all this a little more real let s take a look at what it would take to set up a small layout for some operation For this example we ll use a slightly modified version of the Lime Ridge Hercules amp Portland RR 30 in 107 Track Plans It s a simple roomy layout with nice Westcott artwork suggesting an operational theme similar to the following Spo PIT TOWER p
74. travel whether an inch or a mile away and makes it easy to see and throw When the Switch Window is on display it automatically shows a close up of the upcoming switch while a red double frame highlights it on the layout as shown here Switch To throw the upcoming switch press the space bar This works whether or not the switch window Is on display The upcoming switch changes whenever the train a passes over a switch or b reverses direction The switch window automatically updates at those events or not see note below as well as whenever you position the mouse cursor over a different switch on the layout Coupling and Uncoupling TrainP layer allows cars to be coupled or uncoupled anywhere on the track You cannot couple if you are going too fast but you can uncouple at any speed There are two general ways to uncouple a indicate which cars are to be uncoupled then issue an uncouple command or b click directly on the layout in the space between two cars To couple as in real life you simply move one car slowly into another and they automatically couple To uncouple by command 1 Specify the uncoupling point The easiest way to do this is to click in one of the train windows in the Train Toolbar or on the Control Panel to position the uncoupling pin You can click between cars or near the end of a car Once the pin is positioned between two cars not at the beginning or end of the train you can uncouple Fo
75. until it reaches full size in the Chris Pedersen collections the pictures are actual size in HO The Full Image tab comes up by default the first time you select a car with a large image If you then select a car which does not have one the Full Image tab disappears and the Car tab comes up instead If you manually switch from Full Image to Car that choice sticks for subsequent cars until you switch back Reverse Engine This property of an engine if true says the engine is to be pointing toward the back of the train This is designed to allow you to have back to back locomotives For example the second of the diesels in the train at left is marked as a Reverse Engine iKa imtelo LiL Fe m TE B Reverse engines are designed to be used in a train with other non reverse engines Ifa reverse engine sits by itself or is the only engine in a train then it drives backwards i e moving the throttle forward will cause the engine to go in reverse and vice versa The program automatically sets and unsets this property on coupling and uncoupling For example if you have two locos sitting on a track back to back and you couple them together then one will become a reverse engine Some car collections provide engines which are already pointed toward the back nose to the left in the side image as shown by the two L examples above right You should NOT check the Reverse Engine box to use these They already behave like reverse engines even
76. until you get results you like Industries page Calls the Industry Generator to assign random industries to stations Ops Wizard Industries Defne ndusties for use m operations This layout has 5 industries Use existing industries e Generate new industries C Automatic Interactive Back Cancel Choose one e Use existing industries Leaves the current industries alone Click Next to go to the next page e Generate new automatic Picks random industries at all stations Click Next to do the creation and remain on this page e Generate new interactive Brings up the Industry Generator dialog below where you can generate or choose industries individually for each station Whichever way you choose to generate industries you can see what the generator came up with and cancel or do it again if you don t like the results As on the Stations page when you create new industries the wizard remains on this page until you choose Use Existing and click Next This gives you a chance to review the results and retry as needed Industry Generator Dialog i one E Industry Generator 5A Check stations where industries are to be generated Industry Generate Checked REA Express LCL kdl Lyons Baryt ergamery Selected Station L Boulder Junction Metals smelter i C amp S Junction Lumber Mill Sherman Grocery warehouse Yardi Yard Tracks _ choose Cancel To operate this dialog
77. up a activate the Station tool so that stations are visible b right click a station border and choose Properties The data you see and edit here applies to the selected station z y wa e _ Station Properties Portland cement bags 7 Dialog controls Station Name A name to identify the track location You can give a station any name you like but it must be unique on this layout if not you will be alerted on clicking OK For operational purposes it should be For example atan industry with multiple stations you might want to use Acme Powder Door 1 or Baker and Co Loading The station name is used for reporting car and train locations Sound Sound to be played when a train enters the station area To choose a sound click the Browse button to call up the Sound Chooser To remove the sound erase the contents of the edit box Industry Name Name of the industry at this station if any If goods are to be exchanged at this station then it must have a non blank industry name and at least one incoming or outgoing load Normally the industry name is that of a firm where goods are shipped and received but it might also be the name of an interchange dock storage location etc whatever name goes on the paperwork The industry name does not have to be unique more than one station can attach to the same industry Once you define an industry at one stat
78. way is to use tooltips Choose Tools gt Show Tooltips to enable Pa this feature Then hover the mouse over a track junction switch circle turntable or 59 station and you will see a note indicating its number and other data If you do not see the tooltip try clicking in the layout window to make sure it is the active window Highlight a Track or J unction If an error message gives a track or junction number you re having trouble finding on the layout use Tools gt Highlight Track wa ae ae ey g E sate 14 Track Highlight Choose or enter track or junction to be highlighted Secs is ef Number 4 Ok C Junction an The corresponding object will be highlighted in pink on the layout In the Track Highlight dialog enter the track or junction number To turn off the pink highlight click any empty space on the layout as if removing a selection ic by 103 110 108 S Publishing Your Layout Ifyou have an interesting layout and you ve gone to the trouble of laying track on it consider Sharing it with other TrainPlayer users If you take the following few steps to make it ready and are the artist or have rights to distribute the artwork we will be glad to post it on the User Layouts page at trainplayer com 1 Check for errors Run Tools gt Check Track For details see Track Check Dialog 2 Test switches and turntables 3 Add some trains Put suitable rolling stock at reasona
79. when the Track Tool is in use This illustration shows tunnel track hard to see connecting levels of the helix in J ohn Armstrong s Southern Pacific Shasta Division from Model Railroader Apr 2005 fo tracks M W E eal to Natron Loop Y Mount Shas viewed from iji q HX C DOF Jj j woe AL O Tut i E Tunnel track is also used to specify clipping regions See details below e Untouchable track When track is marked Untouchable it becomes like the background it cannot be selected or moved or highlighted This is an advanced feature Untouchable track is used for building helices or other constructions requiring curves right on top of each other for a Step by step procedure see Helices e Linked track You can mark a stub section of track as linked and connect it to another layout When the train reaches that stub it jumps to the other layout and continues on its way Details below Isolating Track Most of these properties can be applied only to one or more complete segments of track To apply a property to a portion of a track segment or curve you must first isolate that portion by chopping it out To isolate a section of track nia Say you want to isolate the portion of this curve between the hash marks You can see the full extent of the original curve by highlighting it Use the Track tool k for this procedure 1 Draw a straight segment touching the curve whe
80. when you right click an empty space on the layout Running Sounds In TrainP layer you have several choices of speed dependent running sounds steam or diesel To choose running sounds 1 Right click a train or engine and choose Properties Go to the Train tab shown below 2 There is a drop down menu for running sounds Choose one If you see only a small number of choices as shown below left choose Download and you will get the complete set of running sounds available on our site This may take a few minutes but next time your choice of running sounds in this drop down will be much larger 3 To hear the sounds start the train moving If you don t hear anything right click a blank spot on the layout and check Running Sounds on the context menu below right ate mr Tt Taka i Eire You t Fropermles en Aerie a ms os mi z ma Piria arat Li i wre mm La Stop All Trains oom To zoom From Zoom uto Follow Rea Rey ST i s s r ai g N Le Layout Properties To add your own running sounds 1 If you want to add your own running sounds you will need a set of wav files each having a sound at a different speed The program cannot read mp3 or other formats in fact there are variations on wav files and not all of them work in TrainP layer In Windows Explorer locate the folder TrainPlayer S ounds C huff in your data directory You should see a collection of files with filenames like lt
81. will cause a break between lines at the indicated point For example this would give a two line note line one nline Cwo Track Checker For testing track and reporting layout condition Called trom menu commmand Tools gt Check Track Track error 3 Endpoint on track but no jun Track error Superimposed junctions i Track error 3 Superimposed junctions 3 ENRRWIL4s2 rrw Linked track E Double dick to zoom to a numbered item Refresh Repair ID Help The Track Layout Check dialog checks your layout for track and train errors Use this dialog to check for mistakes while you are drawing a layout or after the drawing is finished Four columns are shown in the list box e Condition what the line is reporting error external link required car collection e No the track or junction number where the error occurred This item is blank for conditions other than track errors Double clicking on a row has no effect unless there is a track or junction number associated e Details nature of the error name of the linked file or other information e Extra when applicable an additional bit of information depending on the condition For example superimposed junctions shows one of the two junctions in the No column the other under E xtra The dialog not only reports errors but helps you fix them When you double click a numbered item in the list it zooms in and highlights the track or junction in e
82. will reset the layout to the default color If you really want a black background choose a nearly black shade instead Indicates whether the layout is designed to be used in a modular layout and if so what kind of module See Module Tags Building a Module Local Sound Chooser The local sound chooser is for selecting locomotive horn sounds or layout sounds to play when the train passes a given area Cloudy day whistle wav Heavy freight wav Kola wav Michigan freight waw Shernys durango wav Whistle echo waw Click to play sound For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add a Sound to your Layout The sound chooser shows a subfolder of sounds on your disk which folder depends on whether you are choosing an engine horn sound or a layout sound 1 Click the folder in the tree to show the list of sounds it contains 2 Click a sound in the list to select it 3 Click the icon on the right if you want to hear the sound 4 If you like it click OK to choose the sound and take down the dialog Tree Contents Sounds Loco Engine horn bell whistle sounds Shown when chooser is called from Other on Horn menu in Train Properties below left Sounds Layout Sounds to play when the train passes an area on the layout Shown when chooser is called from Sound browse button in Station Properties below right Hom ime Open Open folder to show list of sounds Refresh Reload folder contents from disk
83. will see the train emerging onto it 7 While the train is jumping you may change its speed or direction and both parts will act together To unlink 1 Right click a linked track section choose Link to Layout then click the Unlink button Curved Track Like the curves in Linn Westcott s book all curves in TrackLayer are circular if you want splines or spiral easements you will have to draw them by hand using short straight segments A curve is created by three objects a circle and two legs like a horseshoe The circle establishes the radius and position of the curve while the legs establish the end points and the approach tracks TrackLayer goes to some trouble to help you make nice curves The program keeps the leg segments exactly tangent to the circles both when drawing and editing This chapter describes how to draw and edit curves and circles Drawing a Curve Editing a Curve Loops and S Curves Helices Drawing Curves To draw a curve first you place the circle then attach the legs If you do this right the circle disappears and a curved track is generated between the leg segments To draw the circle 1 Choose the Circle tool 2 Press the mouse button near where you want the center of the circle 3 Drag to adjust the circle s radius 4 To move the circle instead of resizing it press the Shift Key as you drag 5 Continue dragging toggling the shift key as necessary until th
84. with them Having a lot of ties or roadbed on a layout causes It to slow down in various ways mouse response train movement so you might consider using Export Image to merge the scenery into a single fixed background if you have ties or roadbed The Scenery Toolbar Scenery commands can be found on the Tools menu under Scenery Tools Train Window Help shown at right or on the Scenery Toolbar use View gt Toolbars gt 1 LASS rs ria a i Scenery if you don tsee it Below is a reference guide to the tools All 3 Ee gt are described in more detail in this chapter Sty Station a Edt Selection tool Run Scenery F iy Selector Enable Yard Mode E Ling Pegar Scenery Selector bs is for selecting multiple objects Press Dy Rectangle and drag to completely surround the objects you want to select To Show Numbers E a select single objects or shift select multiple ones you do notneed to p 05an Ai tes Aiea diel Edit Background Draw tools Onbons iel Line Polygon for drawing lines polylines and polygons _ L Lines which share endpoints are automatically fused into polylines Ee View Scenery Chooser T closing a polyline figure creates a filled polygon Rectangle L for drawing simple rectangular objects Oval for drawing circles and ellipses The tool creates a circle To form an ellipse create a circle then change its shape by dragging a side or corner Convenie
85. x 8 HO scale with a 12 grid At this point you can e Load an image Ifyou have a picture or track plan you want to work with ignore the default layout and instead load the picture If the image Is already in the form of a graphics file see Loading an Image in the next section otherwise see Preparing the Image to get the image ready for TrackLayer use e Start drawing The default 4x8 space is ready for track and useful for learning or sketching If you want to start drawing you can go to Straight Track and Switches e Change the size and scale fa 4x8 HO layout isn t what you have in mind create a new blank layout the size and shape you want See Creating a New Blank Layout Once you choose a particular size and scale that becomes the default for all new layouts Layout and Image Files About Layout Files A layout for use in TrainP layer consists of two files The layout file extension rrw The layout file contains the definitions of all tracks trains stations and every other object and bit of data about the layout You can see for yourself an rrw file is plain text in xml format so you can open it with Notepad or any text editor Better yet change Its extension to xml and double click it will open in your browser in collapsible outline form The image file extension jpg omp png gif tpg The image file contains the background graphics scenery text and track lines in a picture
86. you cannot do Is change the background from static to animated or vice versa If you try this an alert tells you it is not allowed Creating Your Own Animations If you want to create your own animations one method is to obtain a program capable of making animated gifs Many such programs are available Adobe ImageReady CyD GIF Studio Microsoft GIF Animator several shareware titles but TrainPlayer offers an easier way create a series of images give them suitable filenames and import them with one Click into a single object A series of images is a set of files in the same folder with names ending in underscore then sequential numbers starting with 1 e g flagman_1 png flagman_2 png flagman_3 png Using Load Bitmap if you browse to a file whose name ends with 1 and there are other files with the same name but different numbers the program will prompt and ask if you wish to create an animated image from the Series like this i a4 Graphics File Series auto_l png appears to be the first of a series of graphics files Do you want to import the series as an animated image Don t ask me this again k a Click Yes and the program will create a file with the name of the series and extension anm e g flagman anm then load it into the scenery object When you create an animated image from a series of files the Frames dialog Shown above comes up so you can Set the frame timings By default all are set t
87. 00 is defined somewhat arbitrarily as that zoom which causes grid lines to be one inch apart on the screen At50 they are a half inch apart at 200 two inches In other words these commands move your vantage point to one of a set of fixed distances above the layout Fit to Window scales so the entire layout fits into the frame window same as the command on the View menu does Zoom On Drag zooms in to an area defined by a user drawn rectangle This command is available only in TrackLayer To use 1 Activate the Edit or the Track tool The command Is dimmed if any other tool is in use 2 Right click anywhere on the layout and choose Zoom On Drag This checkmarks the item on the menu and puts you In a special mode temporarily 3 Press and drag to define a selection rectangle around the area you want to zoom in on 4 When you release the drag the indicated area will zoom to fill the window 5 The command works for one drag only it automatically reverts to unchecked after each use 6 If you change your mind choose Zoom On Drag again from the menu to toggle it off Auto View Restore New in version 5 2 when you save a layout it saves the window size and position along with the current zoom and view settings The next time you open the layout it comes up looking the same way you left it Rotating a Layout Any layout can be rotated a quarter turn in either direction Both the track and the background image are rotated and bot
88. 2 209 249 b4 1 107 1 e o O e Undo ut Copy Delete Select All a0 To Statement Ctrl 2 Chrl Cr Del Chrl 4 This is not quite as handy as itsounds Moving the script pointer does not move the trains so unless the trains are in the right places starting the script from an arbitrary statement will not work well However there is a detail which can get around this in many cases if the line you select has a position indicator Specifying a precise location an AT T D wait condition then the train will jump to that location when you choose the command The train and script will be in synch and playback will work as expected But there is another detail This is nota rewind The train which jumps is the current train with its current consist of cars If you have done some coupling or uncoupling since the script ran past that statement then jumping back to it may not restore the original arrangement lM Rewind Points In the context of TrainPlayer rewind means set up the trains in preparation for an operating session Normally when you open a layout file it is already in this situation everything Is in the right place to start so you can just hit Play Now suppose you play the script partway through lose interest and decide to do a bit of track repair You move some track around then save your changes Oops At this point the trains are in random positions If you overwrote the o
89. 3 comente ocenic Plans ie nt 3 comer tjpg i d Track Plans iie ree ed 3 19 2012 6 06 AM i nt 2s rrw Date modifed HE Wy Fil Le 435 KB oa Be sure to choose a file with extension rrw If you drag the wrong type of file nothing will happen when you drop it Rearranging Modules Once you have more than one module in the Module Manager window you can move them around or delete them by drag and drop or by rearranging rows in the list box After any such operation the overall assembly is reconfigured to reflect the change By drag and drop 1 Position the cursor over the middle of a module press the left button and begin to drag The module takes on a hatched pattern meaning itis on the move em Se A ee 1 Drag to any of the locations indicated above to the edge of a module on top of a module and let go The module is moved from its original location to the new one 2 To remove a module from the assembly drag the module and release it on an empty space where nothing is highlighted i e drag it out of the assembly onto the floor By list box 1 Select a module by clicking on it in the workspace or by clicking a row in the list box The module is highlighted with a colored frame and the selected row is highlighted in the list box 2 Click the up or down arrow to the right of the list box labelled move selected above The module will trade places with the one immediately above or below i
90. 43 61 S92 Route 1d Shenmen Ceni a lierchonje il 82 a a 65 53 L73 17245 43 61 59 92 Route 19 Shennan Demer Ierchanje af 0 LT 2 E7 D535 L73 172 231 3 43 G1 59 92 Route 2 Shemen Demer Lords Interch 30 45 14 5 5 155 i73 172 29 2598 220 227 J21 222 45 4361 Fe 92 Route 21 Sherman Denver Lyora bech 33 2 1 iz 1 25 153 173 172 231 238 226 222 45 43 61 59 SF Route 22 Sherman D me LyorsjInterch 25 7 7 G 1 ve L33 173 22 227 45 43 Gi 59 92 ri Route 23 Shennan Oenver Lyorainterch 47 8S 12 75 E53 173 221 22245 172 231 33 43 61 59 92 se To operate 1 In the From and To boxes select the endpoints of the route you want to find For each end you can select either a station by name or a junction by number using drop down menus If you select a station the route will go to or from the junction nearest the center of the station rectangle As soon as you have made choices for both ends the dialog will display the distance a crow would fly between the two points expressed in actual feet and inches 2 Click Go The program begins finding routes and displays a new row in the list for each one it finds The information shown for each route Is e Name an arbitrary but unique name assigned to the route e From To endpoints as chosen in step 1 same for every row e Via a list of the stations the route passes through on its way e Length total length by rail of the route To change the units
91. A the only objects selected will be ties The selection you make in this menu stays in effect until you change back to Any Scenery Standard Editing Operations As with just about any selection in any Windows program e To delete selected object s choose Edit Clear from the main menu or press Del e To copy selected object s to the Clipboard choose Edit Copy from the main menu or right click a selected object and choose Copy or press Ctrl C A copy of the selected object s Is made on the Windows Clipboard If you choose Cut Ctrl X instead of Copy the objects are copied and then deleted e To paste objects from the Clipboard choose Edit Paste or press Ctrl V Objects previously copied to the Clipboard are deposited at the upper left of the screen selected and ready to move into position e To undo an editing operation after any move resize rotation property change or other modification of selected objects choose Edit Undo or press Ctrl Z to revert back to the state before the change e To redo an undone operation after an Undo choose Edit Redo or press Ctrl Y to undo the undo and revert back to the changed state Moving and Resizing Once one or more objects is selected e To move the selected object s press the interior of any selected object the cursor changes to a four headed arrow and drag All selected objects will move simultaneously e To resize a single object press a drag handle on any side or corner curs
92. All Retouchable from the track context menu All untouchable tracks become unmarked and touchable Turntables and Transfer Tables The TrainP layer portion of the M p o St prer manual describes how r ae turntables and transfer tables look and behave This section describes how to build them w with TrackLayer A turntable consists of two objects a circle and a ee bridge trackwhich crosses the circle and passes through the center When you rotate the table by double clicking a point on the rim or right Clicking and choosing a Rotate command from the menu the bridge rotates until either end is touching an end of an external connecting track At this point it stops and the superimposed endpoints become a single junction a train can cross An alternative to a turntable is a transfer table a rectangular bed with a bridge which moves laterally In this case a double click inside the table area causes the bridge to move slowly in the direction of the click until it locks onto the next connecting track This section describes how to build and edit turntables and transfer tables Creating a Turntable Creating a Transfer Table Creating a Transfer Table A transfer table has several moving parts a combination of scenery and track They are e Pit the bed over which the bridge moves This is a rectangular scenery object so can be solid or filled with bitmap or pattern default is solid ivory color
93. Dimmed on root folder of tree Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Find Next Go to next hit after Find ages E Properties Display folder properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames List Menu Open Choose selected sound take down dialog For more information about sounds see Horns and Sounds also Stations Local Car Chooser The local car chooser Is for selecting cars and adding them to the layout This chooser is also used to create new car collections Larypes For general information about choosers see Choosers To Add a Car to the Layout 1 Choose a car collection in the tree and click to open it A car collection is shown as a folder with a locomotive icon When you open a collection you see its cars in the list window 2 Click one of the cars in the list window You see its side and top view in the preview window 3 To add this car to the layout click Add Car or double click the icon The car is added to the currently selected train at the current position of the insert pin If there is no train selected the car is added to a random track The car chooser is a modeless dialog it remains on the screen so you can keep adding cars When you are finished click Done If you change your mind use Edit gt Undo to remove added cars You can choose whether you want the list view to show side views as shown above or top vie
94. Finder does not find the shortest or most efficient or most logistically effective route for you It finds ALL possible routes Subject to filters that you set The selection of the BEST route is up to you and depends on a number of factors in each Session Operations The TrainPlayer Operations System Ops was developed to answer the question you might find yourself asking after you ve opened a layout and run the trains around a while Now what On a real railroad you would report to the yard first thing in the morning punch in get your work orders from the dispatcher climb into your cab and head out to make money for the railroad On a club layout it s the same idea except for the early morning and the money parts But if you re an old guy sitting in front of a computer all by yourself there s nobody to tell you what to do you have to just make it up as you go along Until now that is Meet your new dispatcher TrainP layer Ops There is a lot of reading matter on this subject If you re not into reading skip to the Quick Start Otherwise glance through the chapter and see what you re In for About Ops How To Use Ops Switchlists Waybills Ops Generators Ops Windows Ops Setup Wizard About Ops TrainP layer Ops is a set of features designed to give you a feel for real world for profit railroading It means moving goods by rail between shippers and receivers on and off the layout Industries issue the shipping orders t
95. For viewing and editing properties of the selected car Called from Properties on the Car context menu See also About the Properties Dialog Layout Properties Hopper Default Steam collection Class HK Hopper 2 divided hopper bays Car io JHK463 Size 38 X 102 pes Rar Car properties are of two Kinds those associated with the general car type and those of the individual car For example two forty foot wood boxcars are of the same car type have the same shape and appearance but differ in the numbers painted on their sides In this dialog you set properties of the individual car You cannot change the car type if you have a boxcar and want a flatcar instead you have to delete the car and create a new one Car type data Top and side images of the car type The top image resizes with the dialog side does not These images belong to the images car collection and cannot be changed here text The block of text at the upper right includes car type name collection name AAR code and class and class description Collection Click to view or edit the car type properties in the Car Collection Editor Size of the car length x width as viewed from the top In the units selected in the drop down Changing the size in this size dialog changes only the currently selected car To change the size of all cars of this type use the Car Collection Editor Units Units for car size display Uni
96. Junction number must not be preceded by J A switch position is 0 or 1 for a normal two way switch or a higher value for multi way switches The value corresponding to a particular configuration must be determined using a tooltip Or you can use an insert command to let the program determine the value and insert it into the script The TRAIN command was introduced in Version 4 2 Itselects a specified train as if you had clicked on it The argument can be a a train name b a numeric train id as seen in the Train Properties dialog or c the car top label of any car in which case the train selected is the one containing that car Examples train Broadway Local selects train named Broadway Local train 44 selects train with id 44 train X68 selects train containing car X68 Menu Commands The set of commands available for scripting is not limited to the commands listed above Any command on the menu can be used in a script Executing a menu command from a script causes the same action as choosing it from the menu To specify a menu command enter the names as they appear in the menu starting with a main menu item File Edit etc followed by a Submenu item File Open Edit Copy etc and a third if the menu goes deeper If an item at any level consists of more than one word the item must be enclosed in quotes As a Shortcut you do not need to spell out all the words in full You may abbreviate a menu Item to its first few characters ju
97. Layer was designed to accommodate Most of the features of the program are aimed at tracing over a diagram applying track where lines are already laid out If you don t have a diagram you can draw a plan by hand ona blank tabletop If a rectangular space will do choose the size and scale you want and you re ready to lay track If you are designing for an L or odd shaped Space you might consider using a drawing program to make a scale drawing of the space outline as background for sketching track Starting TrackLayer Layout and Image Files The Overall Process What s Next Try your hand at creating a small layout the Rockport amp Oyster Bay in the tutorial Starting TrackLayer There is only one program containing both TrainP layer and Tracklayer To start the program Select TrainPlayer from the Start menu under Programs gt TrainPlayer or double click the icon on your desktop The splash screen and about box will tell whether you are running in TrainPlayer or TrackLayer mode as determined from the license key you entered If you are running the demo version you have a choice At startup you are presented with an alert asking if you would like to enable TrackLayer features The demo version allows you to use all TrackLayer features except Save and Print TrainFleyer 2 The demo version contains both TranPiowe and TrsckLarer Ey dafault TratLaper feshires are noftemabled To erable thee moe click Yes Click No to proc
98. Link Link to document C Program Filesi TrainPlayeriLayoutsL 1 rr Link ID A Unlink Cancel OK amp Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Sy sa ion g Untouchable R et ti ae Al Retgi hahle 5 AA ae a BSS seas lt lt si el aes 3 Oe Ae AN SUF 2 ME Le lt A Re Di db Cue ctre 2 With the Edit or Track tool selected right click the track section and choose Link to Layout The Layout Link dialog appears 3 Choose the target layout In the Link to document box enter the path to a layout file or use the Browse button to navigate to one Or if the layout is already open in another window choose it from the drop down menu 4 Assign a Link ID The Link ID is a label used to connect this track to a specific track on the target layout In the example this particular jump off point is called A When the train jumps from this point onto the target layout if it finds a linked track called A it will land there If it does not find a matching label it will jump to an arbitrary place Thus in order to set up a precise jump you will need to follow this same procedure on both layouts 5 Click OK and the link is set up 6 Drive a train onto the linked track and keep going as if you were driving right past the stub When the train reaches the end it will begin a jump The other layout will be automatically opened if not already on the screen will come to the front and you
99. Oyster Bay About the Grid Adjusting the Grid Resizing and Rescaling Drawing Straight Track and Switches Editing Track Special Track Drawing Curves Editing a Curve Loops and S Curves Helices Creating a Turntable Creating a Transfer Table r Railroading Punts Yo our ine yout Importing CAD Welcome to TrainPlayer TrainPlayer simulates operating a model railroad layout on the computer It is designed for all types of model railroad fan from the one who has built a railroad empire in the basement to the one who dreams of doing so to the one who never will but just likes to run trains Opening a layout file in TrainPlayer is like walking into a room and finding a fully built model railroad with clean tracks attractive scenery a couple of trains and a control panel sitting in the corner You nudge the speed dial and one of the trains starts to move You form a smile and crank up the speed Welcome to TrainP layer TrainP layer works with pictures of track plans which have been specially prepared by the addition of electronic tracks The pictures might be renderings by Kalmbach artists or digital outout from your favorite CAD program or scanned in drawings made with pencil and paper A set of features known as Trac kLayer described in the second half of this manual is used to apply the track switches and turntables In TrainPlayer you add trains Cars and stations and
100. S ir e Delete scenery after export Merge Background only delete all ORES ae scenery from the layout since it will be embedded in the background ee eae Se meee Save file after export Merge Background only bring up a file dialog for Saving the modified rrw file Click Finish to do the export or Cancel to dismiss the wizard without finishing I Show picture after export lt Back Cercel He eaS Running Trains 4 If you ve operated trains on a model railroad then operating them in TrainP layer should come easily This chapter gives the details About Trains The Control Panel Moving Trains By Hand Yard Mode The Train Window The Train Toolbar Switches Coupling and Uncoupling Horns and Sounds Turntables About Trains In TrainP layer a train is defined as any contiguous set of cars whether moving or not with or without motive power a Single car sitting on a Siding is considered a train However a train will not move unless ithas an engine To move an engineless set of cars you must either couple them to a powered train or use artificial means equivalent to a railroader s hand reaching across the tracks In some areas the TrainP layer definition of the word train is different from that of the prototype where the definition is one or more engines with or without cars displaying markers In this definition a train need not have cars coupled to the engine but cars without an engine ar
101. Setup Wizard or b open an ops ready layout which already has them all set up see Ops Quick Start In any case you might want to skim this chapter to familiarize yourself with the various parts This chapter also includes instructions for using the Route Finder a device for finding track paths from one location to another Stations Industries Yards and Interchanges Station Properties Industry Browser Route Finder Stations In TrainPlayer a station is a named location on the layout It may represent a terminal loading dock warehouse yard city or any place a train might stop to interchange passengers or goods By defining stations on the layout you give the program a way to keep track of where a train has travelled Two new types of station have been introduced as part of the Ops system yards and interchanges These are used as areas for storing exchanging and manipulating cars when shipping and receiving goods These types of stations called yard style have somewhat different properties and methods of creation than normal stations as detailed below A station is represented on the layout as a rectangular area with a dashed blue outline and one or two lines of text Stations are visible only at certain times a when you are using the Station tool b when you choose View Stations or c when you are working In an ops session Stations may have sounds attached to them The sound will play whenever
102. Station Sounds Layout Properties Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Always dimmed in this web chooser Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all sounds within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all sounds within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Find Next Download All Download Missing Items Download Missing Items List Menu Open Open Download selected sound and switch to local tab For more information about sounds see Horns and Sounds also Stations
103. TOWH j i i a J rA i rai DLL y a i i e Otiginal copyrigh SKsimbach Publishing Co Licensed to TP Develape a e From scratch Even if you start with a blank layout TrackLayer provides assistance in creating modules Choose File gt New to bring up the New Layout dialog Choose one of the standard NTrak sizes from the Size drop down If Add connectors is checked then the new layout will be created with stubs on each side appropriately positioned as shown below Scale s M Add comectors Cancel Dimensions Heaght 2 Layout inches Width 24 This feature is available only for NTrak modules not HO or other scales Module Orientation The Module Manager requires module layouts to be oriented in specific ways as shown in the following table Straight a Main line across bottom Corner i fff Main line from lower left to upper right a a n a e ee al ce bil sssnonnnn y a eem En a Inside Corner i NR Main line from upper left to lower right Junction Main line across bottom switchable to alternate main on each end Whatever method you use to create a module make sure itis oriented as shown here Do not use View Rotate or other means to reorient it or the Module Manager will not interpret it correctly Module Tags The program is not yet smart enough to look ata layout and determine that itis a module Itis up to the creator of the module to supply this informa
104. The train enters at one level changes altitude gradually as it proceeds up or down a series of loops and emerges at another level None of Linn Westcott s 101 Track Plans has a helix but many modern track plans and club layouts do For an elegant example see ohn Armstrong s Southern Pacific Lines Shasta Division featured in Model Railroader April 2005 It takes some effort to draw a helix in TrackLayer but it s worth it When a train enters the helix and climbs it in a series of slow loops it comes to life and makes sense out of that bundle of looped wires on the track plan Drawing a Helix Draw a helix by starting at the bottom with the lower approach track and the lowest loop Proceed upwards adding and connecting new loops right on top of the lower ones To do this requires a special device because normally if you put circles on top of each other then when you try to add tangents they won t snap to the right places The secret is to mark track as untouchable Once a loop is in place you can mark it so it will not be affected when you add the next loop As you draw each loop you leave a little handle sticking out so you can connect it to the next loop In this example we will construct a circular two loop helix with the lower approach from the northwest and the upper exit to the northeast 1 Draw a circle Circle tool 2 Draw the lower approach track Track tool f 3 Draw a short straight segment at
105. The rrw file will be saved to the indicated location and alongside will be a _ files subfolder containing external files Importing CAD Layouts To convert a layout created in a CAD program you must be running TrackLayer the import feature is not available in TrainP layer Details of the import process vary depending on the input Importing from Atlas Right Track or WinRail You need a working copy of Atlas Right Track or WinRail ver 8 or 9 recommended in order to export an image of the layout If you do not have the program installed you can still convert the track but will not have a background image WinRail Cary Grant RR2 Seles File Edit View Element Properties Tools Statistics Special Help 000 8 SGe66E0NeE IIE xo oom 1 at a PRRECEan0TKKA HS m m ot h m F i a 276 0 105 35 Tool Arrow To import from ART or WR In TrackLayer choose File gt Import gt WinRail or Atlas Right Track 2 In the file dialog navigate to the ral file to be imported and click Open 3 Ifno image file is found alongside the ral file you are offered the opportunity to create one Click Yes to proceed to the next step If you do not care to have a background image click No to skip to step 5 4 WinRail or Atlas Right Track is launched with the selected file on display Choose File gt Save As and choose file type jpg in Atlas Right Track
106. Track Checker now gives you more information in a more useful form Output is given in a list box and includes not just errors but data such as external links associated files and required car collections If you click on an error line the layout zooms to that location and highlights the offending track automatically The Track Highlight dialog also has this new auto zoom feature Track color Now you can color individual track sections or choose a color for new track so that you can draw a whole yard or mainline in the shade of your choice Some of the satellite layouts use different track colors to clarify complex multi line yards Zoom The Zoom menu now includes choices for quick zoom to percent sizes Or to zoom to a specific area choose zoom on drag and drag a rectangle around the area Export image Generate a J PG or your choice of graphic format which shows track grid background and or trains Output size and quality is adjustable Publish New dialogs prepare layouts and car collections for publication gather the components unify links and filenames check for errors copy to a destination folder We developed these tools for our own use but they are handy for anyone who shares layouts and cars Help buttons have been added to all dialogs showing context specific pages from the local help file Show hide delete trains Now you can toggle display of trains along with track grid background A new button in prefere
107. Train Tree The Train Tree is a standard Windows tree control useful for surveying and navigating your rolling stock It displays car ID s and train names For example Jersey Valley Central RR E Boxcarl Freight lM Steam f T408 Tankcar 7411 Tankcar HE C414 Caboose a Freight Wi E54 Stearn wP H399 Hopper w H40 Hopper EI Boxcars1 ES p04 Boxcar ES B05 Boxcar A train having a script attached to it is shown with s in the tree This tree shows that the J ersey Valley Central has four trains two freights and two strings of boxcars To use the Train Tree e Click to select a train and or car Ifyou click a train name it selects the train and makes it active If you click a car name it selects both the train and the car e Right click a car or train and choose an action from the context menu The context menu is the Same as the one you get when you right click a car in a train window or on the layout Uniontown Southern RP dA Freight E90 Steam EF 6417 Boxcar A 9420 Gondola gop H H Reefersi d Cut Car Ctrl Hoppers Copy Car Chrl c HA Switcher Delete Car Delete SAE Freight K TI Uncouple Ctrl U Add Car d Cut Properties Sony es oe Delete Reverse Ear Properties Note as soon as you right click a car or train in the tree it becomes the selected car or train e Use up down arrow keys to navigate the tree As you move to a car or train it becomes selected Statio
108. TrainPlayer the Layout Chooser appears The San Jose Central Shady Grove amp Shenill The St Paul Central If the chooser doesn t appear at startup you can bring it up using File gt Open Layout To open a layout click to select it in the list then click Open Or double click in the list To sort the list by number name size date or filename click on the header at the top of the corresponding column Click again to sort in reverse order To resize the dialog drag by the lower right corner For more about this dialog see Layout Chooser and Choosers Other ways to open layout files e Use File Open Ga and choose a file from the Windows file system e Use File Open Layout LB to bring up the Layout Chooser e Double click an rrw file on your desktop or in Windows Explorer e Select one or more rrw files in Windows Explorer and drag them into the TrainP layer window Errors on Opening Layout When you open a layout the program checks to see if all the referenced components are available e Ifthe layout refers to a non existent background file an alert informs you of this and the layout opens without the background e Ifthe layout refers to cars or scenery objects which cannot be found in your local collections the Missing Car Scenery dialog comes up and offers to download the missing items e Ifthe layout refers to other layouts linked to it you will get an alert when the train reaches the jumping off spot on the track and tries to
109. Width Click to retrieve an assembly previously saved as a Module Definition MDEF file For information about MDEF files see below Load Warning Loading an MDEF file replaces the current contents of the manager without asking if you want to save it first Save Click to save the current assembly to MDEF for later reuse See below Reset This Reset the current display item to factory settings Changes do not become permanent until you click OK Reset All Reset all display items to factory settings Changes do not become permanent until you click OK OK Cancel Click OK to retain the current settings and make them permanent Click Cancel to revert to settings in effect before the dialog came up Module Definition MDEF files Module definition files provide a lightweight convenient way to avoid having to rebuild the same assembly more than once A file with extension MDEF is a simple xml file readable in Notepad which contains a list of the current set of modules and their arrangement basically the same information you see in the Module Manager listbox If you have an arrangement you might want to reuse save itto an MDEF file Later you can load it and get back the same arrangement MDEF files are not designed to be portable or exportable They contain pathnames pointing to the individual module files If you move or rename any of these the mdef may not load correctly For convenience you can load an mdef file by dragging
110. a series of modules into a seamless loop And if the width were much bigger than 8 feet you d never get the thing in the truck Module Types a J AA Straight Corner Junction A straight module has connection points on opposite edges of a rectangle You can join another module on either side The main line is in front and generally goes straight across A corner module has connection points on adjacent sides of a square with curved track between When you join two modules onto a corner they form a 90 degree angle Only the outer tracks proceed through a corner module An inside corner module is an inverted corner which introduces a turn in the opposite direction Inside corner modules are not common A junction module has four sets of connection points on three sides of a rectangle in a back to back corner arrangement You can join up to four other modules to a junction one on each side two at the top i e with reference to the above diagram Switches in the track provide a choice of travel directions for a train going through a junction it can go straight across on the main line or make a 90 degree turn into a branch another chain of modules This picture shows a Junction module with all its connection points hooked up J unction modules allow a variety of show floor arrangements Without them you can set up only chains and loops Using junctions you can create spidery patterns with multiple loops and chains all connecte
111. a solid color Solid To change the color click the colored button to bring up the Colors dialog Choose or adjust the color using either tab of the dialog Choose this to fill the object with one of the system defined hatch patterns Choose a pattern from the drop down choice list Hatched Hatched ack Di HHH Setthe foreground line color of the pattern using the color button The hatch patterns are provided by system brushes They do not offer much flexibility you cannot change the background color or line width and the patterns do not stretch or rotate Choose this to fill the object with an image from a graphics file When you do this Bitmap other choices appear on the dialog as described below Adjusts the degree of transparency of the background fill or pattern When set to zero slider at left the object is completely opaque and obscures objects underneath When set to 100 slider at right the object is fully transparent as if you had chosen No Fill Values in between cause the Transparency background to be semi transparent see through to a given extent Note choosing a non zero value for transparency adds complexity and slows down the drawing process It is not recommended that you use transparency for large background objects Bitmap settings When the background choice is set to Bitmap additional options are available The image itself comes from a graphics file which must b
112. a train goes through the station Available sounds include farm noises traffic crossing bells running water and many others or you can supply your own Many of the layouts available in TrainPlayer are equipped with stations The ops version provides a generator which can create them automatically If neither of those helps this section describes how to create or edit your own stations by hand About arrivals and departures The point of a station is to let the program know where a car is located so it is useful to understand how it determines that Associated with each station is one or more track sections You can see these by hovering over a station edge using the Station tool For a car to be in a Station it must be on one of these track sections Ata normal station the car must also be sitting completely or partially within the station rectangle at a yard style station this is not required A car arrives at a normal station when it a is on one of the station s tracks and b crosses the rectangular boundary It arrives ata yard style station when it moves onto any of the station s tracks It departs when these conditions are no longer met A train arrives at a station when its lead car moves into the station It departs when its last car leaves A car is considered to be ina station when it meets the above requirements Itis ata station when any car of the same train is in the station Creating a Station 1 Click to select th
113. able is not useful unless it has external tracks for entry and exit An external track must have one endpoint lying on the edge of the pit and is normally perpendicular to the rails You must construct the table before drawing or attaching external tracks that is if you already have tracks in place and you attempt to move a table so that it touches them it won t work Note size position and rotate the table before connecting external tracks These tracks do not move if you later decide to reposition the table 1 Choose the Track tool 2 Begin drawing a track section outside the table Drag the end until it touches and highlights the table edge as shown here left When you let go the track snaps to perpendicular right Note that the edge of the table will highlight only if you are touching a serviceable location It must be a on one of the two edges perpendicular to the bridge and b more than half a bridge width from the side of the pit 3 Test your work Double click the pit on the external track side and the bridge should move until it locks onto the track To make a cross over If you want the engine to be able to drive straight across the table you must take care to make sure the connecting tracks are aligned Here s the best way Draw the first track as described above to define where you want the cross over Double click to move the bridge until it locks onto that track Draw the second track drop
114. aches it to the scheduled train 8 Assigns a load and a loaded empty status to each car in the list Destination industries are taken into account when assigning loads you can take a loaded car to an industry which receives that load or an empty car to one which ships it but not vice versa 9 Displays the results One new row goes in the scheduled train window cars and destinations become rows in the Switchlist window and a set of text instructions is created and displayed in the schedule window Color codes are enabled and displayed Car labels are shown on the cars involved in the switchlist All ops windows are brought up if not already on display The ops generator replaces any existing scheduled train and switchlist with the generated one If you undo an ops generation it goes back to the previous version Ops Windows There is a lot of data associated with ops and thus a new type of window for viewing and interacting with it an Ops Window a dockable window containing an Car Class interactive grid The grids come from BCGSoft and are quite full featured like miniature spreadsheets In the current version there are two ops windows one showing the current switchlist the other the inventory of cars on the layout Features the two have in common are described below For screen shots contents and details specific to each see Switchlist Window and Cars Window By default these windows come up as a tabbed pair docked to th
115. ack and choose All Retouchable This reverts all untouchable track to its normal state Clipping Regions Hidden track works fine for long tunnels but for short sections going beneath underpasses or behind scenery a better scheme is required In TrainP layer tricks involving track marked Tunnel are used to hide specific areas These tricks can be used to indicate clip angles at tunnel portals or to define regions of invisibility Tunnel portal clipping where the train is moving between hidden and normal track and needs to be clipped to a specific angle For this effect draw a section of Tunnel track passing over the junction between hidden and normal track This section defines the clip angle The tunnel track section must not be connected to anything else must not form a Switch with the track it crosses and must pass directly over the hidden to normal junction Overpass Clipping where the train is to be completely hidden as it passes through a given region For this effect draw a clipping box Surrounding each area to be hidden A box must consist of exactly four connected track segments all marked Tunnel Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable Delete Track As a shortcut you can shift click to select all segments at once then point to any one and choose Tunnel from the context menu Boxes appear as dotted gray lines shown only when Track or Edit tool is active When t
116. ack plan from a book or magazine or a drawing on a sheet of paper the picture will need to be scanned or otherwise digitized Here are three ways to do this e Scan it yourself Ifyou have a scanner set it for 300 DPI scan and use the scanner software to crop and rotate the image if necessary Save as PG e Visit Kinko s Many outfits will do scanning Take the picture a few dollars a blank CD if you have one and return with an image file e Use a camera A good high resolution image can be made with a digital camera aimed at a layout picture or at the layout itself if you have the equipment and the Know how Images from the Web f you have a track plan on a Web page you can save it as a J PG file for use in TrackLayer In Internet Explorer you can do this by right clicking on the image and choosing Save Picture AS Be sure you re saving the largest possible image Don t save a thumbnail picture Images in CAD programs all CAD programs save files in some format and many will save to standard graphics formats If your CAD program can save to J PG BMP GIF or PNG you re all set just save the file in one of those formats and it can be used in TrackLayer Many programs allow you to set export options depending on the output format chosen If you can set options be Sure to choose high resolution or highest quality before you export If your program does not export to one of the formats listed above but to another such
117. ag ona line or intersection and the grid resizes relative to the origin intersection of the red lines Hold down the shift key while you drag and the entire grid moves without resizing The cursor changes to a four headed arrow when you have the shift key down With that background here s how to use the grid to set up a layout We ll start with the easiest case where the image has grid lines spaced according to the Westcott conventions 12 apart in HO etc see About Sizes and Scales for the complete list If the spacing is different on your image or it doesn t have any grid lines see below 1 Open the image file The program grid comes up automatically not quite aligned with the image grid In this example we re using the Reddy River amp Piedras RR plan 4 If you have this layout and want to follow along open the file LO4 tpg in your TrainP layer Layouts lmages directory How well the default grid lines up with the image depends on several factors the main one being the resolution of the image If you start with a low resolution image 72 dpi then the initial alignment will be way off 2 Select the Edit Track tool i 3 Hold down the shift key point to any intersection point on the grid press and drag toward the lower right The entire grid moves and the red origin lines become visible 4 Drag until the red lines are superimposed on two lines in the image then release This establishes the origin point 5
118. agination will limit the layout designs you can now create with TrainPlayer Scenery Toolkit Use Train New Train to create a train on your layout You re ready to begin operating Choosing Scenery TrainP layer offers a large and growing collection of scenery objects of all types buildings trees factories streets vehicles background patterns industrial complexes a regular Walthers catalog of goods you can add to your layout A small subset of these is delivered to your disk when you install the program Many more are available on the web easily downloaded with a minimum of clicks About the Scenery Chooser Like the other Chooser dialogs the Scenery Chooser is a resizable three panel dialog with a tree on the left a list in the middle and a preview panel on the right There are two tabs one for local scenery stored on your disk the other for scenery on the web The tree can be configured to show your own content located anywhere on your disk or network For more information see Scenery Chooser But unlike the others the Scenery Chooser not designed for selecting a single result like opening a layout or choosing a sound Instead it stays open like a box of scenery on the floor you browse through it grab what you want put it on the layout and repeat until you ve built a whole town or planted a forest along the entire main line The dialog is modeless so you can work on the layout without
119. ain Publish Check Track Options TrainPlayer Cra TrackLayer Ft Dodge Elk City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help 50 100 150 200 400 7 k Load Unload Train Publish Chee Carbon I TrackLayer Ft Dodge amp Elk City RR File Edit View Tools Train Window Help oe i ed lt 2 amp BS X Bes A 50 100 150 200 400 kk o oe g g U a O a es ee sd i o Load Unload Cut Load Unload Train Publish Visual Studio Style Road Preferences Setting for tie and roadbed styles Called from menu command File gt Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches Style Road Ties Length Note changes in these settings do not apply to existing ties or roadbed Tie Properties Settings in this part of the dialog affect Ties a scenery feature Ties are rotated solid color rectangular objects The default values you set in this dialog affect new ties created by the Add Ties command After ties are created you can modify their individual sizes and shapes by normal scenery editing methods e Length length of each tie in units selected in the Units drop down at the bottom of the dialog The diagram at right shows which dimension is which e Width width of each tie length leneon e Spacing distance between tie centers e Color color of generated ties If you want to change the color of a group of ties or change from solid to bitmap background
120. ainP layer Two or more cars coupled together and not coupled to a train is a cut To name a train or cut You can name a train in either of two ways e Right click any car in a train or cut either on the layout or in a train window and choose Name Entera name in the prompt dialog and click OK The title of the dialog indicates whether you are naming a train or a Cut Enter name Engine Coal sa e Or Right click a car choose Properties go to the Train tab and enter a name Layout Properties Train ID 48 One box freight The name you supply may get passed around as cars are coupled or uncoupled In general for a train the name stays with the engine for a cut it applies to that specific set of cars whenever they are coupled together in any order and not coupled to any other cars But there are other details to consider as spelled out in the Naming Rules below To see train naming in action 1 Name some trains and cuts on your layout 2 Use View gt Ops to bring up the Cars window 3 If the window does not include the column Train right click the grid bring up the Field Chooser and drag the Train column onto the grid header The train column shows the train name if any for every car 4 Do some couplings and uncouplings Note how train names change in the grid as you perform the moves Train Naming Rules It is not really necessary for you to know the details of how names move around Our goal
121. am goes to some trouble to ensure that every car on the layout has a unique ID and warns you if this is not the case e atext label which you can optionally display on top of the car Initially the label is a combination of the car class and the ID where the Class is represented by one or two letters a gondola might be labelled G64 a steam engine ES99 However the label can be edited so you can change It to say whatever you like You do not need to ensure the label is unique Unfortunately the terminology in the program confuses these two The menu command for turning car labels on and off is Show Car IDs on the Train menu The text box where you edit the label in Car Properties is called Car ID Both actually refer to car labels not internal IDs In Ops windows the car label is displayed in a column simply called Car For information about how to display car IDs see Car ID Display Car Images Cars are displayed in two ways as top views on the layout and as side views in the train windows Each view of each car type Is in a separate file so a typical car collection has a folder containing dozens of small image files You can find plenty of examples in your Cartypes folder These image files are not created or edited in TrainPlayer If you want to modify car images say to apply your own paint scheme to a set of cars or create a new collection from scratch you will need to use a bitmap editing program such as Paint which comes
122. and a list of incoming and outgoing car types used by the ops generator to decide what sorts of cars can come and go there Like stations industries can be created by hand either by choosing from a master list or inventing on the spot but it s faster and more interesting to let the industry generator do the job The Industry Generator assigns random industries to stations on the layout It works like this 1 Assigns the special types Yard Tracks and Interchange to all yards and interchanges These have generous lists of car types you can set out or pick up on yards and interchanges Actually this step is done during station generation 2 Goes to each station on the layout and chooses a random industry from the master list The choice is based on car types located in the vicinity for example at a siding where there are tank cars the selected industry might be a dairy Stations with no cars nearby may not get an industry assigned 3 Updates the stations on the layout to show the industry names These steps are done automatically when you use Generate Ops A more interactive approach is to use the Ops Wizard or the Generate Industries command These bring up the Industry Generator dialog Here you can choose where and how to generate industries in a couple of ways e Checkmark the stations where you want industries generated then click Generate Checked Or e Click a row to select a station then click Generate to have the program
123. and the open closed light Size of highlight square in arbitrary units Check to allow a train to pass through a closed Switch If this box is unchecked then when a train attempts to enter a switch from a closed track i e pass through a red light it collides bounces or crashes depending on the collision mode see Operation Auto throw Random throw Switch Window Background Show Next Switch A stronger version of Barrel Through allows a train to pass through a closed switch then changes the Switch to match the route taken This is the default and allows for easy if non realistic operation the train meanders the layout setting switches to follow the route as It goes Check to have a random switch thrown every so often where the time between throws Is set in the number box to the right This is a way to vary the route if you just want to let the trains run Click to set the background color of the Switch Window Check to have the window redrawn every time the train moves across a Switch so itis always showing the next switch coming up along the route Uncheck if you prefer to operate the window manually In either case click a switch on the layout to reposition the window around that area General Preferences Various program settings Called from menu command File gt Preferences Uptions MW Show cartop ime Jes Iv Layout sounds General options Metric units Show car top images
124. annot select columns To select the entire grid right click and choose Select All Select rows or cells as above then choose Copy from the context menu This copies text to the Windows Clipboard no images The selection can then be pasted into Notepad Excel or other programs Right click and choose Column Auto Resize When checked this causes columns to automatically resize to fill the grid whenever its window is resized When unchecked columns remain at fixed sizes Right click a grid cell and choose Zoom To lt object gt This zooms the layout to be centered on the selected object car station train or industry Drag the Image column header off the grid This removes the pictures from the grid and causes all rows to shrink to Standard text height To bring the images back use the Field Chooser AAR Location Load GSW Inc Empty Ingersoll Machine Empty Ingersoll Machine Empty Hamilton Yard Empty Hamilton Yard Empty Hamilton Yard tractor Hamilton Yard Empty Hamilton Yard Empty Hamilton Yard Empty Docking Navigator Arrows Windows 7 Sorting can be done over more than one column or using a custom sort order e To sort on multiple columns simply click on more than one column header The first click sorts by the column you choose and shows a triangular sort indicator at the top A second click on a different column does a secondary sort sorts the values in that column without overridi
125. ans f you have just upgraded note the new look All cars formerly in cartoon style are now in either Steam or Modern style How does the program decide which style to use on what layout It counts the locomotives If there are more diesels you get Modern style otherwise Steam 2 Right click the layout choose Properties and go to the Train tab Note the drop down list at lower right where you can choose the default car collection for the layout 3 Try choosing a different set Changing the default redraws all the non collection cars on the layout so you see immediately how it looks with different defaults 4 Save the layout if you changed the default set so it will remember the set you want when it opens Creating Your Own Default Set There is a white paper on this subject in the How To section of our website see Customizing Default Cars Car Loads A load is a batch of goods you can carry in a freight car Ithas a name like coal or pipes along with top and side images which are superimposed on the car images when you load a car Associated with each load is a list of car types eligible to carry the load so you can t put coal in a flatcar or farm equipment in a hopper Loads with images are suitable for use in open top cars like flatcars gondolas and hoppers For closed cars like boxcars and tankcars there is a large collection of closed car loads represented by generic symbols on top views and by text on side
126. are displayed after an ops generation During an ops session you may want to turn off arrival and departure and script messages so the switchlist data doesn t scroll away Like the clock window the schedule window is dockable and resizable Our preference is to put the two side by side at the bottom of the screen then adjust the divider between them until the clock window becomes square like this e a Sratran Sireer y i Ez mk Tr South Newark To show or hide the Schedule Window choose View Schedule To clear the window right click in the window choose Clear All To copy the window contents to other programs press and drag within the window to select the text you want to copy then right click and choose Copy The selected text is copied to the Windows Clipboard It can be pasted into Notepad Microsoft Word or any other program which accepts text To control the output the context menu includes two checkmark items to specify what you want to see in the window Show Stations and Show Script Output Check or uncheck the type s of data you want sS Customizing r There are many ways to adjust the look and feel of TrainP layer Some have been covered in other chapters this one describes the rest Operation Preferences Switch Preferences General Preferences Track Preferences Train Preferences Style Preferences Road Preferences Customizing Toolbars The Customize Dialog Windows and V
127. around without fouling something up One simple and safe operation is to move a track endpoint or junction To move a track endpoint shown in D 1 Choose the Edit tool Es 2 Position the cursor over the endpoint you want to move so you see the green highlight square 3 Press and drag The endpoint moves the other end remains anchored To move a junction or switch shown in 1 Choose the Edit tool be 2 Position the cursor over the junction or switch you want to move so you see the green highlight square 3 Press and drag The Junction or switch moves the other ends of all attached tracks remain anchored To move a collection of track and or other objects Shown in F 1 Select the tracks and objects to be moved by shift clicking or dragging a selection rectangle 2 Point to any of the selected tracks or objects press and drag All selected tracks and objects move as a unit Attached tracks which are not selected are repositioned so as to remain attached In this example five Segments in a yard are all being moved at once One end of the yard lead track remains fixed the other end moves with the selection The resulting angles are not train friendly Copy Paste Selected objects tracks circles turntables may be copied to the TrainPlayer clipboard and then pasted elsewhere on the layout or in another layout These objects cannot be pasted into other programs To copy a collection of objects 1 Selec
128. at point click on the Group icon ek OC BA a i 8a and all images will be wrapped into one with its own set of control points If you need to change something within this group just click on it and select the Ungroup feature re to break the group back into its original smaller pieces Using the Send to Back and Bring to Front Features Before There will be times when you will place a factory too close to some vegetation and it will look wrong You can either choose to move your trees Or you can use these features to change the appearance Here the trees over hang the buildings which looks more natural After Final Hint rackLayer Railroad Edit View Tools Sometimes it can get confusing moving between the Background and Foreground layers What we have done is to completely create the Background layer to our satisfaction first Train Wind New Open Then use the File Export Image feature to Name and save the Background layer as a J PEG image lt lt my layoutl jpg gt gt Close the layout Open Layout Close Save Ctrl 5 On the TrainP layer blank screen we select File Open and select that newly named background J PEG image as our Starting point to add our track work and Foreground images You never need worry about the Background image again Save S Publish Export Image Add More Scenery Items trains and j l enjoy Only your im
129. ated with each industry is a list of incoming and outgoing loads Each load is associated with one or more car types which can carry that load The feature allows you to override this default list of car types for a load and instead specify a particular car type to carry that load to or from that industry For example at the industry Feed Mill one of the incoming loads is Corn This load is listed as being transportable by car types LO XM H covered hopper general purpose boxcar or hopper Say your feed mill is only equipped with a loader which handles open hoppers and not closed cars In this case you could override the load Corn in the list for Feed Mill to say H only meaning that the ops generator will not assign a waybill to carry corn in open hoppers only and not any other type of car To specify the override you must edit the item in the industry load list and add one or more car types AAR codes in square brackets In the above example the line saying corn in the incoming load list must be changed to say corn H The string within the brackets may be a single AAR code or several of them separated by commas This override code is displayed in the industry load list and also in any generated waybill which refers to It Override codes may be specified for industries on the layout in the top portion of the Industry Browser or for any of the standard industries in the lower portion In the latter case they will apply to any new
130. ationary decelerate to a stop uncouple at slot 1 behind first car 2 behind second uncouple between car and engine uncouple between pair of adjacent cars throw switch if position is specified throw to that position set system variable to value word ending with colon is a label for goto jump to statement after label pause specified number of seconds on certain events display string in schedule window rotate turntable to specified junction select specified train Wait Conditions waits until lead car of train crosses junction notes 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 20 O o QUA DW notes 10 AT lt t J d gt AT lt hnem 2s gt AT lt station gt AFTER lt jxn gt AFTER lt t j d gt AFTER lt hy mis gt AFTER lt station gt ON STOF ON COUPLE ON THROW lt jxn gt ON TABLESTOP ON KEY symbol Jxn eTa Mimis station mpr slo car pos var value label secs string EOL statement lead car of train crosses exact spot dist d from jxn j on track t 10 19 specified time is shown on layout clock h m required secs optional 11 lead car of train enters named station 12 last car of train crosses junction 10 last car of train crosses exact spot 10 19 Specified actual time has elapsed on wall clock 1 last car of train leaves station 12 train comes to a complete stop 13 train couples with another car 14 Specified switch is thrown by any means 15 turntable finishes rotating 16 user
131. awing new track not editing or moving existing sections By default itis disabled as it tends to get in the way when you are tracing over an existing plan But when you are drawing a new layout from scratch itis invaluable Enable it as follows 1 Setup your choices in Track Preferences Here you specify what sorts of snap you wish to enable and at what angles or radii as shown above left 2 Use the Track or Circle tool Snap does not apply when using other tools 3 Use the Snap Disable Enable command on the layout context menu above right to turn snap off and on as needed while drawing 4 When angle or parallel snap is in effect you can disable it temporarily by pressing the shift key as you draw There are three Kinds of snap e To angle applies when you are creating a new switch Restricts the switch angle to one of up to four choices Refer to the diagram above After you have drawn section AC and want to create a switch at B angle snap takes effect when you press atB and drag toward D but not if you drag from D toward B As you drag when the angle DBC gets close to one of the predefined values it Snaps to that angle Switch angles are given not in degrees or radians but as integers The integer indicates the slope or ratio of rise over run between diverging tracks For example at a 4 switch the tracks are one unit apart at a distance of four units from the frog e TO parallel applies when you are creating a new switch
132. ayout You can override this choice and specify your choice of defaults for any layout whether Steam or Diesel or one of several others you can download or one you create yourself For details see Default Car Sets Car Collections A car collection is a set of car type definitions To add a car to the layout you choose it from a car collection If you use a quick method click a button on the toolbar or choose from the Add Car menu you are choosing from a special collection called the Default Car Set The other method is to select from the Car Chooser where you can browse through many collections and choose cars from any TrainP layer is installed with several car collections including a few default sets There are many many others available for download from the TrainP layer website You can shop through these on the Web tab of your Car Chooser if you find a collection you like you can download the entire set with one click and then use the car types in your layouts If you have a layout which uses cars from some non default collection and you want to send it to your friend J oe then if he is going to see the right cars he will need the same collection on his machine Ifthe collection came from TrainP layer J oe will be given a chance to download a copy for himself If itis a custom set you created yourself then you will need to publish the collection process it into a separate folder and send him a zip of that Using Car Colle
133. ayout has a coal mine you should have some hoppers somewhere Ops Toolbar Access to Ops is through the Tools gt Ops menu at right or the Ops Toolbar Ops fi Generate Ops 1E 2 elt Resize Rescale E iia h S E B Show Tooltips O asn Rewind Ops Customize What these commands do S Route Finder Options Ops Setup Wizard i Generate Ops Creates a random switchlist If the layout is not equipped with stations and industries calls up the Ops Setup Wizard l Rewind Ops Allows you to start the same operating session over Rewinds the position of all trains and cars to the beginning of the session This is useful if you want to better your time or try new methods or if you made a mistake Clear Ops Erases the current Ops session and clears all windows Route Finder Finds all track paths between any given pair of junctions or stations Brings up a dialog where you choose locations and view results See Route Finder ops Setup Wizard Leads you through a step by step procedure for setting up your layout and generating a switchlist The wizard covers all the major steps one by one with explanations and choices along the way See Ops Setup Wizard El View Operations Shows or hides the Ops Windows a set of docking windows which come up automatically when you generate a session This command is a toggle to show or hide them all at once View Color Codes Not available on toolbar Shows or hides color bl
134. ble locations for starting an operating session 4 Add comments In Layout Properties add as much commentary as you like but please include your name the author or designer of the layout and any operating instructions 5 Use File gt Publish to bring up the Layout Publisher dialog to finish the job External Files A TrainP layer layout is stored in a text file with extension rrw This file contains information about track stations and other layout objects but does not have all the data you need to run the layout Additional data is stored in external files referenced by the rrw If you want to send a layout to someone else you need to Know about these files and make sure the recipient has access to them One external file is the background image Ifa layout has a background image it is often stored in a file in the same folder as the rrw with the same filename but a different extension jpg tog bmp gif or png But this does not have to be the case the background image can reside in a file anywhere on your disk with its pathname referenced in the rrw file Many external files are stored in system folders common to all TrainPlayer users These include car collections loads sounds and many scenery objects When you open a layout the program looks for these files in your local system data folder if it doesn t find them it looks in the TrainPlayer web collection and offers to download what it finds there Failing both the pro
135. can use these commands on multiple selected objects in which case all of them will be moved up or down relative to the unselected neighbors These features come in handy when you re adding details like sidewalks vegetation etc The images below show a concrete driveway being added to the scene In the left image the driveway Is on top sending itto the back gives the image on the right Another way of changing the display order of objects is to move them from one layer to another For example moving an object from the foreground to the background will cause it to be drawn behind all foreground objects e To move an object from one layer to another select the object and cut it to the clipboard using Edit Cut or Ctrl X activate the alternate layer using the Background Layer sail or Foreground Layer 4 tools then paste using Edit Paste or Ctr V Load Bitmap Cut Cirl xX Copy Ctrl C Delete Delete Select All Ctrl A X uh 2 Properties Editing Scenery Properties In case you don t want all your scenery objects to be plain yellow you will need to learn about the Scenery Properties dialog This is a dialog with four tabs used to modify the properties of one or more objects Each tab has its own help page linked here and from the Help button on each tab e General Scenery Properties e Background Scenery Properties e Line Scenery Properties e TextScenery Properties The easy way to bring up the appropriate
136. car is within the bounds of the station at means any car of the train is in the station near means car is on a neighboring track to the station If none of these apply then the track location is given 2 Consist is one of Switcher no cars except engine s and tender s Freight freight cars only Passenger passenger cars only Mixed freight and passenger cars lt Class gt s cut of one or more cars of same type e g Boxcars with no engine Script Editor Advanced Options For setting advanced scripting options Called from Advanced button on Script Editor dialog Advanced Scripting Train and Switch Positions gt For Script Authors Save current situation to File Save Erase starting position Load situation From File Load Save scripts to layout File Toggle IDs of affected cars Car IDs Show script announcement on opening layout i Echo script comments in schedule window W Use autopause in all playback This dialog provides tools for use mainly when developing scripts but some are useful apart from scripts too Dialog controls Saves a snapshot of the current locations of all trains and the positions of all switches This data is saved ina small xml file not useful for anything except restoring with the Load button below An alternative is to save the entire layout Save situation The xml file by default is saved alongside the rrw with situ appended to the name The Save Load Situation feat
137. ccurs after which the command Is executed and the script proceeds to the next line Both parts are optional but at least one must be present If a wait condition is not given the command is executed immediately Ita command is not given then once the wait condition is satisfied the script goes on to the next line Blank lines in a script are ignored as are comment lines beginning with asterisk double backslash or pound or or followed by at least one space Commands in scripts are case insensitive A wait condition starts with AT AFTER or ON followed by a clock time junction number station name or keyword When a Script is running and a wait condition is encountered the train continues moving but the script does nothing further until the given event occurs or the specified time elapses When that happens the script goes on to the next command or next line and continues executing command Forward Reverse Speed lt mph gt GCO Uncouple lt slot gt Uncouple lt car gt Uncouple lt car gt lt car gt Throw lt Jxn gt pos Set lt var gt lt value gt lt label gt Goto lt label gt AULOpaUsSSe secs gt Boho lt strang Rotate lt LEbl gt lt xn gt Train lt train gt condition AT lt j xn gt Commands action set direction to forward no effect if train is already going forward set direction to reverse no effect if already in reverse set speed to value in mph begins moving if st
138. choose up to four different snap radii three standard choices and or one other value you specify All these choices are labelled in the selected units using the scale of the current layout if one is open For example the above diagram shows the standard choices as 18 24 in HO if the active layout were O these choices would be displayed as 36 48 Choose units for display of radius values The choice made in this drop down affects dimension displays throughout the program 4 Snap examples Left user drags up and left from the main line at point A when the angle is close enough it snaps to exact 4 and the cursor changes Right user drags left from a point near B starting point Snaps to the exact point B then angle snap takes effect so tracks remain parallel Any snap option can be temporarily overridden by holding down the Shift key as you drag Or the entire set of options can be overridden using the Snap On Off command on the Track context menu Train Preferences Settings for trains random train generation and car labels Called from menu command File gt Preferences Random Train Generation 30 Tak obe pk 60 4 trains to have engines z engines to be steam Delete All Trains Random Train Generation Generate Trains Click Generate Trains to remove all trains from the layout if any and replace with a random new Set of trains distributed around the tracks This command cannot be undone so you mig
139. ck an edge of the train control window and drag It right or left You can add a car at the beginning of the train ust put the uncoupling pin at the front You can paste an entire train into another Right click a train choose Train Copy from the context menu select the destination and set the uncoupling pin then choose Edit Paste Paste inserts whatever is on the clipboard whether a single car or a full train The Train Toolbar The Train Toolbar has most of the same features as the Control Panel and provides a complete set of operating tools Tools and features are Stop Speed Display Uncouple Train Menu Forward Reverse speed Slider Load Unload Train Window Scroller e Stop button click to stop the train e Editable speed display shows the speed and allows it to be changed To specify a speed in MPH or KPH if you are using metric units click the speed display tyoe a number and press Enter e Speed slider slide to control the speed In normal mode zero is at the left slide to the right to increase speed When Yard Mode is enabled as pictured above zero is in the middle slide to the right to increase speed in the forward direction or to the left to increase speed in reverse e Uncouple click to uncouple at the pin position Dimmed when pin is at beginning or end of train or no car is selected e Load Unload lick one to load or unload the selected car with its assigned load If there is no load assigne
140. ck to their Starting positions where they were when the switchlist was generated and resets the Done column so you are ready to work the same switchlist again e Toss the switchlist and try a different one Use Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops to create a new switchlist This destroys the previous one The challenge of Ops is to learn how to work a switchlist efficiently with a minimum of couplings and uncouplings and loco fuel At present the program does not have a move counter or scoring function so you can rate your work but this is planned for future Waybills A waybill is an order issued by an industry telling the railroad it has goods to ship or receive Each waybill represents one delivery specified by a type of load a shipper and a receiver In the real world it might also have a quantity or frequency 5 carloads per day but in TrainPlayer each waybill refers to single car load For example here is a typical TrainP layer waybill TrainPlayer Ops lea WAYBILL CAR TYPES X Interchange RCVR offline FROM GSW Ine SHPR Tool and Die Maker CONTENTS tools O E F m TE E moi hi Both shipper and receiver are given by industry name and location The load is given along with the car type s Suitable for carrying It determined from the program s database and listed by AAR code Each waybill is assigned a unique number for identification purposes In this example Waybill No 240 a load of tools is to be ship
141. clock works in conjunction with the schedule and operates at scale railroad speed 3 Schedule Window The schedule shows train arrivals and departures on layouts equipped with named stations It also shows running commentary as a Script executes 4 Switch Window The switch window shows a close up of the upcoming switch or the one at the cursor 5 Control Panel The contro panel is your walk around pack for operating the selected train setting speed and direction uncoupling editing cars Sounding the horn 6 Train Tree The train tree shows all cars and trains on the layout Windows and toolbars can be moved and except for the control panel resized floating or docked to any side of the window frame Also you can add your own toolbar buttons and organize them as you see fit For details see Customizing Toolbars Layout Properties Properties of the current layout Called from Properties on the Layout context menu See also About the Properties Dialog This dialog shows general properties of the layout and lets you edit some of them Additional layout properties are on the Advanced tab Dialog controls Name of the railroad This name appears at the top of the layout Name window and in other displays Choose your modelling scale see About Sizes and Scales Scale The scale affects dimension measurements throughout the program Information about the layout For layouts from 107 Track Description Plans the descr
142. containing an image of the layout This mode does not modify the layout Choose Merge Background if you want to replace the current background image with a new one containing both background and scenery In this mode you will be offered to have the scenery deleted after export Output File Specify the output path for the graphics file Use the Browse button to bring up a file dialog for choosing a path The text box shows the full path Below that for convenience is the filename and extension plus an indication of whether the file is new or already exists The initial path offered is unique it does not match an existing file Indicate how the new image file will be used Export Image Saves a picture of the layout to a graphics file Does not modify the layout Merge Background Saves the background and scenery to a graphics file swaps it in as a new background optionally deletes the scenery and offers to save the modified layout Specify an output path for the new image file E L21_image jpa L 1_image jpg Tile exists you will be prompted to overwnte Image Features Select the display features to be drawn in the exported image Selections made here will not affect the layout on the screen The initial choices depend on the mode For Export Image choices match the features on display in the current view For Export Background choices are Background and Scenery only Image Size Specify the size of the exp
143. creating them automatically The results turned out to be fun Here s what the station generator does 1 Uses the Yard Finder to find all the yards it can recognize and adds most of them to the layout as stations named Yard1 Yard2 etc It doesn t usually find many because the rules are fairly restrictive 2 Uses the Interchange Generator to find a spur suitable for use as an interchange If itfinds one it adds it to the layout and names it Interchange 3 Generates a random set of standard stations distributed around the layout The number you get depends on layout size figure about two or three per square yard Station names are chosen randomly from a list names taken from 101 Track Plans over 500 of them this list is in your TrainP layer data folder named stn_names ttt Preferential locations are near the ends of spurs or in the middle of long straight or curved sections There is no dialog for the station generator you just click Generate Stations and it replaces all existing Stations with a new random set If you don t like the results you can a revert using Edit gt Undo b click again to get a different random set or c take what it gives you and modify to suit using the Station tool to move resize rename etc The other way to generate stations is from the Ops Wizard This gives you a bit more flexibility you can create Stations and yards interchange as separate independent steps Yard Finder
144. creen and the real world dimensions on the layout You do this by adjusting the TrackLayer grid The grid is defined in real world units in HO for example grid lines are defined to be 12 apart so when you overlay the grid on the image you tell TrackLayer all it needs to know about layout size and dimensions in any scale Most published layouts including all those in 107 Track Plans have grid lines included in the image So adjusting the grid in TrackLayer is a matter of dragging the mouse a couple of times until it matches the one on the background 3 Draw curves and turntables Curves and turntables are a little tricky to create more so when working in an area already crowded with track Therefore the experienced track layer draws these items first 4 Draw straight track and switches Drawing straight track is easy you just trace over the lines on the image with a series of connected line segments Switches are created automatically whenever three or more segments come together Add special features Most layouts have sections of track hidden in tunnels or underneath the layout You can mark these sections in TrackLayer so that when trains pass over them they appear hidden Or you can mark a section of track as tunnel so that a train entering at one end immediately emerges at the other Debug TrackLayer provides tools for checking your work Diagnostics can spot overlapping junctions zero length tracks and other
145. ct should form a single length of track ending in a stub 3 When all the tracks you want are selected blue right click any of them and choose Selection To Station This creates the station and attaches the selected tracks then brings up Station Properties so you can supply a name A default name is offered starting with Yard If you are creating an interchange change the name to Interchange 4 While the properties dialog is up choose the appropriate industry Click Choose Industry This brings up the Industry Browser dialog In the folder Miscellaneous choose either Yard Tracks or Interchange 5 Click OK to dismiss the dialog The new Station is shown with a big rectangle completely surrounding the set of tracks Wardi hi Tracks Station 614 Vardl Industry Yard Tracks Don t worry about the size of this rectangle itis not used to detect car arrivals and departures See below 6 Check your work Choose the Station tool then hover over an edge of the rectangle The tracks associated with the Station will highlight in green as shown above right To modify a station To change a Station s name position the cursor on one edge of the station s rectangle so it highlights right click and choose Station Properties You are prompted to enter a new name To change size shape or position position at a side or corner of a station then press and drag To delete a station Position the cursor on
146. cted car the new car goes at the end of the train Choose Other to bring up the Car Chooser where you can choose any type of car from any collection Or look under More Cars for other cars in the current default car set e Click a car type in the Car Toolbar This works the Same as Add Car from the menu but Is faster and easier The toolbar only shows the first twelve cars in the default car set to access others use the menu instead D A ee es ee A e Right click a track section and choose Add Car Here This deposits a car of the selected type at the indicated point on the track creating a new one car train there Subsequent Add Car commands will couple cars to it Place Train Here e Coo Diesel J Steam Locomotive Bee Tender a TE Pullman mm Baggage TT Reefer m furtle Creek Stone arch Deck bride Gondola bridge EF Boxcar B Tank Car p Flatcar BH Caboose e Copy and paste If there is a selected car Edit Copy or just Copy on a context menu puts a copy of it on the TrainP layer clipboard You can then select a different car in any train and Edit Paste to deposit the copied car behind the currently selected one You can also copy and paste entire trains If no car is selected there is no pink underline in the train window then Edit Copy puts the complete train on the clipboard You can then paste this into a different layout or paste another copy of the train in the cu
147. ction on the layout is highlighted in pink STR straight track section CUR curved track JXN junction switch CTR circle center SAR iCal TrackLayer TRN train CIR circle A STR FO Endpoint on track but no junction 152 TIE turntable STN station Don t show me this again In the example shown tracks 34 70 and 153 meet near a common point but there is no switch there The fix is to drag junction 152 on top of 68 so a switch is created Error conditions found by Check Track include Object flagged for delete objecthas been deleted sts S Same junction number on both ends of track ltackhasbothendsonsamejunction Bad track length track lengthiszero o Invalid track number on junction junction is connected to invalid track ID Invalid radius circle radius is zero or negative Station is missing name station object has no name Tracks superimposed two track segments are on the same line segment Endpoint on track but no junction endpoint of one track lies near point on another track Track Numbers _ 7 piy es 43 To identify tracks and objects use Tools gt Show Numbers to temporarily 40 42 AT Ayt ya turn on the display of track and junction numbers Track numbers are shown in blue Abr 51 junction numbers in red 55 This display is temporary The numbers disappear as soon as the screen is a4 refreshed To turn them all off use View Refresh 21 N ate Sa Another
148. ction to cache folder to show contents Re download car collection to cache folder Dimmed unless selected item is car collection Search for name or filename See Search Go to next hit after Find Download and install all car collections within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all web car collections within the selected folder and subfolders if collections available on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Clear Download Cache on root Cartypes folder only Remove local cached files force re download What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New Install selected car collection Display icons of side views Display icons of top views Show contents in listform List includes name class AAR code date Load Definition Dialog When you click OK to leave the Station Properties or Industry Browser dialogs the program checks Incoming and Outgoing boxes to see if all names are known among the load collections If any are not the Load Definition dialog appears where you can add new loads or correct mis entered names In order to add a new load to the system you need to provide a load name and one or more AAR codes indicating the types of car Suitable to carry it Given this data the program creates a new image free load in the closed car collection If the load you need is for an open car flatcar hopper gondola consider using one of the exi
149. ctions Most of the instructions for using car collections are found in other sections of the manual Follow links below for details To browse car collections choose Other from one of the Add Car commands a on the Train menu b on right click of a car c on toolbar button Ge d from Add Car Here on a track section Any of these brings up the Car Chooser where you can browse and select cars to be added Cartypes P Seed Defaults ifa Default Classic 3 Default Lionel 8a Default Modem covered hopper class LO Show loads he To edit a car type or collection right click an icon in the Car Chooser middle window or a folder in the tree at the left and choose Properties This brings up the Car Collection Editor for browsing and editing the selected car type or any other type in the same collection To download a car collection in the Car Chooser go to the Web tab Browse and find what you like then click Install The actual download is done into a temporary directory while you browse so that you can view the images clicking Install copies the files from the temp location into Cartypes To publish a car collection in the Car Collection Editor Collection tab click Export Creating a Collection by Hand If you know Microsoft Paint Adobe Photoshop or some other bitmap editing program you can create your own car side and top images This doesn t require a lot of artistic sk
150. d Scenic Modules Each module is a TrainP layer layout so it can be decorated in the usual ways by adding a bitmap background or by adding scenery with the Scenery Toolkit When a module is fused into a layout any scenery objects it has are carried along with it If ithas a bitmap background on fusing this is converted to a rectangular scenery object the same size as the module Here are some examples of scenic modules our layout artists have designed You can find these and many more in the web layout collections About Modular Layouts Modular Layouts the term for a layout built from a series of modules fully assembled electrically connected and ready to run In TrainPlayer a modular layout is any layout built using the Module Manager Modular Layout Features In most ways a modular layout is like any other TrainP layer layout It consists of a single set of track scenery objects stations and so on However it also has some special features e A set of modules The information supplied in the Module Manager is attached to a modular layout and is saved with it This includes filenames of the modules and their positional arrangement One way you can tell if you are working with a modular layout is to bring up the Module Manager if the layout has module data you will see it e Special scenery objects The default display of a modular layout has a heavy grey lines outlining each module b large orange text labels
151. d while moving to the left begins yard mode and switches into reverse To disable yard mode click the brass Y on the control panel or click the toolbar button T or uncheck Enable yard mode on the context menu The Train Window Uncoupling is easy in TrainPlayer The key is the uncoupling pin in the train control window which shows where the next uncouple or add car or paste will occur The uncoupling pin is a tall orange spike in the train control window Its position indicates where e the train will Separate when you uncouple To uncouple click the Uncouple button on the control panel choose Uncouple from one of the Train menus or press Ctrl U These actions have no effect if the pin is in front of or behind the train e Car s will be inserted when you add or paste To add a car click an icon on the Cars toolbar or choose Add Car from a Train menu To paste choose Paste from the Edit menu or press Ctrl V These actions work with the pin in any position To position the pin e Click a car ora space between Cars in the train control window The pin goes into the closest slot including before the front or after the end e Click a car on the layout This selects the car and positions the pin just behind it The selected car is indicated in the train contro window with an orange underline e Click a car name in the train tree Selects as above e Press an arrow key The right arrow moves the pin rightwards
152. d in the layout Cancel do notopen the layout Download download and install the collection from the web then proceed to open the layout with its full set of cars This button is available only if you have an internet connection and if the requested collection is available on our website If someone sends you a layout file and it requires a car collection not available on our website you will need to ask that person to send you the collection Or zip it up and send it to TrainPlayer so we can post it for general use Convert modify the layout so that it uses standard cars instead of the specified ones The modifications are saved the next time you save the layout Warning once you make this change to a layout it cannot be changed back The layout permanently forgets what car collection it was originally designed to use Default Car Sets The easiest way to add a car to a train is by clicking one of the buttons on the car Baggage toolbar Unfortunately many users avoid this because what it used to get you Is one z of the little cartoon like car images from 1991 maa Caboose Until now that is Not only have we upgraded the default set of cars to a classier 4 6 0 switcher look we ve also provided more than one default set and a way to choose a favorite for Flatcas each layout Gondola A default car setis a car collection which meets certain requirements so it can be Say uppe accessed from the car toolbar and menu It contains one
153. d to the car clicking Load will bring up the Load Chooser e Train window displays the current train permits car selection and editing for details see Train Window There are Scroller buttons on each end click to move the train one car length in a given direction e Train menu brings up drop down menu for selecting a train Choose a train from this menu and it will become the selected train For details see Train Menu Most of the items on the Train Toolbar are also available on the Train menu You can add or remove buttons as you wish using Tools Customize Switches Where three or more tracks join at a point they form a throwable switch Green lights indicate the open route through the Switch reds indicate closed tracks A train doesn t necessarily crash if it attempts to pass through a red light it can roll right on through or throw the switch automatically depending on settings in the Options dialog To throw a switch position the cursor over the frog the point where the tracks join so you see a blue highlight then click The lights change to show which route is now open If there are more than two routes through a switch then each throw cycles to the next available open route For example here er are the results of repeated clicks at a four way junction A switch will not open a route which requires a sharp turn Ifa route through a switch forms too sharp an angle then throwing the switch will not open that route
154. d units Default Load Choose a load to be the default for this car type The OK button remains dimmed until you have entered all the necessary information On Cancel the new type is discarded and no change is made to the collection AAR Car Types Dialog An AAR code is a symbol for a specific type of car as explained under AAR Codes Every car and car type has one whether assigned by the program or by you as described here To assign an AAR code to a car type 1 In the Class drop down choose the last item AAR Types List This brings up the AAR types in a separate list window Car Collection Default Steam Properties Car Type images Collection electric flatcar auto rack car 1966 auto rack car 1950 1965 jatca cars barrel rack car atc lumber E truck trailer 605 flatca containe containers trailer trailers depressed center flatcar latca bulldoze log car logs general service flatcar flatca crate coil car steel ba well car containe heavy duty flat transfor gondola covered drop bottom gondola ballast 7 Th H Each row has the AAR Code as defined in TrainP layer a description of the car type the corresponding generic class and the default load for the car type The class name varies depending on the setting in the drop down atthe bottom The US version is shown in the screen shot an alternate version is available for UK users If you change the selection in the drop down it will change the entries in
155. der has the same name as the layout but with suffix files For example the above generates the following output Mame MycountryLayout_t jpg w MyCountryLayvoue rr MyCountryLayou jpg _MyCountryLayout_ Files The rrw file is the layout the jpg is the background image the _tjpg is a thumbnail image and the _ files folder contains the additional scenery objects in this case just country_church bmp To transmit this layout to a friend zip all four of these items into a single zip file Instruct the recipient to unzip into a folder and double click the rrw file Scenery Image Ideas Here are a couple of sources for ideas for new bitmaps the Walthers Catalog and Google Bing maps From the Walthers catalog htto www walthers com exec page flyer you can get an idea about what the major kit makers are producing Sometimes there are measurements of buildings or top down views Use that information to try and create something suitable with Microsoft Paint much like creating a car top for a train car collection Here s an example of a relatively simple bitmap design of a warehouse created with MS Paint From Google and Bing maps and using a decent Screen Capture program you can get 2D shots of actual industries at various zoom levels For example here is a steel rolling mill as captured in a photo You can use the original photo capture as inspiration See below or you can actually edit it to suit your needs in al
156. dialog Does not affect the car or its loaded empty status Check to change the display from standard side top to large side image This checkbox only appears if the collection has large car Show large image nages Loads cannot be displayed in large images so the Show load checkbox is dimmed if the large image is on display Car Collection Athearn PS5344 Boxcar Properties Car Type images Collection E Ao j E a M Show large image Images Tab This tab is for changing the side and or top images for the current type Each car type has two images a top view and a Side view Each view is in a separate graphics file m Side Image r Top Image Users inp Roaring Tar Peye Caps Det Side Image path Path to the graphics file of the side image To choose a different file click Browse Paint Click to call up a paint program to edit the side image See Editing Images Browse Click to call up a file dialog to select a side image file Supported types are as listed in the drop down bmp jpg gif png Top image path Path to the graphics file of the top image To choose a different file click Browse Choose Select a new top image from a chooser of available tops Paint Click to call up a paint program to edit the top image See Editing Images Browse Click to call up a file dialog to select a top image file Large car images are not mentioned in the Images tab Ifa car type has a large image
157. dicated car on the layout and shows color codes for that car and its destination only hiding all others To restore all the color codes unselect all rows of the grid by clicking in the blank space below the last row Information on this page is specific to the Switchlist Window See also the general instructions under Ops Windows Car To At Load From MM434 Interchange Empty Cero yard TA77 Cemoyard Empty track 27 H706 Interchange ci Telluride Coal UGE TA438 Interchange E Cero yard Les oe Field Chooser Ea H707 Ophir Mine Empty Telluride Coal MENEE _ GBH4 Interchange Conifer Lum kaaa Tank T437 interchange Empty Cemyad GER Boxcar AM4S5 Interchange 1 Cero yard TORT Hopper H598 Interchange Carbondale Oe Cars Switchlist Switchlist Window Contents Color Color code for car and destination station Action Verb indicating type of move 1 Class Car Car identifier as displayed on car top To At Destination station for move move ends here Load Load carried by car during move or Empty From Current location of car Done Shows X when move is completed AAR Car class from AAR codes list h Shipper Name of shipping industry or offline h Receiver Name of receiving industry or offline h Waybill ID of waybill for this move to view waybill use context menu h ToggleOnArrival Checked if car is to be automatically loaded or unloaded on completion h Schematic Symbolic display of waybill cycl
158. drawing This anchors an origin point Without the Shift key drag an intersection point to resize the grid until the grid squares match the drawing as shown at right Shift drag moves the grid drag alone resizes it Dragging by an intersection point keeps the grid square After adjusting use View Grid 4 to turn off the grid display Place a circle Choose the Circle Tool Point to the center mark amp near Gills Landing press and drag Adjust until the circle exactly overlays the left hand curve as shown To move rather than resize the circle press the shift key while you drag jisi F 1 TT i I AE Place second circle Draw a second circle overlaying the right hand curve with center near Oyster Bay This picture shows the result when you use View Background HEI to turn off the image Toggle this every now and then to check your work Choose the Track Tool VAI P oint to the top of the left hand circle so it highlights then press and drag to the right as shown Note that the straight section remains tangent to the circle as you drag Complete the Straight Drag until the moving end touches the right hand circle so it highlights then release The straight snaps to be tangent to both circles Complete the loop Repeat the above steps to add a segment completing the loop press and drag from the bottom of one circle to t
159. ds Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commande Toolbars F eyboard Meru Options Category Set Accelerator for Default Commands Curent Keys Exit Export Image Hew Open Layout inven Press New Shortcut Kep Reset Al Description lr Ct Close the active document In this tab you select a command from the menu and choose a key on the keyboard to execute that command If the command already has a key assigned to it you can change it Dialog controls Select the menu containing the command you want to Category operate by keyboard Commands Select the command you want to attach to a key Set Accelerator for This is non functional always set to Default Current Keys Shows the keys s currently assigned to the selected command if any Press New Shortcut Assign Remove Reset All Click this box so it has the focus then press the key you want to assign to the command The key name will echo in this box Click to complete the assignment If you do not click Assign nothing will change This button is dimmed if no key has been entered Click if you want to remove the current key assignment for the command This button is dimmed if no key is currently assigned Erases all key assignments and resets to factory values Customize Menu For resetting or customizing menus Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Ke
160. e see Waybills h Instructions Full text move instruction same as displayed in Schedule Window h CariD Internal numeric ID of car h Train Name of train containing car if train is named h TrainiD Internal numeric ID of train containing car h Notes General car class Edit y in this column means the item can be edited This applies only if Grid Editable is checked in the context menu Hidden h in this column means the item is hidden by default at install time To see it drag it onto the grid from the Field Chooser 1 Action verbs are Set out take car to interchange Return take car to yard Deliver take car to industry loaded Send take car to industry empty Pick up move to car s location 2 Location is a station name or a track location Car in station means the car is within the bounds of the station at means any car of the train Is in the station near means Car is on a neighboring track to the station If none of these apply then the track location is given 3 In order to complete a move and see an X in the Done column the car must reach the destination station and then its train must come to a stop Once a move is completed the X remains in the column until a you clear it by hand set grid editable then erase the X or b a new switchlist is generated 4 If you show Instructions then you will need a wide column but you will no longer need the Schedule Window You might want to close that and dock this in its
161. e so the latter type of operation can be performed on the group e TO group two or more objects select at least two objects by shift clicking or using the Scenery Edit tool then click Group TE The selected objects become a single grouped object with a Single set of drag handles which can be manipulated the same way as any other single object Note that the Group tool is dimmed unless you have at least two objects selected e To ungroup a grouped object select at least one grouped object then click Ungroup i The grouped object reverts to a set of individual objects Grouping can go more than one level deep that is a grouped object may contain other grouped objects In this case you have to ungroup more than once to go all the way back to the initial separate objects Changing Display Order If multiple objects overlap on the layout two factors determine which one appears in front a all objects in the background layer are behind all objects in the foreground and b within a layer objects are drawn based on their semi arbitrary positions ina list This order may be changed using two special editing commands e To move an obscured object in front of its neighbors select the object and choose Bring to Front Th This changes the order of objects so the selected one Is higher in the list e To move a front object behind its neighbors select the object and choose Send to Back This moves the selected object lower in the list You
162. e Checkmark the stations where you want industries generated then click Generate Checked Or e Click a row to select a station and then click Generate to have the program pick a random industry or Choose to pick one yourself from the list The Choose button brings up the Industry Browser so you can select a preconfigured industry Starting Train page Allows you to choose the engine you will operate Starting Train Choose tain to define center of operations Operations wall be centered around the selected tram S lecta ram by engine or lead car OF Click a bain on the layout For best results select a train in a yard with freight cars Cancel e Use selected train Uses the engine selected in the drop down You may of course select a different engine from the list When you choose an engine it becomes selected on the layout and shows up in the control panel and toolbar e Or Choose a train by clicking on it on the layout When you select a train while this page Is visible the drop down updates to the same train Settings page Offers choices for tailoring the results In the current version choices are limited Settings Ops generabon preferences Cars to move hio H 36 of available Cancel e Cars to be moved Sets the approximate number of cars to be involved in the switchlist This is the number of rows you will end up with in the switchlist assuming there are enough ind
163. e NOT a train In Ops we use the prototype definition In some older functions such as the Train Tree window display a train is defined as any contiguous set of cars whether moving or not with or without motive power a single car sitting on a siding is considered a train However such a train will not move unless ithas an engine You may have any number of trains on your layout all running simultaneously if you can manage it All of the layouts supplied with TrainP layer come equipped with one or more trains You don t have to settle for our selection you can delete or modify the provided ones and or add your own as described in Building Trains Control Panel For operating trains Called from menu command View gt Control Panel The TrainP layer Control Panel provides all the tools you need to operate trains in a classy brass and walnut frame If it takes too much room on your screen you can choose the minimized version and still control speed and direction The panel operates a single train ata time If you have more than one train select the one you want to operate by one of these methods Choose a train from the Train menu e Choose from the drop down list in the Train Toolbar e Click a car or train in the Train Tree e Click any car of the train on the layout The selected train appears in the control panel train window and speed and direction indicators are adjusted to match Features of the control panel Loc
164. e Station tool on the main toolbar or choose Tools Stations If there are stations defined on the layout selecting this tool causes them to become visible as dashed blue rectangles with names T E bis ya molni E Fi p trollga Aey 4 j oe a a a d 1 Purroy HE f n E i ai al Bouth Newark p outh Newark 3 elt M y 2 To create a new station press and drag to form a rectangle around the desired station area This must enclose some section of track or it will be disregarded 3 When you release the mouse button the Station P roperties dialog comes up so you can supply a name and other information for the new station Enter a name and click OK or click Cancel to abort creating the station Creating a Yard StyleStation These instructions are for creating either a yard or an interchange 1 Click to select the Edit tool You do notuse the Station tool to create this type of station 2 Select the track sections you want to make up the yard or interchange Hold down the Shift key then click each section and it will add to the selection Or you can drag a rectangle around an area to select all tracks in it or shift drag to add the enclosed tracks to the previous selection To remove a section from the selected set shift click it Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable Link to Layout Grow Roadbed Track Color If you are creating an interchange the sections you sele
165. e Track Edit tool select one or more sections of track To select multiple use shift select or drag a selection rectangle 2 Right click a selected section and choose Grow Roadbed shown below left Let go and you have roadbed right we Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable Link to Layout Track Color Settings for roadbed width and background are under File gt Preferences on the Style tab You can browse to an image file to use as background pattern and specify the overall width in current units The choices you make apply to the next roadbed you create they do not modify existing objects To modify roadbed use the Scenery Edit tool Click to select a section of roadbed then click again to switch to point edit mode shown at left then you can drag individual vertices as desired To delete roadbed select it with the Scenery Edit tool and press Del You can drag a selection rectangle to select multiple sections at once or delete them one ata time a Ties Ties add support to the rails and charm to the railroad As of version 4 1 you can add ties to all or part of your track with a Single click Delete Track Hidden Tunnel Untouchable All Retouchable link to Layout Grow Aoadbed To add ties 1 Using the Track Edit tool select one or more sections of track To select more than one section press Shift as you click Or use Edit Select All ctrl A to select
166. e automatically shown on all cars and stations in the switchlist and car id s are also displayed on the cars To turn all color codes on or off use View gt Color Codes on the main menu To turn car id s on or off use Train gt Show Car IDs You can toggle the display of Car IDs on moving trains by using the checkbox Preferences gt Trains gt T urn off while moving To highlight a single move you can interact with the switchlist window for a more detailed look at your assigned job Click to select a row in the switchlist window and it will turn off all color codes EXCEPT the one on that car and its destination This gives you a handy way to click down through the list and see where each car Is located and where it s going To turn all color codes on click any empty spot on the layout or the bottom of the switchlist window This cancels any single selection and shows all colors for the switchlist Car Collection Publisher Copies a car collection to an output folder Called from Export button in Car Collection Editor Publishing a car collection means preparing it for delivery to other users checking for errors gathering all the image files in one place giving them uniform names splitting multi image files into separate parts creating a new xml index and so on The job is done in this dialog called up when you are editing a car collection It does not modify the original collection but makes a new cop
167. e circle is where you want drag shift lrag it then release Note in version 3 1 you can have the radius snap to a specific value as you drag see Track Preferences To draw the first leg e 1 Choose the Straight Track tool Fal 2 Position the cursor on the circle where you want the leg to join the curve The circle highlights 3 While the circle is highlighted press the mouse button 4 Drag to where you want the other end of the leg While you drag one end the other end adjusts automatically to remain tangent to the circle You can draw a leg in either direction either starting on the circle or ending on it J ust be sure that before you press or release the mouse button the circle is highlighted so the segment will connect To complete the curve Draw the second leg as you did the first This time when you release the mouse button the circle disappears and the arc section between the two legs becomes a curve When the train comes down one leg it will go smoothly into and oT around the curve and exit on the te other leg Notes e All curves must be horseshoes hatis if you go clockwise from leg A onto the curve then you must also go clockwise from the curve onto B In other words when you draw the second segment don t orient it backwards as in the picture at right e Avoid crowds f you are working in a crowded area and a track end happens to lie near the rim of a circle then as so
168. e click it or click to select and click OK to return The selected load is shown as Known load with AAR code displayed but not editable AAR code s a comma delimited string of AAR codes indicating car types suitable to carry the load For details see Load AAR Strings Usually you enter a single code for a closed car X boxcar T tank car S stock car R refrigerator car LO covered hopper If more than one type can be used for this load enter a list for example RB RBL X all can carry boxed fruit For more see AAR codes Choose Code button click to display the AAR Codes dialog for choosing one or more codes The list of codes defined in TP is presented in a list box Click a row and the selected code Is entered in the text box Shift or ctl click to select multiple rows and a list of codes is generated lt lt Back Next gt gt move to previous or next load being defined Next changes to OK at the end of the list click to save all the changes and return to the calling dialog Cancel dismiss dialog without adding or modifying any loads Switchlist Window The Switchlist Window shows the current switchlist Each row describes one car movement a car a destination and a load When the car in a row arrives at the given destination then the move is finished and an X appears in the Done column Selecting a row in this window helps you visualize the move When you click a row header left end of row it selects the in
169. e created outside of TrainPlayer or provided by us see Scenery Chooser The chosen image fills the object according to the following settings Scenery Properties General Background Line Text Wo Fill f Stretch Tile t Solid W Lock proportions Hatched Bitmap Browse FURRY Scenery Installed vegetation Transparency 1 0 100 c Ao _ Choose this to cause the bitmap image to stretch so that it fills the object Stretch If Lock Proportions is checked the image will fill as much of the object space as possible without distorting otherwise the image will fill the complete space distorting as necessary Choose this to show the image in its native size and Tile proportions drawn repeatedly to fill the object space Tiled images do not scale or rotate Specifies whether the image can be stretched independently in both directions unchecked or must retain its native proportions checked Lock proportions Browse A shortcut is available for specifying a bitmap background for a scenery object instead of using the Browse button described above You can right click an object and choose Load Bitmap from the context menu as shown here This setting is ignored unless Stretch is chosen as the display mode Click this button to browse your disk for the image file to be displayed in the object Supported graphics formats are bmp jpg gif and png Load
170. e right hand side of the layout window with the Switchlist Window in front Ops Window Features How To The following is a combination feature list and task oriented instruction set These instructions apply to all grid windows except where noted x10 f Boxcar H2 BE Hopper H2 BE Hopper 123 SER Tankcar 124 SSM Takca F63 ce Flatcar Move and dock windows Split tabs into separate windows Resize grid columns Rearrange grid columns Show or hide columns Edit the grid Group rows by data value Sort the grid Print the grid Select rows or cells Copy to clipboard Auto resize columns Zoom to an object Reduce grid row height Press and drag on the title bar of a window The window becomes undocked and you see docking navigator arrows as shown below Position over one of the arrows you see a Shadow where the window will dock then release the mouse button As above but start by pressing on one of the tab buttons To rejoin tabs into a single window first dock one of them to a Side then drag the other onto the middle button of the navigator Press the divider between two column headers and drag right or left Press a column header drag right or left until red arrows appear then release Right click anywhere in the grid and choose Field Chooser This brings up a list of fields available but notin the grid for a screen shot see Switchlist Window Drag one onto a division between two column headers t
171. e same effect as inserting AUTOPAUSE 2 at the top of every script to pause for 2 seconds on each event Clock Settings For setting clock parameters Called from Settings on Clock context menu Clock Settings Start Time 05 00 AM Speed Factor Cancel The TrainP layer clock has properties you don t find in an ordinary clock it can run at the speed of your choice and with one click it can be reset to a specific time when you want your operating session to begin These properties are set in this dialog Dialog controls Start Stop Reset Start Time Speed Factor Click to start the clock running Button is dimmed if clock IS already running Note the clock starts automatically whenever it is visible and you Start any train running Click to stop the clock Click to reset clock back to the indicated start time Time the clock will show on program startup and on reset Default is 5AM Clock speed as a multiple of wall clock speed Default is 6 meaning the TP clock runs 6 times faster than a wall Clock one TP hour goes by in ten actual minutes For more information see Clock Customize Commands For arranging commands on toolbars Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Lategones Commands Cy New oy Lar Upern ub Upen Layout Close el Save Track fave S I D mrik Ci iba Description
172. e you can watch reports of arrivals and departures and see status reports while running scripts o Control Panel toggles display of the Control Panel for operating trains o Switch Window 4 toggles display of the Switch Window for showing close up views around active switches e Train Tree E toggles display of the Train Tree for navigating the rolling stock inventory of the layout e Status Bar shows or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window e Toolbars toggles the display of selected toolbars and provides access to the toolbar customization dialog Zooming An alternative to Zoom In Out on the View menu is a more detailed set of choices on the layout context menu Right click a spot on the layout and choose one of the following Most of these operations center the resulting view around the point you right clicked Larger Smaller Suto Follow Loco Sounds 150 200 40psi Fit to Window es r Ti 7 EONCRUCTUNATONITTOATINUTET IEEE E RT T Wis reer n T T T rT TTT T eee a w ki F Toe A aaa i i ee arian n 2 POL Petite TEETETTIIN 1 rt LLLI EEE EEE i ToT zT F Tr err Pe A E s I te eee e ar Pre zoe TEE Larger Smaller zooms by the same factor as Zoom In Out on the View menu but in this case also recenters the view on the indicated point Each zoom multiplies or divides the zoom factor by 1 25 To percent zooms to a specific magnification 1
173. each Station right click and bring up Station Properties and fill in the Industry section of the dialog There are few restrictions here we can pretty much just make up stuff and type itin and choosers are available to help The error checking routines built into the program will help in correcting any mistakes or omissions Some of the loads we need are already available in the Loads collection but most are not For example there is no load called bags of cement To handle this while defining the industry the program calls up the Load Definition dialog to prompt for the one piece of information it needs about this load the car type required to carry it We give It an X for boxcar and a new load is added to the list We can now load any boxcar with it and it shows up as bags of cement on top of the car icon The last step is to populate the layout with appropriate cars There is no automatic way to do this If necessary you can consult the properties of each load to find out what car types it requires In our case we already know we need hoppers gondolas and boxcars because we just finished setting it up this way Once you select the car types place the cars in the yard at the interchange and at some of the industry spots Then what We have industries to ship and receive goods and cars to carry them and we re ready for Some work orders The next step is to Generate Ops as explained in How To Use Ops How To Use Ops Before
174. ed Download you would get a copy of Benjamin s Room deposited in your local Layouts folder under Standard User Tree Contents Demo Sample layouts for use with free demo version British Layouts for UK users Standard Large collection of user submitted layouts Layouts101 All plans from Linn Westcott s book 107 Track Plans for Model Railroaders Premium Large collection of professionally designed layouts requires Premium license Featured Layouts Contents of special folder on web updated frequently What s New Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Always dimmed in this web chooser Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all layouts within the selected folder and subfolders Look at web layouts within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New Find Next Download All Download Missing Items Download Missing Items List Menu Download selected layout s then switch to Local tab Works over multiple selection Refresh Thumbnail Refresh Thumbnail Redownload thumbnail image Open Web Sound Chooser The web sound chooser Is for downloading sounds from the web You must have a li
175. ed or Empty on the toolbar rs ze Setting the loaded empty status of a car modifies its image in side and top views Emptying the car does not remove its assigned load type Car Load Menu 1 Right click a freight car to see the Load submenu Cut Car Copy Car Delete Car Uncoupte Add Car Train G Empty Loaded Load Chooser Load Unload Car coal Load Unload Cut coal Load Unload Train gravel gravel iron ore The menu does not appear for unloadable cars locomotives tenders passenger cars or cabooses Commands on the menu are e Empty Loaded changes the empty loaded status of the car If no load is associated with the car choosing Loaded brings up the Load Chooser Notice that these two commands are also available on the toolbar icons at right on the train toolbar next to the uncoupler Load Chooser brings up the for selecting loads Choose By Name shows a list of loads suitable for the car pick one and it deposits the load in the car Load Unload Car toggles the loaded status of the selected car Load Unload Cut toggles the loaded status of the selected car and any coupled cars of the same type Load Unload Train toggles the loaded status of all loadable cars in the train regardless of type Note the Load menu Is also available from the main menu under Train gt Car This makes it accessible in Tools Customize so you can create your own keyboard shortcuts or toolbar but
176. ee s oo k wf status Bar Toolbars FA Main tools Train tools Track tools e Background Hl toggles the display of the background image with the image off you can clearly see the track Whenever you turn off the background track display is turned on Car tool _ _ This and the other items in this section also affect printing and export image Use View commands to get the screen looking the way you want before printing Script tools Customize o Tracks k toggles the display of the track Normally track display is off because the lines in the image serve the same purpose o Grid 4 toggles the display of the grid This is normally not displayed unless you re curious about the fit between the program and the drawing e Trains toggles the display of all trains new in 3 1 Trains continue to move when they are not on view e Rails kA toggles the display of double rail new in 3 1 not shown at left See details below Here is an example of a plan with the background off tracks and grid on i a 7 w p 5 F gt og fg n D E a ee ee Pm e Clock toggles display of the Clock The first time you bring up the clock the schedule window automatically comes up too The clock starts automatically the first time a train moves or you can set it manually using the clock window context menu e Schedule toggles display of the Schedule Window wher
177. ee Editing Scenery 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to add more objects When you are finished click Done To add a single scenery object The drag and drop method above works no matter how many objects you are adding but if you only want to add one object there are alternative methods e Click to select an object in the middle pane then click OK The object is deposited in the middle of the layout window and the dialog is taken down Note once you have dragged an object from the dialog the OK button changes to say Done and will not add an object when clicked e Click Browse then navigate to an image file on your disk Click OK An object with the selected image IS created on the layout and the dialog is taken down Using any of the above methods what you are creating on the layout is a rectangular object with a bitmap fill You could get the same result by creating a rectangle object and editing its properties or by using the Bitmap tool Downloading Scenery from the Web To see the scenery objects available on the TrainP layer web site click the Web tab For details see Scenery Web Chooser Scenery Ed L rare ap cranes bing Loca Web Trainflever Web Cofechons ial Senay 3 background LJ cars and trucks ec E chem plart_refirery Led oosl_ore mines_sand_coal foi gt IE 3 Factories 3 fsstgran mis LD kumbar cae papier mik 9 miscelsreou ad roads and streets 3 station rr bulding
178. eed wiht Traine lyer onl Flu Can oraiie Track ape aires laie from the Melo menu Tha TrackLayer demo does not akre saving layout files Enable Traklar fates rile Dont ak ma this agar If you re only interested in trying TrainP layer click No To change your mind later choose Help gt Enable TrackLayer Features Click Yes to enable TrackLayer features at the outset and prevent this alert from appearing again The Track Toolbar The main difference you see on the screen when you are in TrackLayer mode Is the addition of the Track Toolbar hs O E BEL Edit Track Circle Turntable Station Run View View View View Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Tool Bkgmd Tracks Grid Retresh Tools on the Track toolbar are as follows Some are duplicates of commands available in TrainP layer Edit tool for selecting moving deleting track or other objects Track tool for drawing straight track sections and switches Circle tool l or l for drawing guide circles used in making curves T le tool urntable too for drawing turntables Station tool for drawing station areas also available in TrainP layer Run tool View Background View Tracks View Grid View Refresh The Blank Layout for running trains behaves just like TrainP layer turns on off background image turns on off display of tracks turns on off display of grid refreshes and updates screen When TrackLayer starts it presents a default blank layout 4
179. efresh Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Reload folder contents from disk note 1 Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find New Folder New Folder Create folder in tree 2 Find Find Next Add File Add File Browse for file add to open folder 2 Remove Remove Remove file or folder from tree 2 3 Rename Rename folder in tree 2 3 Properties Display folder properties F Properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Rename Export Filenames 1 Refresh is available on locked folders and folders containing other folders is dimmed for folders created manually 2 Editing commands are dimmed on or inside a locked folder as these cannot be modified For more see Adding Your Own Layouts 3 Remove and Rename are dimmed on special folders Layouts Recent Downloads List Menu Open Open selected layout and take down dialog Refresh Thumbnail Refresh Thumbnail Recreate thumbnail image from layout Adding Your Own Layouts to the Tree The local layout chooser is more flexible than the others In addition to showing you layouts residing in your TP Layouts folder it can also show layouts stored in other locations You can add files or folders to the chooser and organize them so you can find them easily For example you might create a Favorites folder containing the layouts you like best say some fr
180. elve generic classes Diesel Steam Tender Pullman Baggage Reefer Hopper Gondola Boxcar Tankcar Flatcar Caboose This is partly for historical reasons and partly because we have only these twelve icons on the car toolbar A car s generic class determines certain aspects of its behavior e Diesel and Steam are the only classes which have motive power If you want a car to move when you hit the throttle make sure it is Classified as one of these even if itis an electric trolley mule drawn wagon handcar etc Freight types are the six from Reefer through Flatcar e Passenger types are Pullman and Baggage e Only freight types are loadable You cannot attach load types to engines cabooses or currently passenger cars When you add a car using the car toolbar you are choosing a generic class The actual car type you get is whichever member of the current Default Car Collection has been assigned to this class For example if you click the hopper icon and the current default collection is Default Steam the car you create is of type 2 bay hopper AAR Codes e With the introduction of Ops it became necessary to be more specific about car types If you need to carry logs you need a flatcar but not one with a depressed center To classify cars more precisely we now use AAR Codes e An AAR Code is a one to three letter string representing a specific type of car as classified by the Association of American Railroads The
181. ely as long as you maintain their locations relative to each other 4 In the appropriate system folder Layouts Scenery Sounds etc If an external file resides in the system folder on the recipient s computer then It will be taken from there The simplest way to transmit a layout and Its external files is to take advantage of 1 and just put them all into a Single folder RZP Zip Files TrainP layer Version 5 introduces a new type of format for transferring layout data the railroad zip file with extension rzp This is a standard zip file you can change the extension to zip and work with it just like any other Zip file The rzp file contains a layout background bitmap if any and a_files subfolder containing external files The recipient can open it directly just as they would for a normal rrw file To save a layout to an rzp file use File gt Save As choose type rzp from the drop down The program creates a Zip file copies all components into it and saves it to the indicated location To open an rzp file use File gt Open choose type rzp from the drop down then browse to the file Or drag the rzp file from Windows Explorer into TrainPlayer In either case the program unzips the file into a temporary location opens the rrw from there and locates its external files in the _ files subfolder alongside To unzip an rzp file to your disk open the rzp file as indicated above then use File gt Save As and choose type rrw
182. enery objects apply to animated ones To trigger animation on train moves see the following section Animated Image Properties To view or adjust properties of an animated image right click on it using the Scenery Edit tool and choose Properties The Scenery Properties dialog appears showing the new Animation tab E i SP 9 Type Animated gif file Frames 7 Playing Play once Rewind after play This dialog is modeless it remains up while you work on the layout You can select different objects on the layout and adjust their properties one ata time or shift click to select multiple objects and set all their common properties at once Controls on the Animation tab Type Animated gif file vs Image series anm file This is read only you can t change the type in this dialog Frames number of frames in the animation Read only Frames button click to bring up the Frames dialog showing filenames and durations in a little grid EF Taniej E Frames auto anm e auto 1 png auto 2 png auto 3 png auto 4 png es If the animation type is anm then you can edit the values in this grid for animated gifs the data is uneditable in fact for the time being the Frames button does nothing at all if you are dealing with gif rather than anm Times are in milliseconds Filenames can be changed they need not be numbered sequentially once they have been listed in an anm file but they must exist and al
183. entire layout with the Straight Track tool although you ll get better results if you learn to make curves as described in the next chapter In this chapter we describe how to create straight track If you want to add ties and or roadbed to your track those are covered in the scenery chapter See Ties and Roadbed Drawing Straight Track and Switches Editing Track Special Track Drawing Straight Track and Switches To draw straight track Choose the Straight Track tool Fal Press the mouse button where you want one end of a track segment 3 Drag to where you want the other end release the button NO You have a point to point railroad If you wanted to you could add a train and start operating 4 Position the cursor on one endpoint so it highlights with a little green square see picture above right 5 Press and drag Note TrackLayer lets you join tracks at any angle The trains can handle Cs any turn no matter how sharp You now have a continuous section of road with a bend in the middle 6 And so on You can draw segments in any order and any direction they ll join together as long as the highlight square is showing when you press or release the mouse button To draw a switch A switch is automatically created whenever three tracks join This happens when you begin or end drawing a segment at either an existing junction or a point along an existing track To draw the switch shown here 1 Draw
184. er The temporary directory is under a folder named Scenery DL in your system TEMP folder This serves as a cache the next time you request the same files they are retrieved from the cache instead of being downloaded again This makes for faster browsing but runs the risk that the temporary files become out of date when web collections are updated For this reason there is a command on the menu when you right click the Scenery folder in the web tree Clear Download Cache Choose this to delete the temporary files and force them to be re downloaded We recommand you do this once in a while before browsing the web collections In a future version the program will do it automatically Modifying the Scenery Chooser Tree The tree in the local Scenery Chooser like those in other choosers is a flexible and somewhat complex device Detailed instructions for how to operate a chooser tree are given under Choosers Regarding the Scenery Chooser e The initial content in the tree is the set of objects delivered by the installer a few folders with a few items each New folders downloaded and installed from the Web tab go in the same location and add to this tree automatically If you do an Install AIl your local tree becomes a mirror of the one on the web e Ifyou have scenery images of your own you can add them to the tree by dragging in files or folders from Windows Explorer Once you do this be wary of using Rebuild All Trees as that will l
185. er group row Add New Grid context menu grid control and list management commands Right click a row to see the menu Duplicate Delete Commands are Sonera Add New create a new empty row in the same folder as the selection Choosing this command creates a new industry with a generic name and empty load lists then activates it for editing When Field Chooser you are finished editing the new entry validate and commit the changes by clicking OK or selecting a different record in the list Collapse All Items Group By Box BA Column Auto Resize Duplicate create a new industry with the same properties as the selection except for the name which is modified to become unique Duplicate works like Add New except that it copies data into the new record Of course the new row can be edited as required Delete delete the selected industry from the list You are prompted to confirm before deleting Note The above commands are dimmed if the selected row Is an industry in the current layout folder These can only be edited in Station Properties on the corresponding stations Expand All Items show all rows within each folder All rows are expanded by default when the dialog comes up Note that within each folder may not be the right wording if you have grouped the grid on some other field Collapse All Items collapse all folder contents and show only folder names Folders can then be expanded one by one Field Chooser d
186. er which corresponds to a labelled module in the assembly The highlighted row in the list shows the selected module This one is shown in the workspace with a pink frame You can select a module by clicking on it in the workspace or by clicking its row in the list box Buttons around the module list are for editing the assembly and modifying its properties as described below Adding Modules to the Assembly To begin creating an assembly 1 Click Add to bring up the Layout Chooser 2 Navigate to a Modules folder if necessary By default the chooser comes up pointing to the NTrak Components folder 3 Choose a layout to be the base module This just means all other modules will be positioned relative to it the base retains its orientation as others are moved around 4 Press on the selected layout drag it off the Layout Chooser list and drop it into the Module Manager window When you let go the module is displayed in standard orientation filling the window Neti TF Local Web l 4 GA Layouts 101 a No Name J i Modules NT 124008 a HO NT 1foat 3i NTrak NT Zoot gg Components NTrak Foot comer fi Scenic Piara Nireak Hog junction par ENAT Ea i NTrak 4f GJ Premium z Trak 4foot comer Ui Standard T NT foot i F n A Rece a NT Boot E D iai Hadas NT 4foot 5 Choose a second module and drag it into the MM You can drop it on either end of the existing module as indicated by red highlights which
187. ervice flatcar FM or a well car FW or a Solid bottom gondola GB A single letter code represents all car types of the same class for example G means all types starting with G A minus sign before a code means except this type for example F FA means all types F except FA A letter in parentheses is a display code for modifying the appearance of the load At the moment there is only one such code S gt stretchable meaning the load image is to be stretched horizontally to cover the entire car top Without this indicator a load image is shown at its natural size even if it is shorter than the car Stretchable loads are those like coal or gravel which look like piles covering the whole car unstretchable are those like bulldozers which remain fixed size regardless of the size of the car You can use the AAR Car Types window to create a multi code string When you click a row in that window it adds a comma and a new code to the string in the AAR box For example you can click three rows in the AAR Car Types window one ata time and get a string like FA FB FC Ee Building Trains In TrainPlayer you can t modify the tracks on a layout but you can equip it with the rolling stock of your choice This chapter tells how Selecting Cars and Trains Adding Cars and Trains Removing Cars and Trains Relocating a Train Naming Trains Train Properties Train Tree Selecting Cars and Trains If there are any
188. es two new ways to resize your layout without modifying the background One rescales or moves the entire set of track the other changes the size and shape of the benchwork In your garage the first method Is like replacing the HO track with N it changes the overall size of the track relative to the scenery The second is like adding a shelf it increases space for track beyond existing scenery Technically this means the bitmap size is now independent of the layout size so the two no longer need to be the same size and Shape This fixes a few long standing problems adds flexibility in plan bashing and solves some import problems which arise when a CAD app doesn t generate an image of the right shape Resizing a layout to add or subtract track space 1 Zoom out so the entire layout is smaller than the window on the screen This is not required but it s a good idea until you get the hang of resizing 2 Choose the new command Tools gt Resize Rescale or click the Resize Rescale button L amp I on the toolbar The first time you choose this command you get an alert with brief instructions This appears only the first time you activate the tool after starting the program so read it the first time it comes up If you want to get rid of it permanently check do not show again TrackLayer Using the Resize fRescale tool Drag the outer pink border to change the overall dimensions of the layout Drag the inner blue box to move or
189. esulting rectangle defines the station region a car is in the station if any part of it is sitting inside the rectangle A yard style station is defined not by a rectangle but by a set of track sections A car is in a yard style station if it Is sitting on any of the sections in the set To define a yard style station you click and shift click to select tracks one ata time then use a menu command to create the station and associate it with the tracks For details and screen shots see Stations How To Create a Yard or Interchange There are three general ways to add yards and interchanges to a layout e Don t Start with one of the ops ready layouts in the web collection which already have yards and interchanges defined See Ops Quick Start e Let the program do it The Yard Finder and Interchange Generator can start with any layout having track recognize certain track patterns and automatically create yards and interchanges For details of how these work see Yard Finder and Interchange Generator For instructions on how to use them see Ops Setup Wizard e Create them by hand Draw the track select an appropriate set of them use a menu command to convert the set to a yard style station then select the appropriate industry to identify as yard vs interchange Full details of the procedure are given under Stations Station Properties The Station Properties dialog is where you define a station and optionally its industry To bring It
190. evening working up a TrainP layer version of itto add to your collection of modules If not you can skip this Step and choose modules from our large and growing collections of templates and samples 2 Assemble Bring up the Module Manager introduce modules one ata time and arrange them in chains loops or more complex patterns It s fun and easy Arrangement is done by drag and drop and the program takes care of aligning and snapping the modules together so they will hook up correctly 3 Fuse This is the easiest step for you just click OK The Module Manager does the work loads in each module positions it and fuses it to its neighbors by adding short sections of track The result is a finished layout ready to add trains and run If you re interested in the details of this process see the next section Once you have created a modular layout you can save It to a file as with any other layout However It is not fully self contained so you need to exercise caution before moving it or sending itto someone else See the section about modular layout files below The Module Fusing Process In the real world modules are scooted around on the show floor until their connection points line up then short segments of track are added to connect them In TrainP layer the Module Manager does this automatically in a process called fusing Fusing one module to another involves several steps 1 Locating the connection points The program searches
191. f a series of images the program will create an animation and anm file automatically This process is described in detail below Once you successfully load an animated image you get an alert confirming the import and reporting the number of frames An animated image created using Load Bitmap does not automatically start playing upon creation To start it use the Scenery Edit tool right click the image and choose Start Animation Working with Animated Images Animated images work basically like other scenery objects t yt To manipulate Use the Scenery Edit tool green arrow on the scenery toolbar click to select an image then you can move resize rotate and restyle itas usual It Keeps animating as you move it 1 E Sima around im Cat irl a Pe Copy Cirie By default an animated image has its proportions locked so resizing the image will not distort it To rotate Delete Delete an image drag the handle at its upper right Select A Chie Properties To stop or start animation select the Scenery Edit tool right click the image and choose Stop Animation or Start Animation as shown gt Once you start an object moving it keeps going until you stop it or until a trigger event causes it to stop If you save the layout while the object is animating it will come back that way the next time you open the layout To set object properties select right click and choose Properties Most properties of standard sc
192. form List includes name class AAR code date Properties Display and edit car type properties Properties Creating a New Car Collection Here s how you can create a new car collection if you have a set of side and top images For more information see Car Collections 1 Collect or prepare the set of images You will need at least a side view for each car type for top views you can create your own or choose from among the ones you already have Many side view Icons of the correct size are available as gif files for download from various web Sites 2 Gather the image files into a folder named as you want to name the collection If you have created car top images you need to make sure their files are named correctly In the example below we have prepared a folder of images called My Cars ee pe ASU AE M Bie El Alstrom A32_t bmp 4 a Late Gl Alstrom 435 1 bmp bie ee EL Alstrom A35 1_t bmp J EF Baldwin AS616 GIF m b oe EL Baldwin AS616_t bmp a E i ED mikkiin CTP nt 3 Point to a folder in the tree where you want the new collection to appear This must be a folder not a car collection In the example below we are creating the new collection at the top level right under Cartypes 4 Right click and choose Import from F older below left Sen Cartypes a Ami il ats By Refresh H Pre a ae El Sta Find Nex Be Properties Export Filenames Import fram Folder 5 Inthe Bro
193. gns with the bridge in this case the program does not help You can draw the other direction if you prefer starting at the far end and dragging in toward the circle ust make sure the bridge end and not the circle is highlighted when you press or release To move or resize a turntable 1 Choose the Edit Tool be 2 Click any point on the rim of the turntable or the bridge track Both are selected and colored dark blue Press the rim of the circle and drag Both the circle and the bridge track move together 4 Press the shift key while dragging to resize instead of move U Note that when you are editing the shift key behaves opposite to the way it works when creating a new circle or turntable When dragging a selected circle or turntable without shift it moves as a rigid unit with shift it resizes and also allows you to reorient the bridge as you drag To delete a turntable 1 Choose the Edit Tool bs 2 Point to the rim of the turntable so the circle highlights 3 Press the Del key You can also delete a turntable by selecting It or including it in a set of selected objects then using Edit Delete or Edit Cut Repairing a broken turntable If you spend any time with the 101 Track Plans you are likely to encounter some turntables which need repair The most common problem is that rotation doesn t stop where it should the bridge comes to a connector and just rolls right on by This usually means the connector i
194. gram proceeds using standard replacements for the missing objects In any case you do not have to provide these common files to a recipient Other types of external file may come from anywhere on your disk These include background images linked layouts components of window snapshots scenery object bitmaps and module layouts If you want the layout to work for the recipient the same way It does for you you will need to provide these files along with the rrw file How do you find out what these files are and what is the best way to transmit them To see a list of external files required by a layout run Track Check or Layout Publisher To include external files when you are transmitting a layout you have several choices This is because when the recipient opens the layout the program looks in several places to find them 1 Alongside the rrw file If an external file is found in the same folder as the rrw it will be taken from there 2 Ina _files subfolder Ifthe layout is named abc rrw the program looks for a folder in the same location called abc_ files and if found looks there for external files 3 Atthe path stored in the rrw What is stored for an external object is its path relative to the rrw file as determined at the time the file was saved If itis not possible to derive a relative path then the absolute path is stored This means that if the layout and its external files are in different folders you can send them separat
195. h bring a section then you arrange them on the show floor and hook them together with sections of track so trains can run from one end to the other or around a giant loop Modular Railroading in TrainPlayer provides tools for building virtual modules arranging them in patterns and automatically hooking them together so you can test drive the overall layout The arranging is done by drag and drop and the hookup is a one click operation so it s easy to experiment with different patterns TrainP layer provides a large library of pre built modules including all types of corner junction yard modules scenic run throughs and lots of interesting plans you can use as the basis for your own designs The majority of modular railroading is done in N scale according to standards from the NTRAK Modular Railroading Society but there are also a growing number of HO module clubs using similar standards TrainP layer supports modules in any scale and provides pre designed units for both N and HO For a quick start skip the reading matter and try the tutorial About Modules About Modular Layouts Modular Layout Tutorial Building a Modular Layout Building a Module The Module Manager Module Manager Settings About Modules In principle any layout can be used as a module in the sense that it can be brought into the Module Manager and strung together with others However this only makes sense if the a layout is constructed in such a way that
196. h can be saved in the new orientation To rotate a layout choose View gt Rotate Layout gt direction The layout rotates 90 degrees in the indicated direction Repeat for 180 270 etc To save the layout in the new orientation choose File Save or File Save As Both the rotated layout and the rotated image file are saved The default action in both cases is to overwrite the original background image You are warned about this and given an Opportunity to save the image to a different file Notes 1 If you are running Windows 98 rotation is done a pixel at a time and Is very slow The status bar gives an Indication of the progress If you tire of waiting press ESC to abort the rotation This does not apply to NT XP 2000 Vista or later systems 2 Rotation is not undoable To undo rotate back in the opposite direction Double Rail Display You can get a more realistic view of your track by displaying it as two rails instead of a single brown wire For example here is the Pittsburgh Midvale amp Ironton shown with rails instead of track lines Rails can be turned on or off independently of track So you can show one or the other or both Use View gt Track and View gt Rails commands on the main menu Rail display gives an interesting variation to the graphics It was designed to become a feature to analyze electrical flow around the layout but that hasn t happened There are limitations e Rails are not us
197. hatever you want it to say settings so the sample looks the way you want then click OK The fonts shown in the dialog are those available on your machine They may not display the same way on another machine Font The size you choose is not meaningful in an absolute sense see note below regarding text sizes Note in the current version not all features in the Font dialog are working For example choosing Strikeout or Underline has no effect Color adjust the color using either tab of the dialog l Choose Left Center or Right to position Align text horizontally within the box Specifies how to handle text in a rotated object If this box is checked text is rotated to the same orientation as the object as if it were painted on the rooftop this is shown in the picture above Rotate text with image If the box is unchecked text is displayed horizontally regardless of whether the Object is rotated like a label on a map This option applies only to single line text Wrapped text cannot be rotated Check this box if you want the text to be displayed on multiple lines wrapped to fit within the box This option is incompatible with text rotation If you choose to wrap text the text will be displayed horizontally When Wrap Text is on you can manually Wrap Text enter a carriage return into a text block by entering the characters n backslash n This
198. he collection 2 Click one of the cars in the list window You See its side and top view in the preview window 3 To add this collection to your local set click Install This copies the files from the cache directory to their permanent location in your Cartypes directory then switches to the Local Car Chooser so you can add them to your layout In the web car chooser unlike others status icons are shown on the folders in the tree instead of on individual items in the list Decorations on the folder icons indicate whether you have a local copy of a car collection or whether there is a recent or newer version available on the web For more see Status Icons Tree Contents Cartypes British Cartypes Defaults Cartypes European Cartypes Premium Cartypes Standard Cartypes What s New Tree Menu Refresh Find Find Next Download All Folder of British car collections Folder of car collections which can be used as default cars see Default Cars Folder of European car collections German French Folder of premium collections Available only with Premium license Folder of standard car collections available to all users Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Download Missing Items List Menu Install Side Views Top Views List View Install Side Views Top Views List View Open Refresh Find Find Next Download All Download Missing Items Open folder or download colle
199. he load chooser or choosing it by name from the load menu In the illustrated example gondola G1 is modified to have the load crates2 The loaded unloaded status of a car is also changed by the program to accommodate switchlist moves or as a car is delivered to Its destination No user action Is required for this Creating Your Own Loads Creating a new open car load is just like creating a new car type First you will need to decide which load collection you want it to go into and use a paint program to prepare top and side images of the load Then bring up the Load Collection Editor and follow the instructions for Adding a New Car Type Creating a closed car load is simpler because it requires no images The easiest way to do this is to edit an industry in Station Properties in the Incoming or Outgoing Loads box type in the name of the load you want to create then click OK If the load name is not recognized you get an alert asking if you want to create it and prompting for additional necessary info For advanced users there is a quicker way Closed car loads are defined in the following file located under your TrainP layer application data directory TrainPlayer Cartypes Loads z_closed_car_loads xml You can open this file in Notepad and if you can make sense of it feel free to add delete or modify lines But caution if you change your version layouts you obtain from the web may complain about missing loads Car Properties
200. he other in either direction When you release the circles disappear and become curved track sections If the result doesn t look like this picture use Edit Undo to go back a step then try again Make sure a circle is highlighted when you Start or end drawing each straight You might use File Save As to save a copy of the layout at this stage and again every so often as you work Place circle for branch Choose the Circle Tool Drag from the center near Oyster Bay and overlay the curve leading to Gills Landing Toggle the shift key on and off while you drag until you get both radius and position just right ee Oyster Bay Hai prib Complete the branch Choose the Track Tool Drag from the stub above Gills Landing to the circle so it highlights then release This creates the first leg of the curve Create the second leg drag from the bottom left of the circle moving AN OE p Oyen May down and to the right S eaa Re E l Hr until the lower segment 4 ese V aan ue i highlights as shown and ie gt NW e i the cursor is positioned a OW OO VO Be atthe switch then release When you release this segment the circle disappears and becomes a curve and a switch is automatically created Loop with branch At this point you have a loop and a curved branch with an operating Switch as shown Toggle View Background L t
201. he railroad carries them out money changes hands You and TrainP layer work together to carry out this simulation Your role is like that of a club member Once a week you and the boys go over to J oe s basement for an operating session As you walk in J oe hands you the controls for a locomotive and a stack of cards detailing this week s deliveries Tonight you run the AB Local serving A and B and points between Pick up two tankers of milk at the A Dairy a hopper of coal from the AA mine set them out on the interchange at B Return empties to A Your job is to plan your approach start your engine and get the cars where they need to go preferably before everyone else is done and the cookies are all gone TrainP layer plays the role of J oe It provides the layout track trains industries and random sets of shipping orders everything but the cookies Ops Components An operating session in TrainP layer is represented by a switchiist a set of instructions telling you to move a given Set of cars to given destinations The program generates a switchlist and you deliver the cars as instructed When you re finished you can toss the switchlist and generate a new one or rewind and work the same one again The switchlist generator starts by creating a random set of waybills orders to ship or receive goods for the industries on the layout It then randomly assigns cars to carry the goods and determines whether each car is to be loaded or
202. hen release To hide a column just drag it away from the grid Applies to Switchlist Window only Right click anywhere and choose Grid Editable Then you can a click ina cell and edit the text or choose from the drop down note that not all cells are editable or b add or delete rows by choosing Add New Duplicate or Delete from the context menu For more on editing see Switchlist Window Right click anywhere and choose Group By Box This displays a panel at the top of the window Drag a column header into that box and the grid will change into a sort of tree all rows having the same value in that column will become a single collapsible row For an example see Cars Window To ungroup drag the header out of the group box Click the header of any text column i e any column except pictures The grid will be sorted on that column Click again to sort in reverse order See additional notes below regarding sorting Right click and choose Print Grid This brings up the system dialog and prints the entire grid text that is no images This is quick and basic you may need to resize columns so they don t get truncated and you have no control over margins or page layout For fancier printing copy the grid to a spreadsheet and print from there Select a row by clicking the row header at the left To select multiple rows select one then press shift and select another To select a block of cells press in one and drag to another You c
203. her Mame Comments Input File Output Folder Output File Mokes Farmersville Jct 2z 15 HO By Robert Hargrave 1 Produce Whse Loading Dock 2 Modular Construction Assembly Plant 3 Oil amp LPG storage tanks C Program Files TrainPlayeriLayouts Farm CihlyPublishFolder a Farmersville rr Publish Track check ok ance Requires car collection Colorado Help Publishing a layout means preparing it for delivery to other users checking for errors gathering the layout and image files in one place giving the files uniform names creating a thumbnail image and other steps The job is done in this dialog It does not modify the original layout but makes a new copy in a different location The new copy is activated and remains open after publishing If you edit properties in this dialog the changes will apply to the published copy only an alternative is to edit the properties of the original before publishing Three files are created when you publish a layout lt name gt rrw the layout file in xml format lt name gt jpg gif omp etc the background image file in a graphics format and lt name_T gt jpg a thumbnail image of the background To publish a layout 1 Inspect the Notes box If errors are reported cancel the dialog fix the errors and try again If the layout has links to external files or car collections you should publish those too 2 Inspect and edit Name and Comments
204. hift Key to move the circle instead of resizing It pA When you release the mouse button the bridge track appears automatically oriented at a random angle The Turntable Tool is automatically deselected and the Track Tool selected instead A 4 Draw a connecting track Start where you want the far end of the track press and drag in toward the circle When the circle highlights release You can do this in the other direction if you prefer start by highlighting the circle then draw outwards 5 When you release the connecting track snaps to be perpendicular to the circle rim 6 Test Double click anywhere on the rim of the circle The table should rotate until the bridge track is aligned with the connector then stop If the table just keeps rotating double click the rim again to stop it then see Repairing below To make a cross over If you want the engine to be able to drive straight across the turntable you must take care to make sure the connecting tracks are aligned Here s the best way 1 Draw the first connector as in steps 4 5 above 2 Rotate the table until it stops in the aligned position as in step 6 3 Point to the free end of the bridge track so it highlights with a green square When you are pointing to the bridge track end only the track end highlights not the circle 4 Press and drag outwards to form the second connector You will have to eyeball where to drop the track end so that it ali
205. ht want to save a copy of the layout before trying it Settings which affect the generation are Determines the number of trains to be generated by specifying how track much of the track to cover Eligible means track which is unpopulated and long enough to hold trains Increase this value to generate more trains decrease for fewer Increase to have a larger number of trains with motive power decrease r engines to have a larger proportion of standing cars Increase if you prefer engines to be steam decrease if you want more steam diesels If you try a generate and don t like the results try again Each click gets you a new set Delete All Trains Click to delete all trains from the layout An alert warns that this operation is not undoable and gives you a chance to cancel If you click OK all trains will be removed from the layout Note if you just want the trains to be invisible but not deleted use View gt Trains from the main menu Car Defaults These settings choose a couple of general preferences involving cars Choose a default car collection to be in effect when you are creating a new layout See Default Cars The types of cars you select here will be Collection created from tools on the Car Toolbar Choose a language to be used when naming car classes This is the Same choice you can make in the AAR Car Types dialog The language chosen here affects car class names throughout the program wherever car
206. ia right click the What s New Folder and choose Settings The dialog is self explanatory 1 9 TrainPlayer Web Collections B Layouts Richmond 0 Demo PhiipRandolphStation Ee 49 Standard fe 37 bee if 9 101 Track Plans fe jo H Premium mi ees J Featured Layouts What s New folder shows items ae fee What s New W Less than 130 days old Ej a C Newsince 9 10 09 The settings in this dialog also determine which items are marked as Recent on Web in the web choosers Status icons Web chooser lists and trees show icons next to somerset county traction 2 items indicating how the local version of a file compares to its web El magnolia 1 version There are four choices magnolia 2 go B Q bristol fery terminal m r tl document you do not have a local version of EC CNW Appleton Wisconsin a Ej Saesing Station E d aia H e E filled document you have an up to date local version LJ No local Have local Ef Web newer Cf Web recen amp filled document with red star you have a local version but the version on the web Is more recent than the local one E empty document with blue star web version is recent i e meets the conditions on the What s New folder For car collections icons appear on the entire collections i e on folders in the tree rather than rows in the list window A legend at the bottom of the dialog reminds you what the icons mean Export
207. ider or longer than it might normal appear AND also to control both length and width together Click here to make the image bigger Moving an Image If you need to move the industry image to somewhere else on your layout again use a left mouse click to activate the image Your cursor should now change to a 4 arrow head marker and this will allow you to move the industry anywhere you want on your layout Scenery Properties x General Background Line Text About Image Properties C Wo Fill Stretch Tile Use a right mouse click on any image and from the submenu select Solid M Lock proportions Properties This submenu then appears gt Hatched ie Bitmap Browse F Program Files TrainPlayer Scenery c Hint For all Bitmap buildings you will want to have Stretch as the default setting and you will want to ensure to Lock Proportions Transparency to ensure that the image retains its basic structural and visual SSS integrity ni Naming your industry or Town From your Scenery toolbar ensure you are in Foreground mode Scenery Object Text then press the Text tool icon then near your industry left 3 mouse click and drag to create a new text box Enterta Robin Hood Milld Insert whatever name you want for that industry As with other image boxes you can click on It to move it around to whatever position suits you Working with Your new Text If you want
208. iew Tools Train Window Help oe Fe ah i Eg da 2 er a o p a B f Alon 3 3 GE Train Tools To remove a toolbar e Drag It away from the frame so it floats then click the close x box Or e Uncheck itin the View Toolbars menu Modifications made to toolbar arrangements are saved between program sessions To set all toolbars back to factory defaults use the Reset buttons in the Tools Customize dialog The Customize dialog To modify the commands on toolbars choose View Toolbars Customize or Tools Customize to bring up the Customize dialog shown below You can then use drag and drop to set up your toolbars As long as the Customize dialog is on the screen you can e Remove a button from a toolbar by dragging it off into space e Adjust the sizes of non button controls on the toolbars train window train combo and speed display by clicking in the control to select it then dragging an edge of it e Add a button to a toolbar by dragging it from the Commands window Commands tab shown below to the place you want iton a toolbar If the command has no icon the button will be labelled with text Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Categories Command Oper Es Open Layout Close mj Save Save S Properties AIl eara ma A Cink Description The Customize dialog is brought to you by BCG Soft For details of the individual tabs see separate pages
209. iews Operation Preferences Settings related to train operation Called from menu command File gt Preferences Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches m Speeds Maximum Coupling Options Collisions Bounce Crash severity E Acceleration 10 ia 0 none 20 maximurnn i Shift click between cars to uncouple i Click on speed dial to rotate Cancel Defaults Help Speeds Sets the speed atthe top end of the dial No train can exceed this speed Use the drop down atthe right to choose whether speeds are displayed in miles or kilometers per hour Maximum speed Sets the speed below which coupling can occur If trains approach each other with a relative speed below this value the couple above this value they collide bounce or crash Coupling speed Options Collisions Crash severity Acceleration Shift click to uncouple Click dial to rotate Determines what happens when a train hits a closed Switch end of track or another train Choose Bounce if you want the train to go into reverse and keep travelling Choose Crash if you want the train to stop and destruct The destruction is temporary After a crash the train will repair itself as Soon as you begin to move it Affects the amount of destruction upon crashing The lowest values cause a bit of derailing highest values Cause Cars to blow apart and scatter across the landscape Has no effect unless Collis
210. ill it s a little grid of pixels not a blank mural and even less if you just want to copy an existing set and do a recoloring or kitbashing job To create your own collection from scratch 1 Create an image for each side and top view in the collection See instructions under Editing Images below 2 Name the files appropriately The name you give the side view image is the name you will see in the chooser for the car type so make it something friendly A top file is associated with a side and must have the same name with T before the extension The top and side need not be in the same format Example side Pacific Fruit R eefer gif top Pacific Fruit R eefer_T bmp Collect all side and tops into a single folder named what you want to call the collection This folder can go anywhere on your disk Bring up the Car Chooser Right click the folder under which you want the new collection to appear and choose Import From Folder Navigate to the folder of images and click OK Ory U1 A UW The program will create a new xml file and subfolder in your TrainP layer Cartypes directory copy the side and top image files into it then add the new collection to your chooser tree Editing Images in Microsoft Paint Click Paint in the Car Collection Editor Images tab and it will open the selected image in Paint The preferred format for top and side images is 24 bit BMP but other formats will work too jpg png gif To edit in
211. indow choose View Fit To Window So you can see the entire layout in it The train runs in both windows Welcome to TrackLayer TrainP layer lets you operate trains on prepared track plans TrackLayer is the program which prepares the track plans You can use It to edit plans provided by us or draw your own from a diagram or just sketch some track ona blank screen The two are actually the same program When the program is in TrainPlayer mode you get a collection of tools for building and running trains In TrackLayer mode you get one additional toolbar with a half dozen tools for drawing and editing track curves switches and turntables Building and operating features are fully integrated as soon as you have a Single piece of track down you can puta train on it and operate with all the features of TrainP layer The best way to get started with TrackLayer is to go through the next chapter Getting Started and then work your way through the tutorial in the following chapter The tutorial leads you through the complete process of preparing a Small layout The remaining chapters go into more detail on track laying operations About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help Getting Started Where you start with TrackLayer depends on what you have to start with If you have a picture of a track plan from a book or magazine web site CAD program or a sketch on a piece of paper then you re the user Track
212. industry of that type For example you can modify Feed Mill so that it includes corn H and this will then apply to any feed mill you create Yard and Interchanges In the pre ops version of TrainP layer you could select a region of track and give ita name and the result was called a station It was used for a few minor purposes such as reporting arrivals and departures of trains In the ops version stations play a larger role and it was necessary to define a couple of new types yards and interchanges to serve special purposes It was also necessary to enhance the tools so that these new types could be created This section gives an overview of the new types more information can be found under Stations Yards A yard is an area of track where cars are stored until needed and where trains are made up or broken down Most are easy to recognize designed to fit as many cars as possible into a small area they usually consist of parallel tracks about a car width apart a i 7 i Ta e ra F F P 2j ay s r z at i 3 i 1 B i z j e 4 AA Ne aa F li i 1 i E E A FI ee any os R int E Ls Tom Le e Ops requires yards They serve as sources of empty cars to be sent to industries and as off the mainline areas where switchers can gather cars and assemble them into trains ready to go out on the line On model railroads they serve as places to stash all that r
213. ing and outgoing loads For example a manufacturing industry might have two stations a factory siding where raw materials arrive in hoppers and a loading platform where finished goods go out in boxcars er Sounds Layout INDUSTRY Machine shop way Tool and Die Maker Choose Industry Incoming Loads Outgoing Loads aluminum bars steel bars steel plate Choose Loads Creating An Industry Here are the general steps for creating an industry on your layout 1 Decide where load exchange will take place You will need a single section of track where cars must sit to be loaded or unloaded The length should suit the industry and the expected traffic Only one station may occupy a single section of track If you plan to have two stations for one industry Such as shipping and receiving you have to place each station on a separate track section To isolate this you may have to chop or redraw a longer section See Isolating Track Note If you are using a plan imported from AnyRail it may be necessary to redraw several of the short segments that AnyR ail creates in order to make one section long enough for the station 2 Create a station there Activate the Station tool Press and drag a small rectangle so it highlights just the loading track then let go The Station Properties dialog appears 3 Enter station properties Enter a station name and optional sound Note that we now have a large collection of industrial so
214. ion Thanks to our users for suggesting this handy feature To enable yard mode right click the Control Panel and check Enable yard mode Or use the command Enable Yard Mode on the Tools menu or click the Y button on the toolbar Y When yard mode is enabled a brass Y appears in the upper right of the control panel as shown in the illustration at right To use Yard Mode with the speed dial l Rotate the speed knob counterclockwise so it goes past the zero point at around 7 00 The train stops and goes into reverse Speed remains zero until you rotate past the stop button at 6 00 If the train is already in reverse when you rotate into yard mode it stays in reverse Continue to rotate counterclockwise The train speed increases in the usual way slowly at first as the train moves in reverse You can rotate all the way around to maximum reverse speed at the 7 00 position While yard mode is in effect the stop button flashes To end yard mode a rotate back clockwise past the starting point or b click the stop button which immediately stops the train and returns to normal mode To use Yard Mode with the speed slider When yard mode is enabled the speed slider divides into two sections as shown here Normal a a a ee a a Yard In normal operation zero speed is at the left moving to the right increases speed In yard mode zero is in the middle moving to the right increases spee
215. ion it goes on the list so you can choose it at the others To continue the example from above all of the stations associated with Acme Powder will have the Same industry name although each has a unique station name Choose Industry Brings up the Industry Browser for browsing pre defined industries For convenience when defining industries we have assembled a collection of standard types with typical load lists You can browse these in the Industry Browser which shows the standard types along with all the industries defined on the current layout plus any types you might have added to the collection yourself When you make a selection from the Browser it fills the industry related fields of the current dialog You can then edit these to suit the industry you are defining Incoming Outgoing Loads Types of load arriving at shipping from this station The load list windows are simple text boxes You can type in load names delete existing ones copy and paste etc Load names may be entered on separate lines the Enter key works safely in these boxes or as comma delimited lines with multiple names per line coal oil fuel It will probably be easier to read if you list each load on a separate line If you enter a name not known in the master load list it will be brought to your attention when you click OK and you will be given a chance to add it to the master list How this works is described below Instead of or in addi
216. ions is set to Crash Sets the amount of acceleration deceleration when trains start stop or change speed A low value reduces the effect and makes train control more responsive a high value increases the effect so that trains take longer to come up to speed or coast to a stop Set the value to zero to eliminate acceleration Affects what happens when you point the mouse cursor between two cars on the layout With this box unchecked the cursor changes to an uncouple Icon and a click causes the cars to uncouple With the box checked the cursor does not change unless you are pressing the shift key this prevents accidental uncouplings For a picture of the uncouple icon see Moving Trains By Hand Check this box to enable a special feature of the control panel When this box is checked then when you click a point on the perimeter of the speed dial the dial automatically rotates to that point Uncheck this box if you find that feature to get in the way Switch Preferences Settings for switch display and operation and for the switch window Called from menu command File gt Preferences Preferences General Operation Trains Track Switches Display M Open lights m Distance to frog pa S W Closedlights M Light size j Highlighting O Operation Barrel through when closed W Gubo throw when crossed Random throw time in seconds 4 Switch Windows Background Show next switch automatically Cancel
217. ipt Record will create one if there Is a script recorded commands will be inserted into the existing script after the current command e Rewind move all trains switches and script back to starting positions This command applies to all trains and all scripts For more information see Rewind Points e Stop when playing back stop train and script instantly When recording stop recording do not stop train e Play begin playing script at current command Button is dimmed if no script is available to play El Edit open Script Editor window for the script on the selected train This button is dimmed if the selected train does not have an engine Stop and Play buttons on this toolbar and on the Scripted Layout alert apply to all scripts of the layout clicking Play Starts them all This is different from the corresponding buttons in the Script Editor which start or stop just the active script When you click Stop trains do not coast to a stop they stop instantly If you then click Start the trains will pick up where they left off but not instantly they come up to speed as usual Play a script If you tried the demo you basically know how to play a script This section contains additional notes and details To play a script 1 Open a scripted layout Before you can play a script you must open a layout which has one Ifa layout has any scripts atall it will display SCRIPTED on the status bar If you do not see this
218. iption in this box is taken from the book For other layouts the description usually includes the author s name operating instructions and other information of interest Overall size of the layout image width x height in units selected from the drop down to the right The size shown here is Size approximate itis calculated from the image file not the layout itself These values are not editable to change the layout size adjust the grid Units Choose model scale or prototype English or metric Units chosen in this dialog will apply throughout the program About the Properties Dialog The Properties dialog is for viewing and editing properties of the layout and the currently selected car and train It is inconvenient to do this with a normal modal dialog because you have to close and open the dialog for each object you want to inspect Instead as of Version 5 2 the Properties dialog is modeless it stays on the screen as you click cars and trains around the layout The dialog has four buttons OK apply changes from all tabs and close the dialog Cancel close the dialog without applying changes Apply apply changes made in any tab to the selected car train and layout Help provide help for the current tab The Apply button is dimmed until you modify some property Once you click it the modifications are applied to the layout and you can no longer cancel the Cancel button becomes dimmed and OK becomes Done At
219. is point on pause 3 secs after every stop uncouple or direction change set the global acceleration factor to 20 rotate turntable 321 until its bridge track hits junction 96 Notes Command applies to the train being driven by this script 2 When autopause Is in effect a pause is inserted before and or after this action 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Uncouple can be specified by a single integer giving a slot position relative to the lead car This varies with the train s direction so is confusing and not recommended Better to specify a single car ID the car uncouples from whichever neighbor closer to the engine or ID s of two coupled cars which uncouple between them THROW with no position throws a switch to its next position as when you click it on the layout To throw to a specific position use tooltips to identify the desired position usually 0 or 1 and include that in the command SET is an advanced command for changing program preferences from a script The variable name is any name from hkcu S oftware TrainP layer TrainP layer S ettings and the value is whatever value is accepted by that variable Details are not documented Most are true false 1 0 strings or numeric values For more info write support GOTO jumps to the named label which must appear elsewhere in the script A label is a word followed by a colon on a line by itself AUTOPAUSE cau
220. is to retain any name you provide and make sure it shows up where you would expect The particulars are as follows 1 When you first open a layout any old style names from previous versions are erased 2 When you name a train you are actually naming the engine 3 The name of a train does not change when cars are coupled to it or uncoupled from it 4 Ifallthe cars are uncoupled from an engine the engine retains the name of the train 5 Cuts of cars may be named in the same manner as trains The name is specific to the cut of cars 6 Ifa named cut of cars is coupled to a named train the train name Is preserved 7 Ifa named cut is uncoupled from a train Its original name returns This rule allows a train to move a cut of cars around a yard without erasing the name of the cut 8 Ifanamed cutis coupled to unnamed cars the cut name is lost It will come back if the named cut becomes again isolated 9 Iftwo named trains are coupled the new train takes the name of the Jonger train For example if Helper 2345 with one car is coupled to The Denver Flyer with ten cars the resulting train is called The Denver Flyer 10 When two named trains uncouple each retains its original name Thus when Helper 2345 uncouples from The Denver Flyer its name returns 11 Copying and pasting a named train or named cut produces a named train or cut whose name Is the original name plus a number Copying and pasting
221. iscellaneous folder Address C Documents and Settings UserNamell application Data TrainPlayer Scenery miscellaneous Mame Size Type Date Modified GL bridge 4 tracks brp 65 KB BMP File os 2009 7 34 PM Gah corrugated tin roof brp 118 K6 BMP File os 2009 F 34 PM AE Country church bmp 26KB BMP File g7 i2009 4 37 AM al Farmi brp 157KB BMF File 9 3 2009 7 34 PM 5 Add to Chooser Ifyou saved the file to one of your Scenery folders then it will automatically show up in your Scenery Chooser when you refresh the folder right click on the folder in the tree and choose Refresh If you saved it to a different location locate the file in Windows Explorer and drag it into your scenery chooser tree Scenery Local Witeb i coal_ore mines_sand_coal lo A 7 a cranes i a Factories a Feed grain mills i lumber saw paper mills fit miscellaneous a roads and streets Be tehon r buildings bmp country church bmp Farmi bmp steel mill_machine shop j urban buildings j vegetation miscellaneous Note that a bit of the background color may show around the edges of the image when you see itin the chooser This goes away when you drag the object to the layout If you want to get rid of it use a fill color which is almost but not quite white 6 Add to layout Now you are ready to drag the church from the chooser onto your layout Adjust the size locatio
222. ise modify any type of object you don t need to keep switching back and forth between a drawing tool and an editing tool So for the most part the operations below work the same way with any scenery tool active There is a scenery edit tool the green arrow 4 on the left end of the toolbar The one function this tool can perform which the others can t is dragging a rectangle to define a multiple selection Selecting Objects Before you can work with a scenery object you must select it A selected object is drawn with drag handles as shown at right e To select a single object click anywhere in the interior ofthe object To unselect click outside the object i e To select multiple objects a hold the Shift key down while clicking to select an object This will add the object to the selection or remove it if itis already selected or b choose the Scenery Edit too Ms and drag a rectangle around the objects you want to select Press Shift to add the surrounded objects to the selection Selecting By Type If your layout has ties or roadbed you can choose from the Edit gt Select menu whether you want to select only those types Cut Ctrl x ES Copy Ctrl C pelt j x E Paste Ctrl V Delete Delete Select All Ctrl A Any Scenery Ties Only Roadbed Only Ties and Roadbed If you choose say Ties Only then the next time you drag a rectangle to select a region of scenery or use Select All Ctrl
223. ismisses the dialog When you click OK the data are checked for validity before the dialog is dismissed If the station name is blank or a duplicate of an existing station you are alerted and prevented from proceeding If any of the load names in either list box is not found in the loads collection you are presented with the Load Definition Dialog which offers to create new loads for you Changes made in the Station Properties dialog apply to the selected station They are not actually saved on disk until you save the layout Cancel discards changes and dismisses the dialog No warning is given if you made changes and are about to discard them Industry Browser Dialog The Industry Browser is a dialog for viewing and managing a list of templates you can use to create your own industries The initial list comes from the factory and includes over fifty types of railroad oriented industry with typical lists of incoming and outgoing loads grouped into a half dozen convenient folders A special additional folder shows the set of industries currently defined on the layout The list will expand if you choose to add templates of your own Structured display of the list is made possible by a new grid control In this grid you can choose organize and group columns as you see fit The same type of grid is the basis of the Ops Windows and details of its operation are described there try Browse an ari DPOWSs Location
224. isplay a popup window containing a button for each column not already visible in the grid To add one of these to the grid drag it from the Field Chooser to the desired spot on the grid header To remove a column from the grid drag it off the grid header it will automatically move into the Field Chooser Group By Box display a panel at the top of the grid for grouping by selected columns When the Group By box is visible drag column headers into and out of it to specify how you want the grid rows to be grouped By default the rows are grouped by Folder Other groupings are not very meaningful in the Industry Browser but feel free to experiment Column Auto Resize specifies whether columns resize proportionally as the window is resized By default this is on If you turn it off resizing the window will not affect column widths Selected Industry panel of details for the selected row Not editable unless you click Edit When editing most of the operation is the same as described under Station Properties Name name of the selected industry Folder folder containing the selected industry This is read only under all circumstances you cannot change the folder of an existing entry you must delete and re create in a different folder Loads Incoming Outgoing load lists for the selected industry These boxes work as described under Station Properties Browse button brings up the Load Chooser for selecting incoming outgoing loads
225. it can hook to a neighbor for continuous running We use the term module to refer to a layout constructed in this way In the Layout Chooser all layouts under the Modules folder are in this category Module Standards Every module must have sections of straight track ending at certain positions near the layout edges These positions are called connection points The numbers and positions of connection points on a module depend on a scale specific body of standards of which there are several The most popular modules are N scale based on standards published by the NTrak Modular Railroading Society HO scale standards are less universal ours are based on HOTrak as published by the Ottawa Valley club In TrackLayer you can build modules in any scale based on standards of your own invention but all the layouts in the collections are either NTrak or HO A module is designed to be oriented a certain way The frontis the edge closest to the viewer in the diagrams below this is at the bottom The track closest to the front is the main line which generally runs uninterrupted around the entire layout For full details about the the Ordering positioning and labelling of tracks see Building a Module Sizes of modules vary but are not random The typical NTrak straight module is 2 feet deep and 4 6 or 8 feet wide The depth may vary an extension may be added to front or back but if the widths were to vary It would become impossible to arrange
226. it from Windows Explorer directly into the manager workspace The incoming file replaces the current contents of the window Module Display Items Features of the display which have user settable properties are indicated in the following screen shots Those with in Assembly in the name refer to features of the assembled layout others to the assembly as it appears in the Module Manager module background floor module label module frame track line module highlight label in assembly frame in assembly Background in Assembly is not shown in these shots this turns on or off any background images or solid color backgrounds in the individual modules G p i f gt E h fe i m Advanced Topics After you ve got the hang of drawing layouts you should check them for errors and take some final steps if you want your layout to be used by others This chapter explains how Debugging and Repairing Publishing Your Layout Importing CAD Layouts Debugging and Repairing Preparing a layout in TrackLayer is a many step process fraught with possibilities for error This section gives some tips for avoiding errors and describes tools to help you spot and correct them Zoom in Work on one section of the layout ata time Zoom in so you have room to work You can draw tracks out to the edges of the window then when you scroll over to work on the next section hook up or move the disconnected track ends I
227. k from the front of the module This is the track which is used to align a module with its neighbors so it must be present and correctly positioned Normally the main line goes straight across each module and all the way around the layout MIL 2 main line 2 5 5 back BL1 branch line 1 7 back BL2 branch line 2 11 back M mountain line 14 back For HO modules only ML1 ML2 and BL are present at 4 7 and 14 from the front The picture shows how you can remove the inner tracks and just leave the connecting stubs Using the Track edit tool drag a selection rectangle so it Surrounds the middle portions of all five lines as shown then press Del This leaves short stubs on the sides which you can connect with your own trackage The labels on the tracks are scenery objects If you want to get rid of them use the Scenery Edit tool e From an existing layout You can Start with just about any layout and convert it into a module as long as you can add connecting tracks at the side edges and tie them somehow into the existing track To make room for the connectors it may be necessary to resize the layout using the Resize Rescale tool Here is an example in which the Custer amp Front Range has been enlarged and modified to work as an NTrak module Connecting tracks were copied from a template and pasted into the enlarged side areas then connecting tracks Shown in red were added by hand is a Ea a OUARES
228. k into Reverse so the three car train is moving toward the two stationary hoppers 2 Bump gently The cars couple automatically and the train is reassembled as shown in the top diagram These instructions would have to be reworded somewhat to apply to other configurations for example with the engine at the rear of the train or going in reverse Experiment Horns and Sounds There are two types of sound associated with a train the horn or whistle or bell which operates on demand and the running sounds which you hear constantly as the train moves There are other sounds which come from the layout and not the train these are discussed under Stations The TrainP layer website now has a large and growing selection of all types of sounds These are available on the Web tab of the various Sound Choosers To sound the horn press the Horn button t on the control panel or train toolbar The horn continues to sound as long as the button is held down To choose a different type of horn either a right click the Horn button on the control panel and the train choose Properties and select a horn type from the drop down in the Train Properties dialog Horn Choose Other at the bottom of the menu to pick from a Bel wider variety of horn and engine sounds via the Sound Whistle Other Chooser To turn running sounds on or off check or uncheck Running Sounds from the context menu on the Horn button pictured or the one you see
229. ked Yard Mode enabled Train Window Uncoupling Pin Horn Button Train Scroller Speed Dial Uncouple Button Speed Dial Knob Speed Display Forward Reverse Stop Button Minimize Button Close Button Train Window Displays the train being controlled Allows selecting a car and or uncoupling point scrolling the train viewing car or train properties For details see Train Window Note an identical train contro window is also available in the Train Toolbar Horn Button Press and hold to sound the horn Right click to choose horn type Speed Dial Controls the train speed To rotate press and drag anywhere on the perimeter of the dial Double click a point on the perimeter and the speed dial will jump to that value In Yard Mode you can rotate counter clockwise past stop and go into reverse Speed Dial Knob Shows the current dial setting Press and drag on knob to rotate dial Forward Reverse Click to change the direction of train movement Green light indicates forward red reverse Minimize Button Change control panel to compact form The minimized control panel allows dial rotation stop by click and reverse direction when yard mode is enabled Uncoupling Pin Shows location of the next uncouple add car or paste operation To change the position of the pin click between cars press right or left arrow keys or select a car For more see Train Window Train Scroller Press to scroll the train horizontally
230. l Railroaders First published in 1956 the book has sold over 500 000 copies worldwide and is still in print The plans in this book come in all shapes and sizes 101 of them to be exact most illustrated with that great Linn Westcott artwork which while nowhere close to what today s MR artists can do on their Macs has an Irresistible old fashioned railroad charm about tt 101 Track Plans is just the beginning The TrainP layer collection includes hundreds of track plans contributed by users as well as several sets of professional plans drawn exclusively for TrainPlayer If you have an internet connection you can browse the collection and download any you you are licensed to use There s one plan more interesting than any of these your own If you have a picture of your plan or your club s or the one you Operate once a week there are a couple of ways you can convert it for TrainP layer use So you can run your own trains on your laptop e Do it yourself with TrackLayer TrackLayer is a part of TrainP layer designed to do a very specific job apply track on top of diagrams It s nota CAD program although it IS a great way to sketch ideas on an outline of your space and then run trains on them it doesn t do 3D perspective or show you the view looking out the cab or build fractal scenery or even print It has justa few simple but powerful tools for drawing track curves and turntables It doesn t take long to learn and like on y
231. l be in the same folder as the anm file This dialog appears automatically whenever you import a sequence of image files Playing check or uncheck to start or stop animation The setting does not take effect until the dialog comes down Play once check if you want the animation sequence to play once and then stop instead of repeating continuously This applies whether you start the animation manually from the context menu or automatically based on a trigger Rewind after play check if you want the image to revert to its first frame after every play If you do not check this box then Stopping the animation will freeze it and starting it later will pick up where it left off Note due to a bug in the current version you may need a View Refresh to update the image so it will go back to its first frame Trigger type drop down choose a trigger action or None At the moment there are two actions available when a train passes through a station or when It crosses a junction Trigger id drop down choose the station name or junction id where animation is to start and stop The drop down shows either Station names or junction numbers depending on the trigger type choice Preview window shows a thumbnail of the selected image For the moment the preview is static and does not move but this may change in a future version Normally in the Background tab of Scenery Properties you can choose a different image for a scenery object However what
232. l its original aspects Several of the images in the Scenery Toolkit folders warehouses and factories are based on edited screen captures Inside the Scenery Toolkit you can also create a comparable image of an industry of your choice By putting together some rectangles 4 circles and some poly lines you can quickly create a typical small town flour mill At present you cannot save this image separately from the layout you are working on but we hope to have that capability added in the future Scenery Properties General General properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See also Editing Scenery Properties Background Properties Line Properties Text Properties General Background Line Text Size ios x far Units T a This dialog sets general properties of a scenery object If multiple objects are selected the dialog displays for values which differ among the objects any change you make applies to all Most of the values in this dialog are normally adjusted by moving the object on the layout rather than entering numeric values but both are possible Dialog controls Name Name of the object This is a program generated name consisting of the object s type and its ID It cannot be changed Foreground Check this box to move the scenery object into the foreground layer Uncheck to move to the background Height and width of the u
233. lder containing the types of object you want 2 The objects in the folder are downloaded to a temporary folder on your disk called the cache and the list window displays the object images 3 Click an icon to see a larger image in the preview window 4 Ifyou like the set and would like to use it in your layouts click Install This copies the images from the cache into your local scenery folder then switches to the Local Scenery Chooser so you can add them to your layout If you work with scenery chances are you will eventually need bits and pieces from the complete set so the web scenery chooser provides a handy Install All button This downloads and installs the entire collection from the web This takes a few minutes but afterwards you will never have to return to this web tab except to check for updates As an alternative to icon view you can choose to view the objects in list form This displays status icons indicating which objects you do and don t have in your local set and which are new on the web Cf wharf concrete bmp Cf wharf ore loader bmp ap E wharf bmp OS E wood trestle bmp streets E wood truss bridge bmp iscela f ads and L station_r buildings E wooden water tower b if al steel mill na Ca ee ee rN I 4 rn O Nolocal El Havelocal Ef Webnewer LF Web recent Tree Contents Scenery Named folders of scenery objects What s New Recent additions to the web collection see What s New Tree Men
234. led Click itto download and install the update Once the download starts exit TrainP layer so that it is not running when the installer begins Cars Update The bottom part of the dialog is for updating or purchasing Chris Pedersen Cars If you have already purchased this set then the dialog checks whether new cars have been posted which you don t have Ifso these sets are listed as shown above Click Download to download and install them all at once If you are nota CP Cars user the dialog offers you a chance to buy them shown below Click Purchase to go to the checkout page on our online store Check out with credit card or PayPal and you will receive an e mail with download instructions and serial number PGRADE AVAILABLE Your version is up to date Your installed version po Fa at Available for download 5 1 0 5 Ci Chall Efa g CF Cars are not installed a To buy the set 29 dick Purchase and await instructions by e mail Load Chooser The Load Chooser appears when you a select Load Chooser from the Load menu b choose Loaded for a car which has not yet been assigned a load or c double click the Load Car toolbar icon The Load Chooser is much like the Car Chooser It shows about a dozen folders named for types of goods each containing an assortment of pictorial loads in that category When you click a load it Shows top and side views in the preview window and data in the lower left about what sorts
235. lements like dirt and gravel areas trees etc For this tutorial we will proceed to adding a simple track plan Adding a Track Plan Select the Track tool menu LS i gt D and add what track arrangement you would like to see directly onto the Background image This is a sample of what your background with tracks would look like Adding the tracks atthis point makes it easier to place your towns stations and industries Adding an industry From your Scenery toolbar make sure you are in Foreground mode and that you select the Rectangle drawing tool as shown E Ea ta EES H A sal aa Using your left mouse button click and drag to open a shaded rectangle gt oo As we did earlier use the Scenery ee E and from the folder coal_ore mines sand _coal loaders select coal gravel loader 4 Drag it to the shaded area on your background Once itis inserted into the rectangle it will appear as it does on the right gt Positioning and Sizing an Industry Use a single left mouse click to activate the control points for the image When itis first placed on your layout the top left hand control point controls the rotation of the image which allows you to place it correctly with your tracks s l controls rotation of image Fi e ka a La eB The other points control the sizing aspects for the image which allow you to make it wider click here to make the image w
236. licked OK in step 3 When you are finished click Done or Cancel Tree Contents lt named folders gt Scenery objects in the named categories 1 1 Folders in this tree are those in the Scenery folder in your TrainPlayer app data directory By default these match those available on the web However if you change the arrangement of files on your disk the changes will be reflected in the tree Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Refresh Reload contents from disk Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Find Find Next Properties Display folder properties Properties Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames List Menu Add selected scenery object to layout Icon View Show scenery objects as icons See Show scenery objects in list form Web Scenery Chooser The web scenery chooser is for downloading folders of scenery objects from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser E TrainPlayer Web Collections s cars and trucks etc chem plant_refinery LE coal_ore mines_sand_coz of cranes n factories 0 feed grain mills sport_field_baseball bmp For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Scenery Folder 1 The web scenery tree shows folders of scenery objects available on the web Click to open a fo
237. lier versions Instructions in this section are for all choosers For details specific to each type see the individual help pages Layout Chooser Layout Web Chooser Car Chooser Car Web Chooser Sound Chooser Sound Web Chooser Scenery Chooser Scenery Web Chooser Contents of a Chooser In general the files you see in the local tab of a chooser are those in the corresponding folder and subfolders in your TrainPlayer application data directory The files and folders you see in the web tab are those on our website In addition most chooser trees have additional special folders for example Recent Downloads or What s New As of Version 3 3 1 you can no longer modify the Car Scenery or Sound chooser trees If you want the files in these sets to be Organized differently you can rearrange them on the disk and the chooser trees will reflect your changes The exception Is the local Layout chooser where you can add folders of your own and reorganize the tree to sult New in Version 3 3 1 you can now easily locate and inspect your application data directory Choose Open Data Folder from the File menu and it will bring up Windows Explorer in that location Operating a Chooser Components of a chooser work generally as follows Details differ see the individual help pages Tree Click a folder to select it If it contains files you will see a list of them in the list window If it contains subfolders click the Sign to expand itso you ca
238. log in 5 2 is modeless meaning it stays on the screen and updates as you Click around the layout This is handy for say browsing through your inventory of cars especially if you have the Pedersen collection and can see large images Properties changes are now undoable Combo boxes and controls have been reworked for better operation More Handy Improvements Auto Save your layout is quietly backed up every so often so you don t lose work if there is a crash More e Auto View Restore zoom and position come up just the way you leftthem More e Drag and Drop Loading drag from the Load Chooser directly onto cars load an entire cutatonce More Fixes Version 5 2 includes fixes for many popular bugs in such areas as coupling and uncoupling freight loads opening large layouts train horn selection engine direction flipping changing layout background See the Readme for a complete list What Was New in 5 1 Version 5 1 introduces new layouts cars scenery and sounds for the British railway enthusiast along with new features to make the data easily accessible When you install Version 5 1 you are given a choice of US vs UK settings If you choose UK you will see e New welcome dialog offering you the possibility of downloading the entire set of UK data atonce See the Readme for details e British flag on splash screen and About box e British default cars when you create a new layout This can be changed by a new
239. method would be to move each car one ata time a choose an engine or train with engine b couple to the given car c drive it to the destination d uncouple e repeat for each car listed The more prototypical method is to start by collecting all cars into a yard assembling them into a train then delivering them all in one trip For maximum efficiency the train should be blocked all cars headed for the same destination are grouped together so they can be dropped off as a unit This process is Spelled out in the Freight Operations article on the How To Clinics page on the TrainPlayer website A move is completed when two conditions are met a the car arrives at the destination station and b the train stops When this occurs you hear a ping sound and an X appears in the Done column of the switchlist grid What it means for a car to arrive is described in About Arrivals and Departures in the Stations chapter When the entire switchlist is completed there is no special reward other than the satisfaction of a day s work well done At this point you can e Save the layout This saves the switchlist in its completed state Next time you open it and generate a new switchlist it will more or less continue where this one left off i e cars will startin their current positions and go on to the next cycle of the waybill e Rewind to the beginning and start over Use Tools gt Ops gt Rewind or the toolbar button This moves trains ba
240. n amp Ideal River 9X10 03 08 2011 09 51 42 Cf 49 Fairhaven amp Ideal River RAXIT 13 08 9011 51 A z 4 Th eee Ge 1 j Note practically all ofthe 101 Track Plans are ops ready as is the entire Demo folder and many from the Standard and Premium sets 2 Choose Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops or click the El button on the Ops Toolbar That s it You get a switchlist ready to execute If you can make sense of what you see on the screen you re good to go oa p a EETA E ia Lae be REIP as a i ia 7 n F Original copyright Skarta Ready CAF NUMI SCRL Schedule x Return Boxcar X10 tools trom GSW Inc to Hamilton Yard Send Gondola G67 fempty from track 443 to Ingersoll Machine Deliver Gondola G61 coiled wire trom Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F48 fempty from track 6 to Hamilton Yard Return B Boxcar HS fempty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Send Flatcar F63 empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F4 fempty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Send Boxcar X60 fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GSW Inc yr Ops Slightly Less Quick Start 1 Open any layout Add some engines and freight cars if it doesn t have any 2 Choose Tools gt Ops gt Generate Ops or click el on the toolbar Color Action Class BW r Boxcar B sent Gondola BD elves conco E ctu atc Tetum Boxcar B send car E i rca B send Boxcar Ca
241. n and Orientation to sult a nO i 7 Consider sharing with other users If you ve drawn some nice scenery objects which may be useful to others send us an e mail and we will consider adding them to our TP web collection Publishing Scenery Suppose you have added some homemade scenery objects to your layout and now you want to send the layout to a friend Unless you arrange to also send the custom scenery files he will get an alert on opening the layout instead of seeing your objects This problem is solved by using File Publish This command does not actually put your layout anywhere it just prepares it for sending it gathers the component files in one place assigns uniform filenames checks for errors and gives you a chance to enter missing data This feature is described elsewhere in the manual See xxx but additional notes are in order regarding scenery If your layout contains scenery objects from the TP collections these are not flagged at publish time as the recipient can download them if needed However if you have custom objects not available from TP you are alerted about these in the Publish dialog Gutput File MyountryLayouk rr Nokes Track check ok Custom scenery object C Documents and Settings Jim Cill 4pplication DatalTrainPlayer Scenery miscellaneous country church bmp When you publish the named image files are copied to the output directory and placed in a folder alongside the layout This fol
242. n and other data Clicking a row header left end of row selects the indicated car on the layout To find a car on the layout right click a row and choose Zoom To Car Information on this page Is specific to the Cars Window See also the general instructions under Ops Windows unloadable Cars Switchhst Field Chooser Train_ID Fora more manageable display the list can be grouped by Train as shown below This gives you a tree with collapsible trains an alternative to the Train Tree To arrange this choose Group By Box from the context menu then drag the Train item into the group box AAR Location Load track 247 track 247 track 4 track 4 4 Cars Switchtist The Cars Window Is for display only and cannot be edited It can be sorted on any column except picture Cars Window Contents Car Car identifier Class General car class AAR Car class from AAR codes list Location Current location of car 1 Load Load currently in car or E mpty Color Color code for car h CarliD Internal numeric ID of car h Train Name of train containing car if train is named h TrainiD Internal numeric ID of train containing car h Consist One word description of train consist h 2 Notes Hidden h in this column means the item is hidden by default at install time To see it drag it onto the grid from the Field Chooser 1 Location is a station name or a track location Car in station means the
243. n end of the specified track If itlands pointing in the wrong direction read on To reverse the direction a train is pointing 1 Right click the train on the layout or in a train window 2 Choose Reverse Train The train picks itself up rotates 180 degrees and sets down again To move or copy a train to a different layout Have the target layout open in a window on the screen Unselect the selected car if any see Selecting Cars and Trains Choose Edit Copy to copy or Edit Cut to move Click in the target layout to make it active Choose Edit Paste The copied train is deposited at the normal new train location iA BW NO Naming Trains On a real railroad trains have names You can name your trains in TrainP layer to aid in setting up switching moves identifying car and train locations and giving your railroad that prototype feel In earlier versions of the program train names were provided automatically but could be overridden This is no longer the case In 4 0 if you want trains to have names you have to provide them yourself There is some complexity about what happens to a name during a series of moves so we provide the details on this page Definitions The standard AAR definition of a train is one or more engines with or without cars displaying markers A train need not have cars coupled to the engine but cars without an engine are nota train Note that this is not the same definition used elsewhere in Tr
244. n select a subfolder List The list window shows a collection of files or objects as either a table or a set of icons Icon view can be changed to list view using the context menu Click an icon or a row of the table to make a Selection in most cases you will then see a picture of the selected object in the preview window Preview The preview window shows a small picture In the Sound chooser you can click the picture to play the sound in other choosers the preview is not interactive Buttons Each chooser has four buttons at the lower right which differ depending on the context Click the left button which might say OK Download Install Add Car or Done to carry out the default action on the selected item Cancel to take down the chooser without further action Browse to browse the file system for a layout available only in the local Layout chooser or Help to go to the appropriate page of the help system Resizing A chooser window can be resized by dragging its lower left corner Individual panes can be resized by dragging the divider bars between them Modality Layout and Sound choosers are modal meaning once you click OK the selected item is opened and the chooser goes away Car collection and Scenery choosers are not they remain on the screen as you choose multiple items Context menus Right click an item in either the tree or list window to see a menu of context specific commands Menus differ depending on the chooser see
245. name gt nn_mm wav where name is the sound name which will appear in the menu nn is the minimum speed in MPH at which the sound takes effect mm is the maximum speed or the letters max representing the train s top speed For example the file diesel 26 35 wav is the sound listed on the menu as diesel which is played when the train is going between 26 and 35 MPH Name your files accordingly and deposit them in the Chuff folder Turntables Turntables are useful on model railroads and 707 Track Plans has a lot of them In TrainP layer they move and function and never need oiling A turntable is equipped with a section of track drawn with a thick line the bridge track and one or more sections of track radial to the circumference connecting tracks When you open a layout the turntable track is likely to be oriented in a random direction Before you can drive onto or off the turntable it must be rotated until the bridge track joins to a connector An alternative to a turntable is a transfer table a rectangular bed with a bridge which moves laterally For details see Turntables and Transfer Tables To rotate a turntable Right click a point on the circle and choose Rotate R ight clockwise or Rotate Left counterclockwise As a shortcut double click a point on the circle to rotate right i G Double click the rotating turntable to stop rotating Se ia ees The turntable rotates slowly until the bridge track aligns with a c
246. nce tools Bitmap for creating an object containing an image After you drag to define a space a file dialog prompts for the image file to be displayed Text A for creating a text label Define a rectangular space then when prompted enter the text to be displayed Layer tools Edit Foreground selects the foreground as the active layer for drawing and editing In this mode background objects cannot be selected or modified Edit Background dl selects the background as the active layer In this mode foreground objects do not appear at all Edit operations Group joins the selected objects into a single group object Dimmed unless multiple objects are selected Ungroup i l undoes a Group operation breaks the selected grouped object back into its original components Dimmed unless at least one grouped object is selected Bring to Front LH moves the selected object s to the front of the display order Send to Back a moves the selected object s to the back of the display order Gallery View Scenery Chooser displays the Scenery Chooser for browsing downloading and dragging scenery images onto the layout Creating Riverbend This tutorial takes you through the steps of creating a brand new layout with the Scenery Toolkit starting with a blank image file We ve chosen to design a simple loop with some sidings for industries and stations Follow along and see if you can build it As with all good design conce
247. nces allows you to delete all trains from the layout Rail display Now you can see two Steel rails instead of just a single brown line In 3 0 Scripting Program your operations to run automatically New Graphics Smoother scrolling infinite zoom reduced memory Sounds New sounds for trains and layout background sounds Tunnels Precise hiding for underpasses tunnels multi layer tracks Downloads Browse and download layouts from within the program Car Display Improved turning car top labelling Fixes Many repairs and improvements throughout Choosers A chooser is dialog used to select layouts cars scenery or sounds Ml uE Ap C ee The San Jose Central Shady Grove amp Shenill The St Paul Central A chooser has three panels a tree control left a list box center and a preview window right In general what you do is click a folder in the tree to see its contents in the list click an Item in the list to see its preview then double click to open tt Each chooser has two tabs one for local content on your disk the other for content available by download from the web As long as you have an internet connection when you Select an item from the web tab it downloads and becomes part of your local content How choosers work has evolved over time Many changes to the content and operation were made in Version 3 3 1 The description below describes the current system with notes indicating how it differs from ear
248. nd presents you with a complete layout ready to add trains and run Tour of the Module Manager The Module Manager is a resizable dialog with several components as shown in this annotated screen shot amp Module Manager corner module Straight modules front track m selected module i N No Name Size N _ Branch Filename ____ p Module NTrak 6 foot 2 2X6 NT6 2 rrw a i ionii NTrak 4 foot 1 2x4 NT Lirrw Nirak 4 foot corner 4X4 4ft Corner rrw Nirak 4 foot 2 2x4 NT 4 2 rrw remove selected module list move selected zoom controls advanced settings The upper half of the dialog is the workspace where modules are schematically displayed and manipulated The workspace starts out empty this example shows an assembly in progress with three straight modules and one corner module Modules are by default displayed as filled rectangles with numeric labels Corners are shown as squares with 45 degree cutoff lines suggesting the typical shape of an actual unit Along one edge of the each module is the front track a line approximating the route of the main track going around the assembly In a train show viewers stand on this side of the layout Beneath the workspace is the module list a list box showing the sequence of modules with their details Each row begins with a numb
249. ne you can click the Browse button to bring up a regular file dialog to choose a layout to be opened For another you can modify the contents of the tree by adding and populating your own folders For instructions see Adding Your Own Layouts below A folder is shown with a padlock if itis locked meaning it represents a folder on the disk and cannot be modified except by rearranging the files on the disk An unlocked folder is one you create by hand which you can populate with layouts from anywhere and organize as you wish Tree Contents Layouts Entire layouts folder from TrainP layer app data directory Recent Layouts recently opened Same as at bottom of File menu Downloads Downloaded layouts note 1 CD Layouts Layouts residing on CD note 2 lt user added folders gt Folders created manually or dragged in see Adding Your Own Layouts 1 The Downloads folder contains aliases to layouts recently downloaded There is no actual folder named Downloads on the disk 2 The CD Layouts folder appears in the tree if a you ran the installer from a TrainPlayer CD and chose to run the layouts from CD and b you have the CD currently mounted In this case the CD Layouts folder contains the entire set of layouts on the CD If you have been running an earlier version of TrainPlayer you may not see all your previous layouts in the tree Folders you previously added by hand or by drag and drop will need to be re added Tree Menu Fj R
250. ne GIF flagman GIF gi vegetation i warehouses 53 animations handecar GIF signal 1 GIF 4 I H i signal 1 GIF 2 Click to open the new animations folder If you don t see it try right clicking the Scenery folder and choosing Refresh 3 Press an image and drag onto the layout That s it it starts playing immediately To stop use the Scenery Edit tool right click and choose Stop Animation Confession most of the animations in our sample set came from the Microsoft Office Online clip art collection There do not appear to be restrictions on distributing these unless we missed some fine print Using Load Bitmap The alternative to loading an image from the chooser is to create the scenery object first and then attach the image The procedure is the same as when adding a non animated image as follows 1 Selectthe Rectangle tool on the scenery toolbar and drag to create a rectangle where you want the animated image By default this gets a beige background 2 Select the Scenery Edit tool green arrow right click the new rectangle and choose Load Bitmap You geta standard file dialog This is the same dialog you use for static background images Itis still used for that but now supports three more types of input a Browse to an anm file the program will create an animated image b Browse to a gif file the program will examine it and decide whether to create an animated or static image c Browse to the first o
251. ng something up This is especially true where curves are involved the program attempts to keep straight segments tangent to their curve arcs and this can restrict movement Undo Redo If you make a mistake the easiest and safest way to fix itis to immediately undo it To undo the latest drawing or editing operation 1 Choose Edit Undo lt or press Ctrl Z The last operation is undone and the layout reverts back to Its previous state The menu command includes the type of operation which will be undone e g Undo New Track 2 You can use the command repeatedly to undo earlier operations There is no limit on the number of undo s you can go all the way back to the blank screen or the file you Started with 3 If you change your mind use Edit Redo Ctrl Y to undo the last undo Undoable operations include deleting adding or moving track circles stations or turntables and changing most track properties Train moves are not undoable nor changes made in the Properties dialog Deleting objects You can delete a single object track segment circle or turntable by point and press as follows 1 Choose the Track tool or the Edit tool B 2 Position the cursor on the segment or object to be deleted so it highlights see A Ona circle or turntable point to a spot on the circumference of the circle 3 Press the Del key or right click and choose Delete Delete Track or Edit Cut from the context menu Note that context
252. ng the sort of the first one A second click on a sorted column sorts it in reverse order a third click removes it from the sort e To set up your own sort order add a column of your own and enter values by hand then sort on them To do this right click the grid and select Field Chooser Drag the field called Sort Order onto the grid header In this column you can type whatever strings you like and then sort on them In the Sort Order column duplicate values and blanks are allowed If you are entering numbers they will be sorted alphabetically meaning 11 will come before 9 so use zeros to pad values enter 09 instead of just 9 Values entered in the Sort Order column are attached to the cars in each row they are saved with the layout and they show up in both Switchlist and Cars grids Ops Window Context Menus Each ops window has a context menu which comes up when you right click anywhere in the grid What you see in this menu depends on what you clicked some commands apply to the entire grid some to the selected row some to the selected cell Below is the full list of commands available on all these menus Car Properties Zoom to Car Copy Select All Print Grid Field Chooser Group By Box Column Auto Resize Add New Add new empty row at bottom of grid 1 4 Duplicate Add duplicate of selected row 1 4 Delete Delete selected row 1 4 Copy Copy selected row s to clipboard 2 Select All Select all rows
253. nhancements as detailed in the Readme In 4 1 e Ties precise railroad ties laid for you automatically with a single click e Export image save your layout as a picture or merge scenery with background and reduce layout complexity e rack transforms flip or rotate track sections or entire yards e Animation add moving images which spring into action as the train rolls by e Car ID display improved mechanisms for turning car labels on and off e AnyRail improvements repaired turntables better conversion of flex track in imports from AnyR all In 4 0 Car Loads Industries Yards amp Interchanges Default Car Sets e Ops Generators e Ops Windows e Ops Setup Wizard e Waybills S witchlists Color Codes Changes in the manual for 4 0 e All new chapter on Ops includes pages on Waybills Switchlists Generators Ops Windows Ops Setup Wizard e New chapter Managing Cars includes older pages from trains chapter with reworked Car Collections and new car related features Car Loads Default Car Sets e New chapter Stations and Industries includes revised Stations page taken from scheduling chapter plus new sections for Industries Yards amp Interchanges Industry Browser pe pa en me cw rar YP SOIQIOOOOOO Ue d X ey 0 AK 0 ge Pel 4 b What s New Since Version 3 0 In 3 3 1 Transfer Tables create working transfer tables with optional scenic objects for pit or bridge Roadbed aut
254. nrotated object s rectangular bounds in units Size chosen from the drop down menu You can enter a new value in either box to change the dimensions of the object Location Units Rotation Hide track amp trains Coordinates of the upper left corner of the unrotated object relative to the upper left corner of the layout You can enter new values to change the object s position on the layout Units are as chosen from the drop down Specifies units of length for display and entry of size and location values Any choice you make here will apply in similar Units menus throughout the program Angle in degrees by which the object is rotated clockwise from normal Enter a new value to change the orientation or enter 0 to return the object to normal Specifies whether the object sits above or below track and trains Check this box if you want the object to appear on top so that track is obscured and trains disappear as they travel beneath as shown here Uncheck the box to have the scenery at ground level with track and trains passing above it Note if the object has a non zero transparency setting see Background Properties and this box is checked then the trains will disappear but the track will be partially visible Animated Scenery Animated images in TrainP layer are little movies you can place around your layout These can be made to play continuously or on demand or automatically whenever a train pa
255. ns There are several ways to add rolling stock to a layout 33 aya a oF Cut Car e Choose New Locomotive 1 ie _ Copy Car from the Train menu This creates anew je train consisting of a single steam locomotive and deposits it in an arbitrary location on the layout actually it goes Delete Car Uncouple on the first track laid when the layout e c m was drawn To move the new traintoa tj WL Add Car de ees different location you can drive itthere AF Train ABO road engine or use the Place Train Here command ga Ier Tender described below a ee SEPA EA etre Pullman a Add to Switchlist e Choose New Train from the foe s zoom To 1 Baggage Train menu This isthe same as New ame ee Locomotive except that the loco is ft p P Properties O ea h followed by a tender boxcar and EE fe STEN ae Gondola caboose Boxcar If you are going to create more than one Ba lt lt lt 2 a os ie a train ata time move each one away o E ll Ba Flatcar from its starting position before adding another Otherwise they will land on the same track and obscure each other y Other Caboose e Choose Add Car from the Train a je Ear menu or from the train car context menu you get when you ight c click a a car Shown at right Choose a car type from the submenu A car of the chosen type is added or inserted just behind the selected car If there is no sele
256. ns and Industries In TrainP layer as in your basement it s fun to watch a train run around a loop of track In the real world that s not what they do In that world a train moves from one place to another between cities industries yards freight houses and the places have names which show up on maps schedules and work orders Model railroads have place names too Linn Westcott s layouts are dotted with colorful names Port Stillwater Swampside Dead Horse Gulch At any given time a train is in near or en route to one of these places and its location is most conveniently reported by name In TrainP layer a named location is called a station Itis defined by a name one or more sections of track and a rectangular area With this information the program can detect when a train enters or leaves a Station and can use this to report to you about train locations With the introduction of ops stations take on more significance They not only have names they have functions reasons a train would stop there Some stations are industries where goods are shipped or received the definition of an industry includes lists of incoming and outgoing loads some are yards or interchanges where cars are collected or exchanged during operations You can create stations and industries on your layout as described in this chapter Or you can take one of a couple of shortcuts a let the program generate them for you automatically see Ops
257. nspect visually When you are working in a crowded area It s easy to forget a crossover or siding and it s not easy to tell you ve done it Here are two ways to check for missing track Mouse over With the Track tool Hor the Edit tool active when you move the cursor over a section of track it highlights in green and stands out against the background This makes it easy to tell where there is a background line with no track on it e Flash the background inthe picture at right there is a crossover missing can you spot it Try this use the View Background button Hl to turn the background on and off say once per second As it flashes on and off your eye can usually spot differences in the track patterns Test the layout e Throw the switches Ifyou can t geta switch to throw it probably means bad trackwork in the vicinity e Test the turntables Make sure rotation stops where it should e Drive a train The ultimate test of a layout is whether a train navigates it correctly Drive around and see Track Checker TrackLayer can help you find errors Use the command Tools gt Check Track This runs a Series of tests against the layout as listed in the table below Results are reported in the Track Check dialog If errors are found they are listed in an alert box as shown Each error is listed with an object type 3 letter code from the following table the object s number and the error text the corresponding track or jun
258. o check your work Test the switch by clicking the intersection point Add siding Drag a straight segment Swampscott Release at the point where the track bends as shown by the cursor position in this picture T ra i Oyrier Hey Pii y Test Complete the Siding Drag another segment starting where you released the lastone A green square highlight must be showing before you begin the dragas jp OS ee i shown above right ae 3 F HA yer Bay Release atthe point kA a VA ee 1 eat where the siding LS AN AY a intersects the loop fc T A SU i shown at right When you release this segment a second switch is created Loop branch and siding The track is complete Operational possibilities you can run around the loop or divert to Gills Landing or Swampscott Chop at tunnel entrances To have the train to hide as it goes through the tunnel under Telegraph Hill you need to isolate that portion of track and mark ithidden You can isolate a portion of track by chopping it where you want the ends using temporary straight segments Drag a segment from an arbitrary point and release at the upper tunnel entrance When you release a Switch is formed as shown at right Repeat with another segment at the lower entrance as shown in progress at right 1 T Pikki i 3 Chyrter Ary hi Wi f Haad IR ee Ebay Sa
259. o 100 ms After a successful load an alert informs you of the number of frames and the output anm filename if applicable Convert Animated _ am x A Loaded animated image with 4 frames Saved as C Users Jim AppData Roaming I rainPlayer Scenery animations aute anm Don t show me this again P If you create an anm file from a series of images and want it to appear in your Scenery Chooser copy the anm file and all the component image files to your Scenery animation folder Note that the chooser will display only the anm file not any of its components If you create an animation sequence and want to send it to us or to a friend zip the entire set of images along with the anm file and send the Zip If you have an animated gif and you want to modify it you will need to split it into separate frame files TrainP layer has the ability to do this in fact it does this job whenever you read in an animated gif the gif is split into frames which are saved in your Windows Temp directory You can capture these and use them to make your own animation sequence For details send e mail and request information Modular Railroading If you ve been to a train show and seen a miniature hundred car coal train winding along what appeared to be miles of track then no doubt you ve seen modular railroading in action It s a way of creating a huge layout in a short time often fora temporary display You get a bunch of railroaders to eac
260. o be used for the bridge In this example we are using bridge2 from the miscellaneous collection Size and rotate the bridge so italigns with the bridge track and is the same size as shown below Then position it right on top of the bridge track Display properties of the bridge object and note its name in this case Rectanglel2 Name Rectangle 12 FG Sze S x his Location 3 54 x 19 3 Units Layout inches Rotation 90 deqrees Hide track 4 trains ere 4 Select the transfer table and bring up its Properties dialog Transfer Table tab 5 In the Bridge Scenery drop down select the name of the bridge object Note this will not change the display in the properties dialog 6 Click OK and you are ready to go Double click to start up the table movement and the new fancy bridge will move along with the bridge track To edit a transfer table To move resize rotate or delete a transfer table use the Scenery Edit tool a You manipulate the transfer table by working with the pit as you would work with any other scenery object If you have a bridge scenery object it is not connected to the table and will not move or delete along with the table To manipulate both the bridge and the table as a single object group them using the scenery Group tool Scenery Toolkit The Scenery Toolkit in TrainP layer is the armchair railroader s equivalent of that big box in the basement full of minia
261. o cars it changes to an uncouple icon like this Click to uncouple at this position Note the checkbox Shift click between cars to uncouple in Preferences gt Operation determines whether uncoupling requires shift click instead of simple click If this box is checked the uncouple icon does not appear and uncoupling does not happen unless you are pressing the Shift key If the train is already moving you can drag by hand when you let go the train resumes its previous speed and direction What does not happen while dragging some actions which normally occur for a moving train do not apply when the train is being dragged by hand These include e Crashes and bounces The train just stops when it can t go any further e Jumps to linked layouts If you run the train onto a linked spur it stops e Acceleration deceleration The train moves at the speed you drag e Speed display on control panel or toolbar e Running sounds e Correct behavior on tunnel track f you attempt to drag the train onto a tunnel track invisible link to another location itcan be made to work but feels strange The trick is to watch when the car you are dragging enters the tunnel it jumps to the other end and takes the cursor with it at which point you may have to continue the drag in another direction Yard Mode Yard sessions are easy in TrainPlayer When you re operating in yard mode rotating the speed dial controls both the speed and the direct
262. o include the command s keyboard shortcut For example with this box checked the tooltip for File New becomes New Ctrl N Show shortcut keys Large Icons Check if you want larger icons on the toolbars Creating a Turntable Turntables are a little tricky to get right because the connecting tracks have to be laid precisely The program helps by snapping objects into position but can have trouble in crowded areas When you re working in an area with a turntable it works best to construct the turntable first before adding the surrounding track First zoom in so you have room to work and so junctions and tracks don t overlap There is a special tool for creating turntables It works just like the Circle Tool except that after you size and position the circle it automatically adds a bridge track and makes a working turntable Two tips about creating turntables 1 draw the circle first before adding the connecting tracks and 2 make sure either the circle or an end of the bridge track is highlighted when you start or end drawing a connecting track Ifthe track doesn t snap to have one endpoint exactly on the circle the turntable won t work If you encounter problems with turntables in published layouts see Repairing a broken turntable below To create a turntable 1 Choose the Turntable Tool amp or Tools gt Turntable from the menu 2 Draw the circle Pointto the center press and drag to the desired radius Press the s
263. ocks on car tops and stations See Color Codes Note Most ops commands will make modifications to your layout You might want to use File gt Save As to make a copy before you start using these commands Switchlists A switchlist s a set of instructions for moving cars Each instruction refers to a single car tells where it is to go and what load to carry if any The full set of instructions might be called your day s work once you ve delivered all the cars as instructed you can toss the switchlist and go home You ll get a new one tomorrow The core function of TrainPlayer Ops is to generate random switchlists for you to execute This brings together all the various ops components industries car loads yards interchanges waybills and stirs them together to come up with a purposeful day s work Switchlist Windows A switchlist is presented to you in two ways as a grid of data in the Switchlist Window and as a paragraph of text in the Schedule Window This example shows both Switchlist Class To At Load Shipper Receiver Hatcar Ingersoll Machine Empty Manufacturing Plant Foundry Offline Gondola Ingersoll Machine Empty Manufacturing Plant Foundry Offline Gondola Ingersoll Machine npt Manufacturing Plant Foundry XA Eoxcar Hamilton Yard Empty Ofline Tool and Die Cars Switchlist Schedule Engine none Yard Hamilton Yard lz none Send Gondolsa GAY empty from track 443 to Inge
264. of cars can carry the load Local Web i Loads ha i coal gravel ore scrap i owai i Res ee fw miscellaneous logs load for class F G Drag load onto a highlighted car on the layout Cti drag to load cut a Note the behavior of the Load Chooser changed at version 5 2 The following instructions have been revised To operate Browse the collection click a folder in the tree to see its contents Selecta load by clicking its image in the middle panel Note the indication on the status bar at lower left it shows the types of car by AAR code which are suitable for carrying the selected load Press on the load image and drag the load onto the layout As you move over a suitable car itis highlighted with a red outline meaning that the load can be deposited there Release the mouse button over the car you want to load Hold the Ctrl key down while you drag if you wish to load more than one car ata time When Ctrl is down an entire cut of cars is highlighted at once and can be loaded with the dragged load Cutmeans a connected group of cars of the same class To modify a load or see its properties right click the load icon in the middle window and choose Properties You get the Load Collection Editor Closed car loads One special load folder works differently closed car loads These are loads without pictures for loading on boxcars refrigerated cars covered hoppers and othe
265. of each of the twelve Pullman Standard types and may contain other types too The current version comes with Reefer three default sets ET O coca l l Tankcar e Steam 1930 s era equipment with steam locomotives shown in the dialog below Tender e Modern 1990 s era equipment with diesels Coach Box5s0 Stock 50 ft dbl dr box 40 ft wood box Classic the T TrainP layer cartoon set Log car More default sets are available for download in your Web Car Chooser get any set Piggyback flat from the Defaults folder and it becomes one of your default sets There is a nice set Car transporter of Lionel cars and a recent G amp D set from J ohn Allen s legendary Gorre amp Daphetid Drop center flat Heavy duty drop center flat Fishbelly flat 50 ft bulkhead flat The first twelve cars in a default set can be accessed from the car toolbar In some cases the pictures on the buttons do not quite match what you get for example the Modern set has no need of a tender so that button gets you a diesel switcher instead Cars beyond the first twelve are available on the Add Car menu shown at right or from the Car Chooser The default sets show up in a new Defaults folder in the car chooser To avoid confusion the chooser hides any collection called Default which is from earlier versions it remains on your disk but is no longer used Default Car Sets In Action 1 Open a random layout say from 107 Track Pl
266. of your schedule If the clock is visible when you open a layout then it will start automatically as soon as any train moves To operate the clock 1 To show or hide the clock use Tools Clock Ifit IS visible when you exit the program it will come up again when you restart 2 To Start the clock right click in the clock window and choose Start from the context menu The clock hand advances about once every scale minute Skart St 3 To stop the clock right click and choose Stop Reset Settings 4 To reset the clock back to its default starting time click Reset 5 To modify the starting time or clock speed click Settings This brings up the Clock Settings dialog Schedule Window Together the station definitions and the clock give the program enough information to keep track of train arrivals and departures The Schedule Window reports and collects this data It works automatically all you have to do is display the window and then Start driving Once you have driven your route successfully the Schedule Window contains a schedule you can print out and hang on the wall for a future operating session The Schedule Window also serves as the output window when running scripts When a Script is running it can report its activities in this window By default the window comes up automatically as soon as you Start playing a Script The Schedule Window also serves as the place where text switchlist instructions
267. oggle id s for an entire train right click any car of the train and choose Train gt Show Car IDs This changes to Train gt Hide Car IDs if any car in the train is displaying an id To turn all car id s on or off master switch 1 Choose View gt Car IDs from the main menu This is a toggle If some id s are already showing choose this command to turn them off Choose it again to turn them back on This item is checkmarked on the menu so you can tell if the switch is on or off If you have not yet turned on id s for any cars or trains then as a convenience View gt Car IDs turns them on for all cars on the layout Car Collection Editors The Car Collection Editor is for viewing and editing properties of car types within a collection Also described on this page are the related dialogs Load Collection Editor and AAR Car Types To bring up the Car Collection Editor a click the Collection button in Car Properties or b in the Car Chooser right click a collection in the tree and choose Properties This dialog has three tabs One has properties for the overall collection where the others refer to a specific car type within it Car Type Tab This tab is for viewing and editing a single car type Ithas VCR style back forward buttons to let you move to other types in the collection The current type is the one on display in this tab Car Type Images Collection onda AAR G Gondola class Gondola Layout inches l
268. ol panel is locked and unmoveable To lock choose Lock in position from the context menu To unlock use the same menu command or simply click on the lock icon e Yard mode enabled icon appears when Yard Mode Is enabled To enable or disable Yard mode see above You can also disable yard mode by clicking the Y icon The TrainP layer control panel was custom designed by Rick Fernandez of creativeblox Moving Trains By Hand In the real world the only way to move a train is to attach an engine and give it power For years this has also been true in TrainP layer Not any more You can now reach across the track with a non prototypical railroader s fingertip and move the train along the tracks Just as you would on a real layout if you needed to relocate some cars or your engine had Stalled To move a train by hand position the cursor over the car you want to drag The cursor changes to a hand oai YJ Press and drag in either direction and the train follows You will get the hang of this in about five seconds Train dragging works no matter what tool you are using Track Edit Run etc If you have Auto F ollow enabled To throw a switch while dragging press the space bar This throws the next Switch coming up in the direction the train is moving The train must be moving for this to work To couple while dragging bump the train you are dragging into another one and they couple To uncouple position the cursor between tw
269. olling stock you ve accumulated over time Interchanges An interchange is a length of track where cars are exchanged with another railroad If a model railroad covers some region then the interchange Is the place where that region connects by rail with the outside world Itis usually a length of track sufficient to hold several cars ending in a stub often near the outer edge of the layout The interchange is an important component in ops When an industry on the layout ships out goods they are usually destined for some market out beyond the layout area otherwise they would be shipped by truck Your job as the operator of the local railroad is to set them out on the interchange where someone else s long distance hauler will pick them up and get them to market On a model railroad there is probably no other railroad it s likely nobody is actually going to come by and pick up the cars you set out and the interchange is basically symbolic Put cars there and your job is done Come back the next day and find returned empties or incoming loads to be delivered locally What happens in between Is up to your imagination Yard Style Stations Both yards and interchanges are examples of a new type of station called yard style Yard style stations differ from normal stations in both the method of creation and the behavior of arrivals and departures A normal station is created by dragging a rectangle over one or more sections of track The r
270. om the 101 Track Plans some from the Bruno collection some from a folder you downloaded from a forum One way to do this would be to create a new folder on your disk and copy the files into it a process which requires time expertise and disk space An easier and more economical way is to leave the files where they are and create a folder in the chooser tree containing shortcuts pointing to them A very convenient way to do this is to drag files or folders into the chooser tree from Windows Explorer There are restrictions on what you can do in the chooser tree The main one is that you cannot modify a locked folder you can t add a folder or file to one of these or rearrange subfolders in it or rename it otherwise it would no longer match what s on the disk In a typical situation there is only one unlocked folder in the tree the Layouts folder at the top so this is the starting place for adding your own content To create a folder 1 Right click a folder in the tree and choose New Folder below left This command is dimmed in most places but always available on the Layouts folder at the top 2 The folder is created at the bottom of the tree and called New Folder with the name selected Type the name you want for the folder below right E Layouts GHG Layouts E aa Layout F Layouts101 W L core Premium S Fj Refresh m Standard me Find Find Next To create a subfolder repeat the process sta
271. omatically add scenic roadbed fitted around track in your choice of styles AAR Codes official codes for car types allowing detailed car classification Chooser Changes improvements and simplifications in all choosers What s New Folder special folders show recent content in the web collections Open Data Folder opens your TrainP layer application data folder in Windows Explorer In 3 3 e Scenery TrackLayer 3 3 introduces the ability to create your own scenery In 3 2 e Import from CAD TrackLayer 3 2 introduces the ability to automatically convert plans from three track CAD programs AnyRail WinRail and Atlas Right Track Starting with a layout developed in one of these programs all it takes is a few clicks and you re ready to add trains and go e Layout sizing TrackLayer 3 2 has a simple new tool for resizing your layout and rescaling the track You can now easily make adjustments if the track doesn t fit the background or if you want to add roadbed or staging space outside the background boundaries e Choice of running sounds New in TrainPlayer a choice of train running sounds including speed dependent sounds for both steam and diesel engines You can assign different running sounds formerly called chuffs to different engines if you have sounds of your own copy the files into the right folder and they will show up on the menu In 3 1 e Choosers A single style of dialog now takes the place of three previou
272. ometimes it s a little trickier The legend for oa Springfield Electric Lines plan 70 says the ruled lines are double spaced 12 for N 24 for HO etc in which case the TrackLayer grid has to be 12 xf UTE Le For the complete list of the modelling scales and grid separations built into TrackLayer see About Sizes and Scales You can do some interesting experiments with the grid For example suppose you wanted to build the Gorre amp Daphetid plan 17 in half the space Double the grid spacing and here s what it would look like Good luck navigating those curves Adjusting the Grid There are a few things you need to know before working with the grid Grid must be on display Use View Grid H Edit Tool l must be active You cannot drag the grid with any other tool Red lines are anchors One particular horizontal and one vertical are special and colored in red When you drag to adjust the grid dimensions these lines stay put You don t usually see these red lines when you open a layout they re often along the left and top edges just out of sight Drag by corner is different from drag by line Ifyou press and begin dragging at the intersection of two lines then the grid stays square and resizes as you drag If you press at some other point on a vertical or horizontal line the grid does not stay square you resize either the horizontal or the vertical Spacing Drag resizes shift drag moves Press and dr
273. ommand doesn t start while the train is still decelerating Has no effect if train is already ata stop ON COUPLE waits until the current train couples with another The script is then operating the enlarged train ON THROW is a way to coordinate activites of two scripts One can be waiting for a throw of some arbitrary switch and the other can throw it when the time comes ON TABLESTOP waits until a rotating turntable stops You do not specify a turntable number so only one can be rotating at a time This condition usually follows a rotate command ON KEY pauses until the user presses any key This should be preceded by an echo command Indicating that the script is waiting for a key otherwise the user will wonder why the script it stalled In most commands and conditions a junction number may be preceded by J for readability The exception is in a tj d position indicator TJ D indicates an exact position on the layout T is the number of a track section a junction at one or the other end of T and D a distance in percent of the length of T An optional r after D can be used to indicate which direction the train should be headed at this position used when repositioning a train ina Go To Command action For example if the junctions at the end of track 6 are numbers 10 and 12 then 6 10 40 is a point 40 of the way along the track starting at the 10 end Expression must be enclosed in parentheses Values may be separated by space or comma
274. on 6 If you want to send the collection to another user zip the files in the output folder Include the xml file plus the folder of image files which has the same name as the xml file Dialog controls Name of the collection This can be any name you like Name Changing the name here will affect only the published collection not the original Description and author If this box is blank please provide Comments some Information to be included in the published version Full pathname of original collection xml file This file is not input file modified by the publish operation Destination for the published collection The xml file will Output folder go in this folder along with a subfolder containing the image files To select a new output folder use the Browse button Name to be given to the published xml file This is usually Output file the collection name plus xml extension Use caution when changing this name you may break existing layouts Notes Errors encountered while processing if any Click to carry out the publish operation A confirmation message Is displayed on completion Publish Note no warning is given if the output collection already exists it will be overwritten Cancel Click to abort without publishing For more information see Car Collections Cars Window The Cars Windows shows the full inventory of cars on the layout Each row shows one car with its ID picture class load locatio
275. on as l you draw the first leg to that circle it will automatically form a curve ae with that track end TSS In the picture at right when you draw the tangent segment at the top green the curve will automatically connect to the track end at A whether you meantit to or not oe If this happens Undo and try a different approach draw the other A leg first or temporarily move the offending track end away from the circle e Watch the highlights Ifthe curve doesn t form automatically after you release the second leg it probably means you didn t get one leg close enough to the circle Be sure the circle is highlighted when you start or end drawing the leg segment Editing a Curve Editing curved track is like editing straight except a little trickier When you move a curve or a Straight track tangent to a curve the program adjusts connections points as you drag so as to maintain tangency Ifa curve is tied into a network of straight sections this can cause quite a bit of movement and if you attempt to move a curve too far track can become tangled To move a curve 1 Choose the Edit tool be 2 Click to select the curve to be moved shown at left The curve turns blue 3 Press and drag carefully As you drag attached straight sections and curves on the far ends of those are automatically adjusted See above center If you drag too far some curves may not be able to stay tangent and you can end
276. on is closest Managing Cars Railroads need cars to carry goods and passengers The typical model railroad has cars of various types sitting around on the track a bunch more in a cabinet on the wall and probably a few more still in their boxes waiting to be painted In TrainP layer there are no cars waiting to be painted and that cabinet is huge There are thousands of car types to choose from and an infinite supply of each when you pull one down from the cabinet another appears in Its place All Kinds of cars are available diesel locomotives steam engines freight cars passenger cars Snowplows in a large variety of colors and styles Cars are organized in car collections groups of cars related by style or road name like individual shelves in the cabinet Several car collections are provided with the program many more are available by download If you don t find what you need and you have some artistic ability you can create your own or you can ask one of the friendly guys on the forum to make a custom set of cars for you With the introduction of Ops freight cars have become more capable They can carry loads Each car is assigned a detailed classification which determines what sorts of load it can carry which in turn determines what sorts of industry itcan serve The loads themselves are objects much like cars organized in downloadable collections About Cars Car Collections Default Car Sets Car Loads Car P
277. one edge of the station s rectangle so it highlights then press the Del Key To define a sound at a station Right click the station and choose Station Properties Click the browser button and you are presented with the Sound Chooser dialog Choose a sound from the list Click the preview window to hear the sound If you like it click OK and it will become the station sound played once whenever a train arrives at the station Industries Industries give your railroad a purpose By defining industries in conjunction with the load system you specify what sorts of goods are to be transported from where to where and by what means About Industries An industry in TrainP layer is defined as a place where goods are exchanged where cars are loaded and or unloaded Industry properties include a name a location and two lists of load types incoming and outgoing The loads define what car types are required to haul them Industries are different from other TrainP layer objects they do not have icons and are not selected from a chooser or downloaded from the web We do provide a list you can choose from but it is mainly designed to give you ideas and templates you can modify Mostindustries are created by you for your railroad to suit your needs and designs The location of an industry is specified by attaching it to a station a named area on the track A single industry can span several Stations each with its own list of incom
278. onnecting track then itstops A train can then be driven onto the turntable from that connector or off it Rotate Right Rotate Left Each time you rotate the turntable it moves to the next connecting track it encounters in the direction of rotation B Turntables are tricky to get right If you rotate one and find it doesn t stop where it should or stops twice at the same connector it means the track isn t laid just where it should be Please report any problems you find with turntables on the published plans You do not have to rotate through each stop You can double click any connecting track and the turntable will rotate directly to that stop by the shortest route double click on rim rotates to next stop same direction as last rotation double click on junction rotates to there via shortest route al aig ft fe eet z l aii T if Hpee i ot Pa Pi F Ways to operate a turntable e Right click anywhere on the rim of the table or the center point if not occupied by a car and choose the direction of rotation from the context menu The table rotates in the indicated direction to the next stop e Double click the rim or center The table rotates to the next stop going in the same direction as any previous rotation counter clockwise the first time e Double click a junction where a connecting track touches the rim The table rotates to align with the indicated connector rotating in whichever directi
279. operations or toggle switches In an ergonomic way all drawing tools can also be used to edit objects Images Any fillable scenery object can contain an image taken from a graphics file All standard formats are nored omp jog gif png etc Images may have regions of transparency and thus appear as irregular shapes A collection of assorted scenery images Is provided with the installer more are available by download from the web or you can use Images from graphics files on your disk Images may be stretched and reshaped or prevented from doing so Background texture images can be tiled or stretched to fill large objects Layers All scenery objects are in one of two layers foreground or background While any type of object can be drawn in either layer the idea is to have large ground covering objects or bench work shapes in the background with buildings trees and smaller objects in the foreground The layers are drawn and edited independently so that you can draw and manipulate foreground objects without accidentally modifying the background underneath Ties and Roadbed Ties and roadbed are special types of scenery object You don t draw them by hand you select some track and let the program build them see Ties Roadbed Once built they can be edited like other scenery objects There are a lot of them each tie is its own object and so Is each Small section of roadbed so you have to zoom in close to work
280. or changes to a two headed arrow and drag The side or corner will move relative to the rest of the object Note this does not work if you are pointing to the upper right corner that one does rotation described below Note that the Orientation of the two headed cursor may not be correct if the object has been rotated e To resize multiple objects if you want to change the size or shape of several objects at once you must first group them as described below Rotating D If an object is selected lt gt ae mt e To rotate the selected object point to the upper right gt be corner of the object cursor changes to a circle and drag The object will j rotate around its center Obviously once the object has been rotated these instructions may not be strictly correct because the draggable corner may no longer be in the upper right e To rotate several objects the way to rotate more than one object at a time is to group them as described below A grouped object can be rotated the same way as any other single object The picture above shows rotating a grouped object An alternative way of rotating an object is to type an angle into the properties dialog see Editing Properties Grouping and Ungrouping Some operations such as moving or setting properties work on several selected objects atonce Other operations such as resizing or rotating work only on a single object Grouping is a way of turning several objects into a single on
281. orted image The default choice middle of the slider is the current size of the background image if any if there is no background the choice is based on the size of the layout Move to the right to generate a larger file with higher resolution left for a smaller file You may need to experiment for best results If you are not merging scenery there is no reason to export a file larger than the current background if you export ties and roadbed you will want a larger file for a sharper image However choose too large and you may exceed memory capacity so you will be alerted and required to choose a smaller size Choose features to be displayed in the image file Settings for Export Image mode Tracks M Background Trains lv Scenery r m Ea naar Sage r a BS a nt ie ces ae IFF z i Pi aa r aa F 1 ea Poti a a Adjust image output quality Curent background 1133 909 Grd Iw Switch lights T Rails Stations im pee 5 ri Ly Ik a Hre Nese 10 derail Higher quality larger file gt Finish Screen Finished with the l TrainPlayer Image Expor Wizard Concludes the wizard and carries out the export Your choices are shown Checkboxes allow additional input 2 te ee Ready to create image file Show picture after export Export Image mode only launch the new FIE 3 u Fak Mode Export Image image in your default image viewing program A FA
282. ose these additions Creating Your Own Scenery Objects If you have an artistic bent and a working Knowledge of Microsoft P aint or other image editing software you can create you own scenery objects to add to your layouts Let s say you want to add a little country church to a rural section of your layout Here s how 1 Draw the picture You will need a top view of the church It does not need to be any particular size but should not be too big not more than about an inch square For example 2 Indicate the background f the image has a non rectangular shape as this one does then you will have areas of background which you want to be invisible when the image is placed on the layout Fill these with a uniform color It can be any color which is not contained in the image itself The program recognizes the background mask color by looking at the pixel in the upper left whatever color it finds in this pixel is taken as the masking color and is erased from the drawing 3 Crop Make the image as small as possible but be careful Remember to leave at least 1 pixel of background at the upper left 4 Save to file In principle you can save in any graphics format and any location but in practice it is best to save as a full color 24 bit bmp file to a location already known to the program The easiest thing to do is to save the file to one of the folders which already exist in your scenery collection Here we are saving to the M
283. our model in the basement you can take a break from building and run trains any time e Let us do it We accept user submitted track plans and prepare them for TrainPlayer and with your permission post the results on our website for public download There are some fine user submitted plans available now and more coming all the time For information about converting and posting your layout ask by e mail Where to Go for Help We re committed to delivering a quality product which runs on your machine and doesn t crash unless you want itto If you have trouble with the program the installation or the layouts here are some places to look for help e Help menu The Help menu in the program has links to built in online help to web pages and other sources Try the online help which includes index and full text search e Readme The Readme file installed in your TrainP layer directory has up to date details about known problems tips version history and other information You can view the file from the Start menu under TrainP layer e Web The Support page on our website has a list of resource and Frequently Asked Questions which cover many common problems e User groups and forums There is a friendly open and well attended TrainP layer Forum on Yahoo Groups where you can contact us or our users If you have a problem try posting a question J oining the forum is simple and free e Send e mail Lines are open support train
284. out Printing In TrainPlayer you can print your layout as it looks on the screen with switch lights with or without trains background track or grid The printout reflects the current settings on the View menu Use Print Setup Print Preview or Print commands on the File menu the same way you do with most Windows programs TrackLayer Pittsbureh Midvale amp Ironton RR i Eile Edit wiew Tools Train Recording Window Help C O new cN Eph n 4 QE 24m mmn nn a I _ Ga Open Ctr o SSS Ss S Open Layout SEoncea ne ti Freight ha 4 Close i i Pat mi e as a Page Zoomin oom Wt Close Save as ca Properties Preferences Print Setup Ei Print Preview E Prine Li r ja ae i Pin oe i l ates T g a ote cee oun TOWN i F b l ko au at 1 C Program Filesi ALIO re EF Z M a N Tah 2 C Program Files LZZ rra 3 CiProgram Filesi L355 rrm 4 C Program Filesi Le5 rrvy 5 Railroadd rr 6 Ci 1Program Files L634 rrm z C Program Filesi LS rra 6 ERR AW supertrain rr Exit The image is always scaled to fit the page For most images landscape orientation works best choose in Print Setup There is currently no way to scale up to print to multiple pages Exporting Images Export Image was introduced several versions ago as a way of creating a Snapshot of your layout in a graphics file In 4 1 the feature has been improved in
285. pear Working with the Poly line Tool When you have completed your first outline of the river above you may want to smooth out some of the edges along the river banks Double click with the left mouse button and it will activate the poly line control points gt Use your cursor to drag the control point in any direction to widen or narrow the river You will see the change immediately and can choose the Edit Undo if you do not like the result Hint When working with an existing plan you can use Grass in the Foreground and use the control points on the poly line tool to have the grass wrap around a building or another land feature J ust Add Water oo As we did earlier either use the Scenery N EE and in the Background folder left mouse click on water_01 and drag itto the shaded area on your background Alternatively use a Right mouse click inside the shaded area for the river This action brings up the submenu from which you will select Insert Bitmap From your Scenery file directory go to the background folder and select water_01 and itis immediately added to your drawing Hint A good habit to get into is to Save your work often in case something unexpected happens and it will Grab a control point to re shape the river bank to your liking Background is Done This is a partial view of what your background now looks like At this point you can continue to add backgrounds e
286. ped by boxcar code X from the industry Tool and Die Maker located at GSW Inc to a destination called Offline This means the ultimate destination of the load Is some receiver out beyond the boundaries of the layout the load is to be delivered to the interchange where it will be picked up and taken away by another possibly imaginary rail line In TrainP layer Ops either the shipper or receiver is an industry and the other Is always offline This follows prototype practice In an area the size of a model railroad it would be unusual to pick up a load at a shipper and deliver it to a receiver in the same area Ops is based on the more realistic scenario of loads entering and leaving the layout at designated interchanges Waybill Cycles To the customer the waybill represents a single job to be done to the railroad itis a series of moves which we call a waybill cycle A typical one goes like this The railroad finds a car of the appropriate type to haul the specified load This car is sitting in some yard Y The car is taken empty from Y to the shipper industry S It is loaded with goods It is then taken to the interchange track R where itis to be picked up and taken to a remote destination There it is unloaded then brought back empty to the interchange The empty car is returned to Y ready for the next cycle This example might be represented by a schematic Y amp 2 a showing the three separate car moves required
287. pened This brings the alert back if you chose do not show again at some point in the past e Echo script comments in schedule window display in the schedule window all commented lines as the scriptruns This option can also be changed by right clicking in the schedule window and choosing show script e Use autopause in all playback act as if autopause 2 has been inserted at the top of every script generating 2 second pauses at stops reverses etc Notes 1 A Situation file saves not only train positions but also train and car properties If you change a property of a car or train say its name or label then restore a previously saved situation file your changes will be lost 2 What the Save Script button does is take the current set of scripts and implant them into the layout file replacing the previous set of scripts while leaving track train and other data intact This is useful during script development when you want to save your text edits often but not keep overwriting the layout file with trains in random positions Script Command Reference The TrainP layer Script Language is designed for simplicity and readability It consists of just a small vocabulary of commands and conditions but also allows access to any item on any menu An instruction consists of one or two clauses wait condition command where a wait condition pauses script operation for a certain period of time or until a given event o
288. ping the end onto the highlighted junction at the end of the bridge track as shown here In this case itis up to you to make the track perpendicular to the pit When i you drop the end onto a junction instead of on the pit edge It will not snap You may have to adjust the far end until all three tracks are aligned Test Put an engine on one of the track sections and verify that you can drive it all the way across To decorate a transfer table x You can change the appearance of a transfer table in several ways e Change the pit color or background Right click the table and choose Properties to see the Scenery Properties dialog You can set the background color or image in this dialog as described In the Scenery chapter e Modify transfer table properties In the Properties dialog when you are editing a transfer table there Is a Special tab for this purpose as Shown at right In this tab you can set o Number of guide rails Set o The name of a scenery For example at left the pit has the ground concrete 01 image from the background collection a iiil to zero to remove rails Whether or not to display the bridge track Normally you turn this off when you have a bridge scenery object Width of the bridge Units are those in use throughout the program object to be used as the bridge See below for details e Adda bridge scenery object Here s how 1 2 Choose or draw the object t
289. place wide across the bottom of the screen For example Switchlist Color Instructions ar To At From Set out Boxcar XM4H empty from Cero yard at Interchange M43 Interchange Empt Cero yard Retum Tankear T477 empty from track 227 to Cero yard ET Cero yard np track 227 Set out Hopper H706 coal from Telluride Coal at Interchange i Interchange Telluride Coal Set out Tankcar TA438 empty from Cero yard at Interchange Aa Interchange np Cero yard Send Hopper H707 empty from Tellunde Coal to Orphir Mine 1D Orphir Mine Empty Telluride Coal Cars Switchlist Editing a Switchlist Switchlists are generated automatically and are not designed to be permanent Nevertheless they are editable so if you like you can create one by hand or modify a generated one The switchlist is saved with the layout so it will be permanent until you generate a new one The first step in creating or editing is to right click the switchlist window and choose Grid Editable Without this the grid is read only and cannot be modified Once this is done then you can edit in various ways e Click a text cell to select it In some cases you can then type a new value in others a drop down list appears so you can make a choice You may have to resize a narrow column to make room for the large drop down arrow Note that not all items are editable for example you can specify a car by setting its ID in a cell but you cannot specify a location as that is a p
290. player com e Send U S Mail The address is on the Contact page of the website e By phone Send e mail to arrange a phone call e If you find a bug in the program or the layouts send e mail with the details and we ll try to fix itin an upcoming version The e mail should include the program version and operating system you are using and a layout rrw file if necessary to reproduce the problem e Please do not contact Kalmbach with any TrainPlayer questions Getting Started By now you have installed the program and figured out how to start it It s time to open a layout and take a look around Trains will be covered in the following chapters About Files Opening a Layout Tour of the Screen Layout Properties About Sizes and Scales Adjusting the View Layout Printing What s Next Touch the speed dial on the control panel and the train will start to move See the next chapter for instructions on how to drive tt About Files TrainP layer has a lot of mechanism for dealing with files because it has a lot of files to deal with A fully equipped TrainP layer site has thousands of files including layouts layout backgrounds car collections scenery objects and sounds Typically the installer brings you only a small set of files Most of the content you use comes by download from the web and accumulates over time To help you manage this content both local and web the program has special dialogs called choosers
291. pts we suggest that you start out with a rough idea of what you want your finished layout to look like Do you want a lot of scenery or do you prefer bustling industries This planning stage will help you decide what key design elements you want and where you would like to place them on your layout But remember the first goal of model railroading and virtual railroading is to have FUN New Layout Size Open to blank screen Scale Hc Cancel it Use File New to open a new layout file Dimensions Height 4600 Width 9600 For this tutorial select HO 4x8 The image opens the grid appears in a default position A Quick Note about Foreground and chk m e A aa a ry Background layers k Oo B A 4a 4a Fi 5 You should always plan on working the Background layer first and try to make it as complete as possible Foreground active image is visible Then start to work on the Foreground layer by adding buildings industries etc Background is active and image has been suppressed When you shift back to the Background layer after working in the Foreground all of your images will disappear Don t panic they have just been temporarily suppressed to allow you to see the zur Background layer more clearly fip e a heated eed tal Create your Background From your Scenery toolbar make sure you are in Background mode and that you have selected the Rectangle drawing tool as shown
292. r closed cars When you select this folder the center panel changes to list view and shows you a lengthy collection of load names alloys alloys load for class X XMR Drag load onto a highlighted car on the layout In this case the preview window shows the load as text which will be displayed above side views of the car and as a pattern which will be overlaid onto the car top image By default all closed car loads are shown as a pair of double red bars but you can change this right click the load choose Properties go to the Images tab click Browse Missing Car Scenery Alert To report and optionally download missing cars and scenery Comes up automatically if you open a layout which references data not found in your local collection qa x Com i a This layout requires car or scenery types not found in your chooser Collection not found Colorado Scenery image not found uk specfic coal staithes1 bmp Scenery image not found uk specficlrailway sleepers bmp Proceed using standard cars and scenery Cancel opening the layout Get collections from web Permanenty change cars to standard on next save When you open a layout it attempts to retrieve the required cars and scenery from your local data folder If it fails to find some of them you see this alert with a list of the missing items in the window To proceed you have four choices Click one Dialog controls Open the layout without the missing items Car
293. r example in this illustration uncoupling will occur between boxcar and tanker E Ss To ra ara ee j F Eee ee PE a a he a eee i M aP h we L ee l lt E hE G SE 2 ee ee ee es E coerce om mee ee eee Another way to specify the uncoupling point is to select a car by clicking on It The uncoupling pin goes behind the selected car unless itis the last car in which case the pin goes ahead of it 2 Choose the Uncouple command in one of these ways a by pressing Ctrl U b by clicking the Uncouple button JF on the Control Panel or Train Toolbar c by choosing Train gt Uncouple from the main menu or d by choosing Uncouple from the car context menu When the train uncouples you are left driving only part of it The uncoupled portion becomes a new train no longer connected to your engine The following illustration shows the result of the uncouple operation begun above To uncouple by click You can uncouple two cars by holding down the shift key and clicking in the space between the cars When the cursor changes to a four headed arrow click to uncouple the cars The Run tool must be active for this to work By default uncoupling requires shift click holding down Shift as you click If you prefer you can change this so all it takes is a click see Operation Preferences To couple 1 Slow down and move toward the cars to be coupled For example if the situation is as shown in the above diagram clic
294. r layout ready to run There is a whole new chapter of the manual on the subject see Modular Railroading See also What s New Since 4 0 What s New Since 3 0 What For Q Is there any point to moving little make believe trains around an image of a model pretending to be a railroad A Sure e Explore layout designs When you re thinking about designing a railroad there is nothing handier than a book of track plans Well designed plans give you ideas about how different track configurations might work with your theme and fit in the space you have Attractive artwork inspires you to think about the terrain and the scenery TrainPlayer brings you some of the world s finest track plans to browse appreciate and try e Develop operating plans Ifyou had an operating railroad and an unlimited supply of rolling stock how would you go about running it You need to figure out how to deliver goods and passengers for your customers what cars you need to run on what schedule how to avoid delaying the express while the local is tying up the main line With TrainP layer you can develop timetables and schedules by driving the layout and letting the program keep track of times and distances e Test your equipment Do you already have a collection of cars Customize the ones in the program so they match yours and see if your 86 foot flatcars look realistic going around the 16 inch curves on your target plan e Learn train moves t isn t obvio
295. rack or Edit tool 2 Right click a track section and choose from the Track Color menu e Normal track will be colored the default color as specified in Track Preferences e Change brings up a color chooser so you can choose a different color for the selected track To change a track from one non default color to another you must first go back to Normal then Change To color multiple track sections The above instructions apply to all selected track so you can color many tracks at once select them drag a selection rectangle or shift click individual sections then right click any one and choose color as above An alternative is to choose a color to be applied to new track only using the For new track button in Track Preferences Any track you draw from that point on will be in the specified color This would be useful for example if you drew the standard gauge line of your layout first then changed colors before drawing the narrow gauge part Editing Track If you ve drawn some track and want to make changes there are several choices You can correct a mistake by undoing it You can delete a single track object track segment curve circle turntable by point and press or you can select several and delete them all atonce You can move or resize track objects or copy them from one place and paste them into another Once a network of track is laid and interconnected it s a little tricky to move it around without fouli
296. ragging to create a new object you are prompted to enter the text string Note that the overall size of the object is the rectangle you define by drawing itis not automatically adjusted to fit the text e The Bitmap tool creates a rectangle object with no border line filled with a given image marked as stretch with distortion On dragging to create a new object you are presented with a dialog for selecting an image file The image fills the space you define by drawing e The Scenery Chooser allows you to drag in pre defined objects These are rectangle objects with image fill marked as stretch without distortion The object size is automatically adjusted to fit the image Text Labelling When you have completed placing scenery around your layout you may want to go back and add place names track directions or even building names to your layout For individual objects you can add a text label via the Text tab of Scenery Properties For other situations you may want a text box separate from any specific object For example To create a label select the Text tool AA Press and drag a box in the area where you want to place your text When you release the button a prompt dialog appears Scenery Object Text Ed Enter teskt E Cancel Enter the text and click OK The label appears on the layout Click on the text to select the object so you can reposition rotate or adjust properties of the label Note that the font size
297. rains pass the portion within each clip box is completely hidden Over underpass regions where trains going underneath are to hide trains on top to remain visible For this effect first draw a clipping box as above defining the hidden region Then identify the track s to be on top where trains are to remain visible To do this introduce a junction where any top track crosses the clip box boundary Best procedure is a mark the tunnel track as Untouchable b draw a temporary segment to the point where you want the junction c delete the segment This Junction serves no purpose except to flag a track as being on top All other track electrically connected to the junction is also on top e Trains passing on top tracks remain visible while those on non top tracks are clipped Linked Layouts Special new track lets you drive from one layout right onto another Pick any stub or siding specify a target layout drive off the siding and poof the scene changes and you are running the same train in a different world Great for connections between multi level layouts N Trak modules or just cruising randomly through your layout collection To link layouts 1 Choose the jumping off point This must be a stub track one with no connections on one end like a siding or yard track When the train reaches the end of this track it will jump to the linked layout 5 ar aa Layout
298. re not reflected in the associated modules There is no way to transfer changes made in the overall layout back into the source modules except by copying and pasting between layouts e Ifyou move or rename the modular layout or any of its module files the layout might lose them and be unable to rebuild e If you want to send the layout to a friend you should supply the module files along with the main layout rrw In short modules are external files like homemade scenery objects or linked layouts Techniques for dealing with external files are given in the Publishing chapter Tutorial A Loop of Modules This exercise demonstrates most of the features of the modular railroading system In it we will build a large loop layout from a set of basic component modules The result will not lead to very interesting operation but you can run trains around it 1 Start with a blank layout or no layout If you start with an existing layout a new blank one will be created automatically Fo cuana a modda lac chek Add then deze modules ma this eoace 2 Choose Module Manager from the File menu This brings up the Module Manager with a blank workspace lid Featured Layouts a Layouts ii 3 Click Add This brings up the Layout Chooser By default it opens to the NTrak Components folder 4 Position the two windows Side by side so you can work with both together 5 Click in the Layout Chooser to select NT 6 foo
299. re you want the first chop point 2 When you release a switch is formed 3 Repeat drawing another segment at the other chop point 4 Point to one segment and press Del The segment and switch disappear 5 Repeat for the other segment 6 A small portion of the original curve is now isolated between two Modifying Track 1 If necessary isolate the segment of track to be hidden This is not necessary if you want to hide one or more entire segments 2 Point to the segment to be hidden so it highlights then press the right mouse button 3 Choose Hidden from the context menu rs poy Delete Track ee TE The track is redrawn as a dashed line Trains passing over this dashed section will appear hidden Untouchable To create a section of tunnel track the procedure is the same draw the track or isolate it right press and choose Tunnel When a contiguous series of track segments are marked Tunnel the train hyperspaces across all of them at once Add Car Here To mark a section of track untouchable same procedure again Be careful when you use this feature Once a section is marked untouchable you can no longer select it move it delete it create a switch or junction in it change its properties or connect any other track to it it becomes dead Make sure the track is fully connected and Its properties set before you mark it untouchable To reenable an untouchable section right press any tr
300. rescales as you zoom the layout but not when you resize the text scenery box ia ht ary Scenery Properties General Background Line Text M Show tert Text Madison WT Font fis Arial 9 Bold Color M Rotate text with image Madison WI OK Cancel Apply Ki Roadbed Certain common types of model railroad scenery can be constructed with polygons but it isn t easy The Roadbed feature introduced in Version 3 3 1 goes a long way toward solving this problem Notonly can it construct perfect track roadbed but also roads streets rivers and any other sort of fixed width meandering channel The roadbed device is based on track First you draw a length of track then grow roadbed to fit around it at a user specified width To construct a street or river you can define the shape by drawing with track tools then grow roadbed fill with asphalt or water background then delete the track Or not You could color the track to match the background and run autos or boats on it Roadbed is not a special type of scenery It consists of a series of Separate polygon objects shaped to fit around the track and to join with its neighbors These can be edited or modified as with any other scenery object Note that the roadbed is not attached to the track moving or reshaping one does not modify the other so get your trackwork finalized before you add the roadbed To construct roadbed 1 Using th
301. riginal file you lost data about where they were and you no longer know where the rewind should go The script will no longer work To deal with this TrainPlayer has the concept of a rewind point This is a snapshot of the positions of all movable objects trains switches and turntables You can save a rewind point to a file play with the trains a while then retrieve the file to put everything back the way Itwas These actions are done with the Save and Load buttons in the Advanced Scripting dialog A rewind point is saved automatically the first time you play or record a script Itis carried around with the layout and saved in the layout file This means you can save the layout with trains in random positions and you will still be able to rewind to the initial point If you change your mind about the starting locations and want to move them around a little use the Reset button in the Advanced Scripting dialog Reset erases the current saved rewind position so the next time you begin to play or record a new one Is created Caution If you carelessly erase a rewind point and don t know where the trains need to go you could render the script useless Advanced Scripting Dialog Clicking the Advanced button in the Script Editor brings up a dialog of useful buttons and options for script authors Advanced Scripting Train and Switch Positions For Script Authors Save current situation to File Erase starting position Erase Load situa
302. roperties Car Collection Editors About Cars There are some terms you need to know when working with cars To understand them consider this scenario You need some cars to carry grain on your prairie railroad You go to your big box hobby shop wander the aisles until you find one called Steam Era Freight Cars and locate a shelf called Grain Cars and Hoppers You pick out a nice model of a 2 bay open side covered hopper in Great Northern colors In TrainPlayer terms a car built from this kit would be described as Car collection Steam Era Freight Car class covered hopper Generic class hopper Car type GN 70 ton 2 bay open side covered hopper The car type is the name on the box a particular model from a manufacturer The car class is a code from an industry wide list indicating what the car is used for or can carry The car collection is a group of car types related by era class manufacturer etc The generic class is a program assigned category as described below When you add a car to your layout you start by choosing a car type from a collection and the program adds a car of that type on your track You can then modify this car repaint it change its size but you can t change its type You can however modify the collection and change the car type definition so next time you add a car of this type it will have the style you want Generic Car Classes Every car you add to a layout is assigned one of tw
303. roperty you can only change by moving the car e Selecta row and choose Delete from the context menu This deletes the row from the switchlist e Choose Add New from the context menu This creates a new empty row at the bottom of the list To fill in the new row choose a car and a destination using drop downs in the Car and To At columns e Selecta row and choose Duplicate This creates a copy of the row You can and should then change the car or destination in the row itis not a good idea to have two Switchlist rows which duplicate of each other After modifying the switchlist use File gt Save or Save As to save the layout and retain the modifications Color Codes When you are presented with a new switchlist it helps to visualize the final location of what you are being asked to deliver Color coding helps you do this In a generated switchlist each destination is assigned a color All cars bound for that destination are then assigned the same color You can then look at the layout and see your job at a glance move the purple cars to the purple station orange cars to the orange etc switchlist Action Car Tov At Load Retum X10 Hamilton Y tools E sent cer Deliver G61 Ingersoll M coiled Deliver F63 Ingersoll M coiled vend X60 GSW Inc Empty Por i J p 4 m r Fi F Fas Hamilton Y Empty After an ops generation color codes ar
304. round folder and when it opens select ground grass 01 A tj ground _grass_0 double click fills the rectangular box that you drew with grass My Recent ground grass 02 Documents ground_concrete_01 ground _grass_03 E ground _soil_0 ground _soil_02 Desktop ground soil_03 rock 1 sl rock OF sl water O1 Mi Documents Load Bitmap Making your Grass more Realistic Cut Ctrl X i Copy Ctrl C Right Mouse Click anywhere on your Grass area to first select it Delete Delete from the submenu that appears choose Properties Select All CtrlzA Scenery Properties x General Background Line Text C No Fil Stretch Ki h iC Solid T Lock proportions Hatched In the Scenery Properties window which appears you will see that Bitmap ee the default setting is Stretch Choose Tile and then press the Apply button at the bottom of the window and your grass should E pragranr Files TrainPlayersceriervt now look better Transparency J Then Press Apply Oo LOO A River Runs Through It i Use the Poly Line tool to inset a river or trench dhiding your background into two sections To add a river ensure that you are still in Background mode select the Poly Line B Using the left mouse button drag and create whatever kind of river line you wish Note Remember to connect the ploy lines together When this is done correctly a shaded area will ap
305. rrent one You can paste either a car or a train to a specific point on the track Right click the track and choose Paste here e Generate random trains When you choose the Generate Random Trains command on the Train menu it erases the current set of trains and replaces it with a random collection of cars and trains scattered around the layout You can control the generation to some extent by setting Train Preferences Removing Cars and Trains To delete a train right click the train image or one of the train windows and choose Delete Train The train is permanently erased from the layout To delete a car do one of the following e right click the car image or icon In a train window and choose Delete Car e click to select the car image and press the Del key e select the car and choose Edit Cut or Edit Delete All these actions are undoable Relocating a Train Normally you place a train where you want it by driving It there However not all situations allow that and sometimes you find yourself wishing you could just reach out and pick the thing up off the track TrainPlayer has a couple of commands for this purpose one moves a train from its current location to the spot of your choice the other turns a train around end for end To move a train to a specific location 1 Select the train to be moved 2 Position the cursor on the destination track right click and choose Place Train Here The train jumps immediately to a
306. rror The dialog is modeless so it stays up while you fix errors In addition to reporting errors the Layout Check dialog reports if your layout has any links to external layouts or requires any car collections not normally installed This information can be useful if you are planning to publish the layout Dialog controls Displays errors and external links list box l Ifan error has a number in the No column you can double click that line to zoom in and highlight the error area Refresh Click to repeat the track check for example after you have fixed an error The layout is rechecked and a new list of errors presented Repair IDs Click to repair Duplicate ID errors Track Errors The comprehensive list of errors reported by the track checker are listed here Many of these are designated internal meaning they are program errors a user should not see unless the layout has been corrupted Unspecified error Object flagged for delete Invalid object ID Unretrievable object Invalid junction number on track Same junction number on both ends of track Bad track length Invalid station number Object has zero space Jxn has no tracks Invalid track number on junction Superimposed junctions Invalid radius Station 1S missing name Tracks superimposed Endpoint on track but no Junction Duplicate ID internal internal internal internal internal internal usually means there Is an invisible track of zero leng
307. rs Hl6bse H141 Advanced atter J1U5 stop TevVerse uncouple Hi s H171 The Script Editor consists of a few buttons and a text box The text box is for viewing and editing the script The top three buttons are conveniences they work the same way as the corresponding buttons on the script toolbar The Advanced button brings up a dialog of advanced scripting options described in a later section Each script has its own editor window When you click Edit Script the window and script which come up are for the current train To see a script for a different train select the train and click Edit Script again l HEEL ID o T a a m Tooltips aa sihi iam i In developing a script you will need to know the numbers of tracks ncam junctions turntables and cars TrainPlayer 3 makes these available via tooltips ee Track 261 a flength 26 8 Ba To use tooltips m Hb T ry T P Pi Si Switch 52 oa m y pos U as 1 Enable tooltips by making sure Tools gt Show Tooltips is checked O o a gq Car B393 fa A e 2 If the Run tool is active you see a tooltip when you hover the Boxcar a SF 2 ea mouse pointer over a car or a switch If the Track or Edit tool is a y e active you also see tooltips over track sections turntables and non switchable junctions 3 Ifa tooltip does not show up it may be because a dialog or other window has the focus Click anywhere in the layout
308. rs Switchlrst Car To At X10 Hamilton Yard G6 Ingersoll Mac G61 Ingersoll Mac F48 Hamilton Yard X5 Hamilton Yard F63 Ingersoll Mac F4 Hamilton Yard X60 GSW Inc Load From tools a5 Empty trac coil Ha Empty trac Empty Ha Empty trac Empty Ha When the Ops Generator finds an unprepared layout it brings up the Ops Setup Wizard Here you go through the steps to set up your layout and set some ops generation preferences The last step generates a switchlist and brings you to the same State as Quick Start above ready to start delivering cars Ops Manual Setup Here s what it takes to prepare a layout in Get the trains ready You will need freight cars and engines If your layout doesn t already have some create them If you are starting with bare track and aren t too picky about what you get you might try the Random Train Generator Get the track ready For best results you will need a yard or two and an interchange track You can create these by hand or let the Ops Setup Wizard do the job automatically For more information see Yards and Interchanges Create some industries You will need stations around the layout with industries defined for them Again you can create them by hand or let the Wizard do it For more see Industries Itis up to you to make sure that the industries on the layout can be serviced by the available cars If your l
309. rsoll Machine Send Flatcar F63 empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Send bondola G6l empty from Hamilton Yard to Ingersoll Machine Return Flatcar F48 empty from track 28 to Hamilton Yard Send Boscar H2l fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GSU Inc Send Boscar X60 fempty trom Hamilton Yard to GSW Inc Deliver Boxcar Hoe aluminum bars from Hamilton Yard to GSW Inc Return Boxcar ES empty from track 29 to Hamilton Yard Each row in the grid corresponds to a line in the text and represents one car movement instruction The grid contains all the same data as the text so the two are redundant and you may want to dispense with the Schedule Window after you get up to speed The text line is in this format xAotion gt lt CLlass gt lt Car gt lt lboad gt from lt location to 7at lt To At gt If you rearranged the columns of the grid in this order then a grid row would read just like the text instruction For details about these windows see Switchlist Window and Schedule Window How to Work a Switchlist Each instruction in the switchlist sentence in the Schedule Window or row in the Switchlist Window tells you to move a given car from its current location to a given destination Instructions contain different verbs depending on the type of move see notes under Switchlist Window Contents for a list but they all mean the same and you could just read them all as move How you do these moves is up to you The brute force
310. rting on an existing folder To delete a folder or subfolder right click and choose Remove dimmed if the folder is locked or is within a locked folder To add a layout to a folder 1 Right click the folder and choose Add File 2 In the file dialog navigate to the layout rrw file you wish to add and click OK The program adds an alias pointing to the layout file You do not see a change in the tree but if you click on the selected folder you ll see the layout in the list window To add layouts from Windows Explorer 1 Open Windows Explorer and position it alongside TrainP layer 2 Navigate in Windows Explorer to a folder containing layouts and or subfolders In this example we are bringing in a folder called My Layouts with two subfolders 3 Position the mouse on the folder in Windows Explorer press and drag to an unlocked folder in the chooser tree shown by the arrow below left EEE Layouts a Fax 7 Jo Drafts fe Den d Inbox ii Featured Layos i gi E fim Layouts 101 esseDB 5 i Premium 4 My Layouts H testfolder2 iil Standard b P Four_Easy CD Layouts i Recent gt J P20 0 Downloads gt KE m testfolder2 gt fai My Music ie i CD Layouts b gt tab My Pictures AZ My Favorites bA Mv Shanes When you release the mouse button the new folder and subfolders appear in the chooser tree above right Dragged in folders are automatically marked as locked because
311. s available If you choose not to have this done on startup you can do it manually using Help gt Check for Updates Automatically bring up the control panel when opening a layout having trains Automatically open the Schedule Window when starting to play a script Many scripts direct status reports to this window as they run Show schedule window Check to display industry names in red whenever stations are on display If unchecked industries are not shown just station names Show industry names Determines the style of station display when color codes are active during an ops session If checked station colors are shown as thick outlines around the Station if unchecked colors show as Solid blocks Show station color codes Auto save New in version 5 2 auto save creates a copy of your layout periodically so that in case of program or computer crash you won t lose much work To enable auto save check the box Auto save every and enter the time between saves After the specified time the program makes a copy of your layout in the system TEMP directory overwriting any previous copy The name of the file is the same as your layout with bak appended You see an indication on the status bar while the file is being saved To retrieve an auto saved layout use the command Restore Backup on the File menu This opens a file browser in the directory where saved layouts are stored Choose the one you want and open it
312. s not found OK are converted to generic types missing scenery objects are simply omitted These conversions are temporary the next time you open the layout you will get this alert again Cancel Cancel and do not open the layout Connect to the web and look for missing items there Ifa missing car type is found on the web the entire car Download collection is downloaded and installed missing scenery items are downloaded individually so that you may end up with partially filled scenery folders on your local machine Permanently convert missing cars to generic types so that Convert the next time the layout is saved the missing cars will be dropped Applies only to cars not scenery If you choose to download missing items you may not get all of them If for example the layout author included custom scenery objects not in the TrainP layer collections then the download will not retrieve them be a BE FAE w F Y p 5 7a eee ere ervey a oo eeeoee 2 ta What s New Since 4 0 In 4 2 e Revamped graphics Infinite zoom smoother performance better appearance e View drag grab the view and drag it around with the hand cursor just like in a map program e Carsizes specify sizes of individual cars rather than settling for the defaults the way It used to work e Background colors choose your favorite background color for a blank layout and another for the area outside It e Fixes many small fixes and e
313. s not positioned right The most common breakage is when the connector is not quite touching the circle To repair 1 Choose the Edit Tool be a NI green square 4 On release the connector snaps perpendicular to the rim Point to the end of the connecting track closest to the circle so it highlights with a Press and drag until the circle highlights then release 5 Test the turntable Should work now Other problems are harder to correct You may find a phantom junction along the rim of a turntable you see a green highlight square where there is no track or other problems In most cases the best course of action is to delete the turntable and all connecting tracks and start over Scenery Properties Background Background fill properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See also Editing Scenery Properties General Scenery Properties Line Properties Text Properties This dialog sets properties of the color or pattern which fills the object The default is a solid ivory color shown above If multiple Objects are selected including grouped objects the fill properties chosen in this dialog apply individually to each Dialog controls Select one of four choices using the radio buttons No Fill Choose this if you do not want the object to be filled An object with no fill is transparent Choose this to have the object filled with
314. s ones and adds many conveniences for selecting layouts car collections and sounds Files from all over your disk can be dragged in from Windows Explorer and organized in tree controls for easy navigation and browsing Each chooser has a Web tab where you can browse and download files directly from the website A preview window shows thumbnails of layouts and car types or plays sounds e Premium content Several great new collections of layouts were custom built for TrainPlayer by a talented group of railroad artists scenic renderings of some of our best plans fully tracked satellite photos of yards from all over the continent a beautiful set of original plans developed in 3rd Plan It by Peter Lloyd Lee The package includes car collections detailed renderings of hundreds of cars and locomotives Access to the Premium collection requires a license e Snap Version 3 1 becomes more useful for track plan design with the addition of several types of snap while drawing Snap to angle creates exact or 6 or your choice turnouts snap to parallel keeps yard tracks at uniform separation snap to radius gives precise circles and curves Detailed on off choices are available in the preferences e Preferences The Preferences dialog has been redesigned for enhanced friendliness tossing some old clutter while adding new choices reducing the number of tabs while organizing more sensibly Each tab has its own help page e Track check The
315. s reside and how they are managed The TrainP layer scenery collections are organized in folders by type factories urban buildings vegetation etc Each folder contains a collection of image files mostly in bmp format but also jpg gif and png The installation delivers a small set of these to the Scenery folder located in your Application Data directory The location of this folder depends on your operating system An easy way to find out where It is point to an installed folder in the Scenery Chooser tree and look at the tooltip For example scenery Local Wwieb Scenery ee background a cars and trucks etc chem pl C Documents and Settings Jim Dill 4oplication oe i coal _or Datat TrainPlayer Scenery background bmp jpg prg gif Ce ee ae a i cranes a Li Factories fd Feed grain mills bare dirt 1 6rnp If you navigate to that folder in Windows Explorer you ll find the files which are on display here in the chooser f you add delete or reorganize them on the disk changes will be reflected in the tree after you use Refresh from the context menu Downloading and Installing Scenery Delivering scenery from the web to your local collection is a two step process The first time you click a folder in the web tree to view Its images the image files are downloaded into a temporary directory on your disk When you then choose to install them they are copied into the Scenery fold
316. s to specify its size and dimensions This is done by overlaying the image with a grid of standard size as described in this chapter For background on layout dimensions and scaling see About Sizes and Scales in the TrainP layer part of the manual About the Grid Adjusting the Grid Resizing and Rescaling About the Grid On every diagram in 7107 Track Plans Linn Westcott drew a grid of evenly spaced lines accompanied every few pages by a legend like this Ruled lines across plan are 6 apart in N 9 apart in TT 12 apart in HO 18 apart in S 24 apart in O If you have a plan and a modelling scale in mind you can measure distances or find the total size of the layout by counting grid lines The grid is what relates the picture to real world measurements When you load a diagram into TrackLayer the program just sees an array of dots It doesn t know where the ruled lines are or whether the picture represents a four by eight table a fifty foot clubroom or a map of the county You have to LAKE BENNETT tell it The first step in creating a layout is adjusting the TrackLayer grid t peri the nene ie of the image gt The grid is not normally visible you can toggle it P on and off using View Grid but it comes on automatically when you load an image file It 54 comes up in an arbitrary position as shown at left and normally all you have to do is drag so the two grids line up S
317. ses a delay of the given number of seconds before and or after these operations forward reverse stop uncouple The effect remains in effect until another autopause command To cancel enter autopause 0 zero An advanced preference can be used to have autopause 2 in effect for all scripts ECHO prints a string of text to the schedule window An advanced preference can be used to automatically echo all comment lines to this window ROTATE takes a turntable number and the number of a junction on its rim It begins rotation of the table until the bridge track hits the Specified junction Rotate should be followed by ON TABLESTOP if you need to wait until rotation ends before proceeding A car crosses a junction or track position when its midpoint crosses not its leading or trailing edge By the time it crosses It is too late to throw that switch i e AT J35 THROW J 35 will not work AT lt TIME gt waits until the layout clock reaches the specified hour whether or not the clock is on display AFTER lt TIME gt is a way of waiting a while in real time before continuing AT AFTER lt STATION gt happens when the lead or last car enters or departs a station This occurs when the car crosses the rectangular area of the station To see station areas and names click the Station tool Two word station names must be surrounded by double quotes ON STOP waits until a train has coasted to a stop This usually follows a stop command so next c
318. show up while you are dragging see left image below Let go while a highlight is showing and the incoming module will snap onto the existing one 6 Continue dragging modules in to build the assembly Additional modules can be dropped onto either end of the chain or in between two linked modules wherever the highlight shows up 7 To replace a module drag another one onto the center of it In this case the highlight is a red X above right indicating that the incoming module will replace the existing one 8 To make a turn add a corner module 9 To make a loop add four corners and the right number of modules in between so that the ends just meet Dragging Modules from Windows Explorer An alternative method of adding modules to the Module Manager is to drag them from Windows Explorer instead of the Layout Chooser To do this 1 With TrainP layer running and the Module Manager visible bring up Windows Explorer Start gt All Programs gt Accessories Navigate to a folder of module layouts 2 Choose a module layout and drag it into the MM window Highlighting and locations of attachment are the same as described above aon x G ja di NTrak Com y WW Search Components pl n File Edt View Tools Help Organize a Open E mail New folder zz M 7 d Modules 7 Name HO E i E ot ls erw Components p E nts tjpg di Track Plans nt 2s nrw A NTrak E nt 2s tpg j ea fm nt
319. smelter Return engine to yard i All these devices are described in this chapter Playing a Script In a well scripted layout you should be able to open the file and simply click Play to start the action Try this using one of the demo Scripts then read below about some of the finer points Watch the demo TrainP layer has a few scripted layouts in the installed set and a few more on the web Try the Cerro Azul RR a long time favorite of switchback and mountain railroad fans To see the layout in action choose Cerro Azul with script No 47 from the Layouts dialog as shown here E Layouts Choose a lawout C Program Files TrainPlayerjLayouts No Mame 8 amp 6 Cajon Pass Salt Lake amp Santa Fe RR 38 Central Missouri RR 47 Cerro 4z2ul RR Cerro Azul ER with script fe Charles City Western RR ao Chesapeake amp Ohio RR ut hee see sles oo hi Fi ba Refresh Delete Cancel opn Whenever you open a layout having a script you are notified by the word SCRIPTED on the status bar and an alert informing you that there is a script scripted Layout This layout has a script to operate train Switcher To play click Play Script here or toolbar Bukton is dimmed if another brain is selected To view edit or play the script or see layout operating instructions click Edit Script El Don t show this message again SCRIPTED To play the script
320. sses a given spot You can choose from a supplied collection of animations small but growing or find many more by searching the web or create them in your favorite paint program They can be connected with sounds so that say a crossing signal will both move and clang as the train passes by To see animations in action check out this video animation demo About Animated Images An animated image is a new type of scenery object It can be moved resized rotated and styled just like any other but it has a special type of background consisting of a series of frames each with its own image and duration These are in one of two formats Animated gif the well known animation files you see all over the web These can be loaded directly into scenery objects in TrainP layer Image sequence ANM file a Series of separate files for each image plus a text file with extension anm listing the frames and durations The image files may be in any popular graphics format bmp png jpg gif and the simple text file can be created by the program or by hand This scheme was designed to make it easy for users to create their own animations Because animated images are tied to scenery creating and manipulating them requires TrackLayer with Scenery Toolkit Viewing and playing them in an existing layout can be done in TrainP layer except in the current version you cannot start or stop animation if you don t have access to the scenery toolbar
321. st enough to distinguish the command from others For example view toolbars customize may be shortened to vi to cu Popup menu items are available also Car Layout Switch Turntable Track Circle Horn Station Many menu commands do not make sense in the context of a script Some bring up dialogs which are not scriptable Some duplicate functions available using Train Commands Some are toggle switches but since a script does not have a way to know the current setting results are unpredictable Context menus often need to reference a point on the layout where you right clicked to bring up the menu but since a script cannot supply this context menus may do nothing or work unpredictably Menu Command Examples file save bring up File Save dialog to save the current layout view zoom in magnify view view tool cust bring up Tools Customization dialog car acd car eeter insert a refrigerator car at current insert point of selected train tools enable yard mode turn on Yard Mode operation train new create new four car train at default location window tile horis if multiple document windows are visible tile them train freightl select train F reightl train speed double double speed of selected train Scheduling This chapter describes a couple of features helpful in making up a schedule or timetable for your railroad The idea is this Suppose you are making up a timetable for the daily run of a train which goes
322. sting loads with images or create one in the Load Collection Editor where you can supply images for It If you have more than one unknown load the Load Definition dialog operates in a Wizard like way You edit one Item ata time and use Next and Back buttons to browse through the list At the last item Next changes to OK which saves all the changes and dismisses the dialog agl nE na a ee clits a ia p T E rime area ey d Det This load name is not recognized FM General Service ement bulk Te es FY Well Car 40 containers spine c hilak w niszyntiareancs J FHD heavy duty fat 12 18 wheeled To add this load to your list specify carrier AAR code s Drop Bottom a O GE GD Side Dump GBH equipped w bulkhead End Dump Gravel High Side Hopper floeners Goirnnce Controls in this dialog Load name not recognized name of the load as entered in the Incoming or Outgoing box If the name is that of a valid load which you wish to add to the list proceed to the next box If itis a misspelled version of an existing load you can edit to correct the spelling As soon as the name becomes recognizable the text above the box changes to known load and its AAR code is displayed dimmed not editable for a Known load Choose Load button click to bring up the Load Chooser if you want to look for a Known load rather than create a new one The chooser is modal in this case find the load you want doubl
323. structions attached to a train telling it where and how to travel You can create a script by typing instructions or by recording train moves or a combination of both When you run the script the instructions are executed and the train moves accordingly While one or more trains Is being run by script you can be operating others manually Several script related devices are shown in the screen shot below Under the Train menu Is a Script submenu with functions duplicated on the Script toolbar Choosing Edit brings up the Script Editor where you can enter commands or watch them execute As the script runs status messages are shown in the Schedule window Train Window Help 4 fee Hew Train paren ted i New Locomotive editor Add Car a head out into yard Play Show Car ID s iE speed 15 a Generate Random Trains ay at dlo 244 60 reverse Stop De ee ee ee pick up hoppers Rewind Speed Pi throw 244 1 EE Aei a Forward Reverse jat 246 44 20 r speed 5 on on couple stop f Skop Reverse Train hl a Properties menu Switcher 1 Freighti Gondolas 1 Freight Boxcarl output BoxcarZ a er en ee EE AEF Hoppers Use engine EU Deliver hoppers Hlbe Hi4i to Barranca Freight3 Deliver hopper H171 to Carbonate Pick up gondolas 6138 6165 5 Says Deliver gondolas to Golden Eagle
324. t a plain N scale module template six feet long 6 Press the selected row and drag it into the Module Manager workspace It appears as a framed rectangle filling most of the workspace with a label showing it as module 1 In the assembly a No Mame s NT 1400 NT Hoo NTrak Hog comer Trak 4400 comer k Layouts 101 NT 12 foot i Modules NT 14oot Fla HO q NT 24foot 7 Inthe Layout Chooser click Iti NTrak ia oe sai ar to select NT 4 foot Fis Components aa a Eain Advanced NT Hoot n d Scenic Plans NT Hoot iz NT Hoot s 8 Press and drag the selected row into the Module Manager Keep the mouse button down for the next step 9 Position to the right hand edge of the 6 foot module until you see a narrow highlight box 10 Release the mouse button You now have two modules joined end to end 11 Drag in the NTrak 4 foot corner and drop it at the right 12 Drag in another NT 4 foot and drop it on the top edge of the corner module In this case the right hand edge does not highlight instead the highlight is at the top as you might expect 13 Continue in this fashion adding in order 4 foot corner NT 10 foot 4 foot corner NT 4 foot and 4 foot corner The result is a closed loop 14 For educational purposes try a rearrangement Press on the middle of module 1 and begin to drag It becomes hatched 2 a a aS ae 15 Drag to the edge bet
325. t in the list 3 To remove a module click Remove The selected module will be removed from the assembly Zooming Modules By default the Module Manager displays the entire assembly regardless of how large it becomes You can enlarge or maximize the window but for very large assemblies this may not be enough and you may want to zoom in for a closer look This is the purpose of the zoom controls at the lower right of the dialog To enlarge the view click the up arrow Each click zooms in by a fixed amount There is a limit you can t zoom so far that the module edges disappear the up arrow is dimmed when you reach the limit When the view is enlarged scrollbars appear so you can move around To shrink the view click the down arrow Each click reduces by a fixed amount until the assembly goes to a fixed minimum size To restore to normal fit to window mode click Fit This resizes the assembly to fit in the window Settings The Settings button at the bottom of the dialog brings up the Module Manager Settings dialog This allows you to set display features applying to the Module Manager and to the resulting modular layouts Module Manager Settings Sets display properties in the Module Manager and in layouts created by it Called from the Settings button on the Module Manager dialog 4 Reset to Default In this dialog you can adjust most elements of the display in the
326. t the objects as described previously 2 Right click any object and choose Copy or choose Edit Copy from the main menu or press Ctrl C The objects are copied to the clipboard To paste copied objects 1 Choose Edit Paste from the main menu or press Ctrl V Objects on the clipboard are added to the layout in the upper left corner and are selected so that you can drag them into position Pasted objects do not automatically connect to existing track even if you position them so it looks like they should To connect pasted track with existing track you can delete and redraw a segment or you can drag one junction on top of another and they will fuse Track Transform Rotate Flip A selection of track can be rotated by an arbitrary angle or flipped horizontally or vertically To rotate or flip track 1 Select one or more track sections To select an entire area Such as a yard you can start by dragging a selection rectangle around the area then shift click to include or exclude individual sections 2 Right click a selected section and choose a Transform Selection command Flip or Rotate Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Ctrl x Rotate 90 deg CW Copy Ctrl C z Angle in degrees 1 0 Rotate 90 deg COW 180 to 180 Rotate Delete Delete Select All Ctrl A Place Train Here To rotate by an arbitrary angle choose Rotate and enter an angle in the dialog A positive value rotates clockwise The selected tracks are ro
327. tated or flipped about the center of the rectangle enclosing the selection If there are adjacent unselected tracks these will be reoriented as necessary to remain connected For example here is a rotation of 10 degrees on a selected yard 10 deg J unctions shown in red remain fixed while those touching the selected tracks move Transform Selection is undoable so you can experiment with it then undo and nothing will be harmed Ties and Roadbed If you want to add ties and or roadbed to your track those are covered in the scenery chapter See Ties and Roadbed Special Track Once you have some track down you can mark sections of itto have special properties A section can be marked as e Hidden track When a train passes over a section marked Hidden the train disappears from view This simulates passing through a tunnel or a section of track underneath the layout Hidden track is shown on the layout as dashed lines e Tunnel track When a train enters one end of a section of tunnel track it tunnels through and immediately begins to emerge at the other end Tunnel track is used when the layout has multiple images for example a separate picture for upper and lower levels As soon as the train leaves the upper level diagram it appears at the corresponding place on the lower level diagram as long as the exit and entry points are connected by a length of tunnel track Tunnel track is shown on the layout as light grey lines visible only
328. tates its overall size and the sizes of the car models Scale Ratio gives the relationship between a given scale and actual size a real locomotive is 87 times the size of an HO model of it Adjusting the View Commands on the View menu allow you to modify the appearance of the layout and the screen e Fit To Window resizes the layout to fit within the current window frame This is a toggle when the command Is checked then any time you resize the window the layout resizes with it if you uncheck it or zoom or unzoom the layout does not resize Fit To Window Rotate Layout oom Refresh e Rotate Layout turns the layout 90 degrees in either direction See details below 4uto Follow e Zoom moves you closer to the layout for a more detailed view or further away for a wider view See below for methods of zooming Loco Sounds e Refresh L redraws the screen and straightens up any crooked trains e Auto Follow is a toggle switch when on the view automatically scrolls to keep the selected train in sight as it moves This command is also available on the context menu you see when you right click anywhere on the layout Auto follow becomes automatically disabled if you scroll the view Schedule manually via scrollbars or hand drag Control Panel Switch Window e Loco Sounds toggles steam chuff sounds on or off When loco sounds are enabled you hear speed dependent chuffs as the selected train moves Train Tr
329. telling the command when it should execute say when the train gets to a certain spot When the Script runs it starts at the first line waits until the first condition is met executes the first command goes to the next line and so on A line without a wait condition executes the command immediately As an example say you are operating a loco in a yard and your job is to pick up a car from the adjacent track You would crank up to a slow speed pull forward past the switch stop throw the switch back up until you couple then Stop Ina script this sequence of operations would look like this speed 5 after J22 stop throw J22 reverse speed 5 on couple stop The speed command gets the loco underway and accelerates to 5 MPH After it passes the switch labelled 22 the stop command is executed and the loco decelerates to a stop Switch 22 is then thrown to its alternate position the loco goes into reverse accelerates to 5 MPH continues on until it couples with something then stops If this makes sense to you then you re ready to write scripts Refer to the reference section for details about command syntax read the next parts about tools to make the job easier then start typing some commands into the Script Editor and see if you can make something happen The Script Editor MS Switcher throw 24 throw j be Play throw speed ea Stop at J217 speed 30 head up the hill to Barranca at J1U5 speed drop off hoppe
330. th track references a non existent station track or circle is defined at a point a junction exists but has no tracks connected to it junction references a non existent track two junctions are very close together internal a Station has been defined with a blank or empty name two sections of track share the same line one track almost meets another but does not connect two cars or trains have the same ID Most of these errors are rare The two most common are illustrated in the diagram above e Endpoint on track but no junction see right hand red circle in diagram one track endpoint lies near another track but doesn t quite touch it Normally this indicates you meant to create a switch but didn t quite The fix is to use the Edit tool pick up the stray end and drop it carefully on the other track e Superimposed junctions left hand circle means two junctions are very close together Normally this means you meant to have a single junction but accidentally created two instead The fix is to move one junction on top of the other so they fuse into one In the diagram the problem is that there Is a tiny piece of stray track the fix Is to delete it If you get other errors and can t figure them out drop us a note and send the rrw file Most problems can be fixed by editing the rrw file as a last resort Layout Publisher For copying layout components to an output folder Called from menu command File gt Publish E Layout Publis
331. the Class column and whenever a car description appears in the program on dialogs tooltips etc the name given in this column will be used This choice can also be made in Preferences see Car Defaults 2 Click a row in the list window to select a type This updates the AAR text in the Car Type tab Note if you are in the Load Collection Editor the code you select will be appended to the text in the AAR box with comma rather than replacing it 3 Or type a code directly into the AAR box If the code is a valid one the list window will scroll to that type The AAR Car Types window remains up as you browse through the car collection To take it down click the close box or OK button Load Collection Editor The Load Collection Editor is very similar to the Car Collection Editor and can be operated as described above To bring up the Load Collection Editor right click a load image in the Load Chooser and choose Properties The differences between the Load version and the Car Collection one are a some controls are removed from the former which do not apply to loads Size Units Default Load Show Load b the AAR box in the Load dialog contains a different kind of string described below Load AAR Strings What you see in the AAR box for a load definition is not a single code but a ist of codes indicating all car types suitable to carry the current load For example as shown above a bulldozer can be transported by a general s
332. the ae top of the circle This completes a large Curve and serves as a handle to connect to the next loop 4 Mark the curve untouchable Right click on the curve so it highlights as shown and choose Untouchable This causes the curve to become k unresponsive it will not highlight you Delete Track cannot connect track to it and most Hidden important tangents you create on the next loop will not snap to it Ium Untouchable Before you mark the curve untouchable you might want to mark it Hidden See notes below Add Car Here d 5 Draw a circle for the second loop Circle tool Start at the center of the first circle and drag until the circle is Superimposed on the first one This illustration shows the drag in process not quite finished 6 This shows the second circle in place 7 Draw a short segment to connect the second loop to the first Begin by highlighting the circle as shown 8 and connect to the handle drawn in Step 3 Don t worry about the Kink in the track you ll fix it shortly You now have the first leg of the second curve 9 Draw the other leg of the curve Begin on the circle at about the same place as in Step 3 10 and drag to form a new handle near but not right on top of the first 11 You now have one complete but kinked loop and another almost complete loop with handle 12 Fix the kink Use the Edit tool E Point to the junction so
333. the individual help pages for menu screen shots and details Web tab If you have a live internet connection the web tab of each chooser shows content available on our website Selecting an item or collection from this tab causes it to be downloaded to your machine and added to your local content Details vary depending on chooser see individual help pages The content you see in a web tab depends on your license for example you won t see Premium folders unless you purchased the full package If you are bothered by this try Helo gt Purchase Upgrade We are constantly updating and enhancing the web collections so check back once in a while to see what s new Search f you are looking for a particular file use Find and Find Next on the tree context menu Right click a folder to search through It and its subfolders to search all select the topmost tree item choose Find and enter all or part of an item name or path Ifa match is found itis selected in the list window If there is more than one match Find Next goes to the next one Sort Items in the list window can be sorted on any column when the window Is in list not icon view To sort click the header of a column To sortin the reverse direction click the header again What s New Each web chooser includes a folder called What s New This shows items which have been posted on the web since a certain date or within a certain period before today You can adjust the cutoff criter
334. their contents reflect files on the disk Advanced Layout Properties For viewing and editing advanced properties of the layout Called from Properties on the Layout context menu See also About the Properties Dialog F Advanced layout data Path Background Image Full pathname of the layout rrw file This item is not editable to change the path save the layout to a different location Pathname of the background image file blank if none To remove the background image from a layout erase the contents of this box To change to a different image enter a filename or use the browse button to browse for a different image file Caution it is not recommended to change the background image file If you change from one background to another it Is likely that the track will no longer match the background the size and shape of the background will be wrong and other problems will arise You are warned about this when you dismiss the dialog Background Color Module Background color of the layout A color button appears on the dialog if the layout is new or has no background image Click to bring up the color chooser to select a new background color for the layout The default color is set in Preferences Style tab this applies to all new layouts The color you choose here in Layout Properties applies only to the current layout Trick choose black as the background color and it
335. this point if you want to revert back to the original you can use Edit gt Undo The dialog belongs to the layout window It does not remain on display if you close minimize or deactivate the layout Edits are applied automatically when you change the selected car or train If you select a car edit one of its properties then select a different car it behaves as if you had clicked Apply About Sizes and Scales The layouts in 707 Track Plans are designed to be independent of scale so that any plan can be used to design a railroad in any scale Each plan in the book is overlaid with a square grid with the following legend on most pages Ruled lines across plan are 6 apart in N 9 apart in TT 12 apart in HO 18 apartinS 24 apart in O This means a plan designed for a 4x8 HO railroad would serve just as well for a 2x4 layout in N scale or an 8x16 in O TrainP layer adopts the same scheme The program has its own internal grid which is aligned with that of the drawing as the layout is being prepared Aligning the grid establishes the connection between pixels in the image and real world dimensions and allows the program to report measurements in your choice of scale The following scales are supported in TrainP layer Scale Name Scale Ratio Grid Spacing inches Z 220 o ee N 160 a 6 When you choose one of these scales in Layout Properties it does not change the appearance or proportions of the layout but dic
336. till positioned at the end of the first segment press and drag to create another segment Since the two segments share an endpoint they are automatically fused to create a single two segment polyline object 4 Repeat step 3 to extend the polyline 5 Finally draw a segment connecting the two free ends of the polyline forming a closed figure The resulting polygon is automatically filled with the default fill color It does not matter in which order or direction you draw each segment as long as one end or the other coincides with the endpoint of another segment they will join The cursor changes to when you are touching a segment endpoint When you select a polyline or polygon object its drag handles are on the rectangular space around It Dragging by these handles changes the overall size and shape of the figure To adjust the position of a single vertex point click a second time on the object drag handles now appear on the vertex points and can be used to move those points individually Click repeatedly to toggle between these two editing modes Scenery Convenience Tools Two of the drawing tools do not actually create new types of object they just provide convenient shortcuts to creating standard objects with certain attributes In all cases you could acheive the same results by drawing a rectangle object and setting its properties e The Text tool creates a rectangle object with a text string no fill and no border line On d
337. ting new closed car loads for an industry Car Properties where the load for a car can be viewed or changed Car Collection Editor where a default load can be assigned to a car type Industry Browser where incoming and outgoing loads are defined for a standard industry Station Properties where loads are defined for a specific industry Loading Cars Every freight car has a load type assigned to it whether by default or by you There are two steps to loading a car selecting a load for the car which you normally do once then toggling it on or off whenever the car is loaded or unloaded To select a load for a car e Right click the car and make a choice from the Load Menu described below This lets you choose from a list of load names or from the gallery of pictures in the Load Chooser Both the Load Menu and Load Chooser offer ways to load more than just the selected car e Or right click choose Properties and select from the Load drop down in Car Properties Either way if the car already has a load assigned it will be replaced by the new choice and the car status will be set to Loaded Note another way to seta load for a car is to seta default load for the car type Then every time you create a car of that type it will be assigned the default load See Default Loads below To load or unload the car e Right click the car and choose Load gt Loaded to mark the car as loaded or Load gt Empty to mark it empty e Or click Load
338. tion This is done by selecting a tag from a drop down menu in the Layout P roperties dialog Mot a module straight Comer Junction Jingide comer If you are creating a layout to be used as a module select the appropriate tag This will inform the Module Manager how to interpret the layout This is not vital for a straight module but corners and junctions must be tagged or they will not work The Module Manager The Module Manager is a dialog for organizing and assembling modules into modular layouts Called from the menu command File gt Module Manager The process you carry out in the Module Manager is called assembly It s like sliding dominoes around on a table you position them end to end using Special corner and junction units to make turns They can only fit together in certain ways so they are like magnets you drop them roughly into position and the program snaps them into place The dialog is operated mostly by drag and drop To build a modular layout you introduce modules by dragging them in from other windows Layout Chooser or Windows Explorer then you rearrange or delete them by dragging or change the sequence by moving rows up and down in a list Once you have an assembly you like click OK and the program automatically creates the full modular layout It reads in the track and scenery of each module positions them according to your assembly automatically adds little track sections between modules a
339. tion From File Load Save scripts to layout File Update Toggle IDs of affected cars Lar IDs View web documentation Help Show script announcement on opening layout i Echo script comments in schedule window i Use aubopause in all playback e Train and switch positions click Save to save the current situation of all trains switches and turntables to a file in xml format Click Load to read and return to a saved situation This is handy when you need to return moving objects to where they were at Some point in the script without saving the entire layout e Toggle IDs of affected cars ifthe comments atthe top of a script include any car ID s then this button will toggle the display of ID s on those cars For example in the block of comments entitled Daily Ore Run on the Cerro Azul See screen shot at top of page six cars are identified by their IDs click the Car IDs button to show or hide labels on those six cars e Erase starting position click Reset to erase the rewind point associated with the layout so that a new one will be created the next time you start the script This is an advanced feature to be used with caution For details see the section about Rewind Points e Save scripts to layout file click Update to save modifications you have made to scripts but save no other aspects of the layout For more info see notes e Show script announcement on opening layout display an alert when a scripted layout is o
340. tion to typing load names you may choose incoming outgoing loads from the Load Chooser as follows Choose Loads Brings up the Load Chooser for selecting incoming and outgoing loads The Load Chooser gives you browsable access to the entire collection of loads on your machine and on the web When the Load Chooser is called up from incoming outgoing text boxes it arranges itself so the two windows are side by side and operates by drag and drop You select a load in the chooser window drag It to either the Incoming or Outgoing Loads box and it adds the load name to the list The chooser window remains up so that you can do this repeatedly ound Local Web m coal gravel or ndustry id ainers Hercules Cement Co Choose Industry i heavy _ soe et m luner ogs 1 Incoming Loads Outgoing Loads cal military cement bulk Portand cement bags aa miscellaneous E a EA a chemicals cement tanks m steel goods chem tanks small O iW truck trailers 7 eae cement tanks foad for class FG Click a highlighted car to load or unload Ctr click loads cut shift click loads train ok _ Canel __ Hep ie a jeie Dme a Or instead of drag and drop you can select a load and click OK This will dismiss the chooser and add the load to either the Incoming or Outgoing box whichever most recently had the focus OK validates saves changes and d
341. to change the font size and font type and color of your new Text label use a left mouse click to highlight it use a right mouse click to open the submenu At the submenu select Properties which will open this new menu gt You can edit your original text in the Text box If you click on the Font prompt then you can adjust both Font size and Font type in the next pop up window Font Color can be changed in the Color box Remember to hit the Apply button to have these changes reflected in your layout Scenery Properties X General Background Line Text MW Show text Text Riverbend Freight Forwarding Font Arial Narrow Bold iverbend Freight Forwarding Color ie M Rotate text with image Close Cancel Apply Using the Group Ungroup feature There will be situations where you create a small town and you will want to keep all those images connected to each other in the same sequence and the same proportion Here s how you will do that First from the Scenery toolbar ensure you are in the Foreground mode then use a left mouse click on the Scenery Select tool to activate it R O w A e 40 Ii Tes Me Bi Then drag a rectangle shape around all of the images to be included in the Group image If you have correctly selected all of the images you will see their control points on the screen If you have missed some as the old adage goes just try again until you succeed At th
342. tons for load commands Default Loads The load system features a scheme of cascading defaults designed to make it easy to use loads without a lot of setup The following diagram illustrates this Layout Properties General Service Well Car 40 containers FHD Flatcar heavy duty flat 12 18 wh baian le Gondola Gondoa coveredload GA Gondola Drop Bottom ballast GB Gondola Mill solid bottom scrap metal Gondola Side Dump gravel Inthe AAR Car Types list just above you can see that a default load is assigned to each car class or AAR type This allows you to open a random layout and find meaningful loads on all cars without having to specify anything In the Car Collection Editor above right a default load can be assigned to each car type overriding the default based on the AAR code The default load for a car type applies only when you create a car of that type it does not automatically change the load of every such car on the layout For example the diagram shows that the next time you create a gondola class G from the named collection its load will be scrap metal In the Car Properties dialog top left a specific load can be assigned to any car on the layout overriding any defaults The same result is achieved by dropping a load on the car from t
343. toward the front of the train left moves it toward the rear If the pin is already at the edge of the window pressing the arrow key will scroll the train Note that positioning the pin also selects the adjacent car To scroll the train image If the train is too long to fit in the window there are several ways you can scroll a different part into view e Click one of the scroller buttons Click the right button to move the train to the left it s the window that moves right and vice versa A button is dimmed when you cannot scroll further in that direction e Press and hold a scroller button The scroll repeats automatically e Press a right or left arrow key This moves the uncoupling pin to the edge of the window then scrolls the train e Select a car Ifthe selected car is not visible the train scrolls automatically until it is You can uncouple without regard to train speed or direction You can uncouple at any speed however unrealistic and you can uncouple cars being pushed in front of the engine the train simply stops so it wont run Into what you just uncoupled There are two train control windows one on the control panel and one on the toolbar They are equivalent except that the toolbar version Is resizable see next note and does not have scroller buttons You can use either or both interchangeably To resize the train control window in the toolbar choose Tools Customize and while the dialog Is on display cli
344. train being driven by a script the script is not likely to run correctly afterwards Recording a Script The easiest way to develop a script is by recording Press Record operate your layout a while press Stop and you have a playable script captured as you were driving Click Rewind then Play and you can sit back and admire your moves If you have the Script Editor on display the commands appear as they are being recorded and afterwards you can edit them in the same window To record a script l Get in position Put the trains where you want them then use File Save or Save As to store the arrangement in the layout file When you distribute a script its starting point should match the train positions when the layout file is opened 2 Practice Plan your operating scheme maybe go through some of the moves so you can do them smoothly while recording You can work out one sequence ata time record it then go on to the next 3 View the window Ifyou want to follow along bring up the Script Editor before you start recording While you re at it you might enter comments indicating what operations you plan to carry out Include car IDs in these comments so the program can highlight the indicated cars 4 Begin recording Click the Record button on the toolbar It turns red and the recorder is now running But take your time this is not a tape recorder there are no wheels running it doesn t actually record until you do something
345. trains on a layout then one of them is always designated the selected train This is the one e which appears in the train window on the Control Panel or Train Toolbar e which is being controlled by the Control Panel and Train Toolbar e which appears outlined or checked in the Train menu To select a train a click any car in the train b choose its name or picture from the Train menu or c Click its name in the Train Tree At any given time there may be at most one selected car on the layout Ifa car is selected e a pink X is shown on the car top e an orange line is shown under the car in both of the train windows e the uncoupling pin is positioned before or after the car e the Add Car command will deposit its new car at the pin position e Edit commands cut copy delete apply to the selected car To select a car a click its image on the layout b click its icon in a train window or c click its name in the Train Tree When you select a car you also select its train To unselect click a blank space on the layout or the blank space behind the train in the train window Train Menu New in 4 0 you can now select a train from a menu of pictures I I LEF E l ian 51 Dhi ee e E eee ee ee Train Menu Settings The Train Menu appears when you click the down arrow right of the train window on the toolbar or choose Train gt Train Menu from the main menu It displays trains as pict
346. ts chosen in this drop down will remain in effect throughout the program until changed Car data The identifier of the car This appears on the car top when the Show Car IDs command Is used see illustration below and is also used in scripts to refer to this car The initial ID assigned to a car is a one letter initial of the car class followed by a number which makes the label unique You can change this to any short string as long as it remains unique Choose a load to be associated with this car The load you choose Is displayed when Loaded is checked hidden when Load unchecked Use the Load Chooser item at the bottom of the menu if you want to choose from a dialog instead of a list This menu is unavailable when the car is unloadable Displays or sets the car s loaded empty status Check to indicate that the car is carrying a load uncheck if the car is Loaded a ee empty The same action is available on the Load popup in the car context menu Reverse Engine appears only if car is an engine Check to flip the engine so it points in the opposite direction See below Full Image Ifthe selected car belongs to a collection which supplies large car images then the Full Image tab will be available Select this tab to see the large image as shown here Type Burlington Northem Collection Atheam FMC Plug Door Boxcar Class X box car To see the picture in full detail enlarge the dialog The picture rescales
347. ture trees buildings bridges earth powders paints and other decorative whatnot In TrainP layer the box has an unlimited quantity the objects are thin they re just top views and if you don t see what you like there are tools for making your own It s quick and easy With Scenery Toolkit you can scenic an entire layout in an evening and not spill a drop of Sculptamold on the floor This chapter describes how to create scenery on your layout Fora quick lesson try the tutorial About Scenery Tutorial Riverbend Choosing Scenery Drawing Scenery Editing Scenery Managing Scenery Scenery Properties About Scenery k OOCBA M amp Bae E Shapes TrainPlayer scenery consists of a collection of shapes or scenery objects There are regular shapes rectangle circle ellipse irregular polygons odd shaped bitmap images and linear lines polylines Non linear shapes can be filled with solid colors hatched patterns or bitmap images and outlined with lines of various styles Shapes can be moved resized rotated grouped copied and pasted one or more ata time Each shape has its own style and colors which can viewed and modified in a tabbed dialog and are saved in the layout file Tools All scenery operations are available from a single toolbar with about a dozen buttons for creating and editing scenery objects Some are drawing tools which determine what you get when you press and drag others carry out one click editing
348. u Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Re download scenery folder Dimmed on parent or root folder of tree Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Go to next hit after Find Download All Download and install all scenery objects within the selected folder and subfolders Look at all scenery objects within the selected folder and subfolders if some on the web are not yet installed on your local machine download and install those Download Missing Items Clear Download Cache on Scenery folder only Remove local cached files force re download What s New Settings on What s New folder only Set cutoff date see What s New Find Find Next Download AML Download Missing Items List Menu Open Download selected scenery folder then switch to local tab Icon View Show scenery objects as icons List View Show scenery objects in list form with status icons See Status Icons Icon View List View Scenery Properties Line Line border properties of the selected scenery object s Called from Properties on the scenery context menu See also Editing Scenery Properties General Scenery Properties Background Properties Text Properties This dialog sets properties of the line bordering the scenery object If multiple objects are selected this dialog sets the same line properties for all If you do not want the object outlined set its line width to zero Dialog controls Color
349. ually updated as you draw or edit When you are moving or removing track the rails may not change When tracks and rails get out of synch the solution is to toggle View gt Rails twice Turning rails off and then on again generates a new set e Some layouts have spurious circles in the rail display or other glitches e Rail Spacing is not yet adjustable It is hard coded to be 3 4 in HO or equivalent Rails don t show up very well against a background Image although you can change color and thickness to suit But they provide a nicer image when you are running a track only layout Exporting an Image TrainP layer provides the ability to save the image you see on the screen to a jpg or other graphics file This topic is now covered on its own page Exporting Images Dragging by Hand As an alternative to using the scrollbars you can pan around the view by dragging it with the mouse When the view is zoomed in So the layout is larger than the document window and the Run tool is selected then press and drag any point on the layout and the view will move Note dragging the view by hand disables Auto F ollow To re enable right click the layout and choose Auto F ollow If the layout extends beyond the window in only one direction you can only drag that way For example if the layout is a long horizontal strip which extends to left and right but is completely visible vertically then you can only drag in a horizontal direction Lay
350. und Layer to create smaller objects in the foreground o 4a Edit Bac kground Layer to create larger shapes behind the foreground objects The layer you choose becomes the active layer where new objects will go The active layer is displayed as FOREGR or BACKGR on the status bar at lower right When the foreground layer is active background objects cannot be selected or modified when the background layer is active foreground objects are not displayed at all 2 Select a drawing tool Choose one e L Rectangle to create a rectangular or square object e Oval to create a circle or ellipse e Line Polygon to create a line a chain of line segments or a polygon e 4 Text to create a plain text label Bitmap to create a rectangular object with an image 3 Press and drag Press the left mouse button where you want one end or corner of the object drag and release where you want the opposite end or corner e f you are using the Oval tool you will be dragging a circle Press the Shift key as you drag if you want to move instead of resize the circle To create an ellipse you first draw a circle then adjust as described below e Ifyou are using the Line Polygon tool you are dragging a line To create a polyline or polygon the point where you press to start or release to end must coincide with the endpoint of another line e f you are using one of the other tools you are dragging a rectangle 4 Enter data if prompted
351. unds in the Web chooser under Layouts A sound selected for a station will play when a train first crosses the station boundary Name the station in a way that describes the location The name must be unique for the layout This name will show up in messages like Train 5 arriving at lt station name gt 4 Choose or enter industry properties The bottom half of the dialog is where you define the industry and specify incoming and outgoing loads at this station You can choose a predefined one from the Industry Browser or just type in an industry name and some load names 5 Click OK The program then checks the data you entered and if valid copies it to the selected station If the data is invalid or incomplete you will be prompted to fix it If the incoming or outgoing lists contain load names not Known to the system you will be asked to define them in the next step 6 Define unknown loads Unknown loads are presented in the Load Definition Dialog where you can fix mistyped names or define new ones Loads you create here are added to the closed car loads folder in the Loads collection If you prefer to create a visual load for an open car follow the procedure below insert link here 7 Save the layout The modified station properties are not saved to disk until you save the layout Load car type overrides This is an expert feature which allows more flexibility in waybill and switchlist generations Here s how it works Associ
352. up with a spiral above right If this happens Edit Undo and try again Because of the requirement that curves remain tangent you cannot drag a junction which joins a curve and a straight in the diagram at left dragging the highlighted point has no effect because anywhere you try to drag it will cause the tangency to break Loops and S Curves You don t have to draw curves one ata time Some constructs like loops and S curves work better if you draw more than one circle before you add the Straights To draw a loop 1 Draw two circles Use the Circle tool Remember use the shift key to move unshift to resize ao 2 Begin on either circle and drag a tangent to the other 3 Release when the destination circle is highlighted 4 Repeat the procedure on the other side of the loop 5 When you release the second tangent both circles become curves and the loop Is complete To draw an S curve 1 Draw two circles Leave a little space between them 2 Begin a tangent on the inside edge of one circle fe 3 Drag to the inside edge of the other circle Release when the destination circle Is highlighted oa completes one curve and removes one circle 4 Draw an outer tangent This 5 Draw the other outer tangent This completes the other curve and removes the other circle 6 The completed S Helices A helix is a device for moving a train between levels of a multi level layout
353. ure is not just for script authors Anyone doing operations might find it handy to Save a Situation before a series of moves and later return to it Load situation Erase starting position Save scripts to layout Toggle IDs Show script announcement Opens a file saved by the Save button above and restore all trains and switches to the saved positions Cautions if the layout has been modified since the file was Saved for example tracks deleted the results of the load are unpredictable Do not load a file saved from a different layout If you have made changes in trains or cars they will be lost upon loading Erases the situation you go to when you rewind a script A new one will be established the next time you start the script The first time you start a script a snapshot of the situation is automatically taken so you can later rewind to it This snapshot persists between sessions and is never deleted or updated by the program Itcan become obsolete if you make changes to track or trains these changes are not saved in the rewind point and so will be lost when you rewind In short if rewind does not do what you expect use the Erase button Updates the scripts portion of the current layout file with the current text of all scripts When you edit a script the changes are not normally retained until you save the layout file This saves not only the scripts but also the track trains switches etc When you
354. ures text only Shown below or both The currently selected train is shown with a blue outline or a checkmark on the text menu Train Menu Settings My Long Freight One box freight To select a train from the menu just click its picture or name To specify what the train menu should display click Train Menu Settings and see this dialog Train Menu Options Show on menu All trains C Only trains with engines C Only named trains Text only jw Show train names W Show car ID s Choose e Show on Menu whether you want to see all the trains on the layout or only those having engines or only those you have named e Text only whether you want to see train pictures in the menu or just names e Show train names check if you want train names displayed along with the pictures The train name is shown underneath the left end of the picture This option is disregarded if Text only is checked e Show car ID s check if you want each car to have its ID shown underneath as in the picture above This option is disregarded if Text only is checked Note trains do not have names until you provide them Do not choose Only named trains or Text only unless you have some named trains on the layout Most of the ops ready layouts you can download from your web chooser have train names Settings you make in this dialog stay in effect until you change them again in this or another session Adding Cars and Trai
355. us how to shuffle a dense yard of cars when you have a schedule to meet With TrainPlayer you can learn by practicing Figure out how to classify cars so they re on the right tracks at the right time Learn to minimize the number of moves it takes Try your hand at a switching puzzle e Teach train moves If you re already a skilled operator use TrainP layer to spread your Knowledge Use the recorder to capture a sequence of moves and play it back for the learners Demonstrate how to handle a meet on the main line or switch an industrial siding e Share your layout Ifyou have a layout that welcomes visiting operators TrainP layer is an excellent introduction and training tool for them Send them a copy of your layout before their visit and they ll feel far more comfortable operating with you Or posta copy of the file on your website and allow people to experience your railroad from a distance and of course e Play with trains About This Manual F This manual is in two parts The first covers TrainP layer and describes how to run trains on 4 prepared layouts The second covers TrackLayer and describes how to prepare the layouts We don t really expect you to read the manual Most of what you need to know about TrainP layer you can figure out by opening a layout and running trains But you might glance through to pick up tins which could enhance your enjoyment TrackLayer is a little more involved so It is recommended that you at
356. ustries and cars around to generate this many To the right of the text box Is an Indication of the percentage of available loadable cars you are requesting Finish page Summarizes the results Click Finish to perform the ops generation and present the results or Cancel to abort without generating Ops Setup Wizard Finished with the TrainPiayer Ops Setup Wizard Stations Using existing stations Industries Using wasting indusines Train Comainmng carES353 Cars to move 10 Note if you generated stations or industries during the wizard clicking Cancel will not undo those Use Edit gt Undo if you want to revert back to the pre Wizard state or else close the layout without saving Scripting You ve worked out a particularly elegant sequence of moves in a dense yard and you d like to remember it so you can show it to your fellow operators on club night TrainPlayer can helpby letting you capture program and play back operations using scripts little programs written in a language designed for running trains The program is delivered with several pre scripted layouts If you want to see scripting in operation open one of these click Play and watch the show To go deeper and develop your own scripts work through this chapter About Scripts Playing a Script Recording a Script Developing a Script Command Reference About Scripts Scripting is a means of automating railroad operation A script is a set of in
357. ve internet connection while using this chooser E Heavy freight wav Sound E K5la wav Sound E LN wav Sound E Michigan freight wav Sound E Shemys durango wav Sound Sound For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Sound A web sound chooser shows a subfolder of sounds available on the web which folder depends on whether you are choosing an engine horn sound or a layout sound 1 Click the folder in the tree to show the list of sounds it contains 2 Click a sound in the list to select it 3 Click the icon on the right to hear the sound 4 Ifyou like it click Download to download the sound and add it to your local collection After the download the chooser switches to the Local Sound Chooser and highlights the downloaded sound Engine running sounds steam chuffs diesel grinds are available on the web but not through a chooser These are Hom Freight downloaded when you choose Download from the Running menu in Train Properties shown at right You only see this choice Running Download on the menu if there are running sounds on the web you do not already have in your local collection Running Download Tree Contents Sounds Loco Engine horn bell whistle sounds Shown when chooser is called from Other on Horn menu in Train Properties Sounds to play when the train passes an area on the layout Shown when chooser Is called from Sound browse button in
358. ve the track checker run every time you add or modify tracks so if an error occurs you will be notified of it immediately If this box is checked and an error is detected while drawing an alert appears describing the error Snap options These options affect drawing certain track sections and circles in TrackLayer This set of options is dimmed if you are running TrainP layer Snap options aid in creating precise layouts quickly Angle snap is for creating switches at one of a set of standard turnout angles Parallel snap is for drawing yards and ladders placing switch points in such a way that parallel tracks are evenly Spaced Radius snap is for drawing and editing circles with standard radii To angle Applies when the Track tool is active and you are drawing a Straight section with its stationary point lying on another straight section i e you are creating the branch of a switch see left diagram below As you drag the moving end of one track if the angle between it and the stationary track is close to one of the checkmarked choices the moving line snaps to that angle When Snap occurs the cursor changes to show the snapped angle You may choose up to four different snap angles 4 6 90 degrees and or one other angle between 1 and 9 selected from the drop down Note The designation N means an angle which deviates from linear by one partinN Ona calculator the angle is the arctangent of 1 N For example a 4 angle is
359. views TrainP layer comes with hundreds of load types and easy ways to browse and deposit them in cars The loads come ready to use open a random layout and you ll see that every freight car has already been assigned a typical load ready to be loaded or emptied with a click You can change the load associated with any car and or set a default load for each car type About Loads Loads come in two varieties Ooen car loads are for open top cars gondolas flatcars hoppers and have a pair of images for each load Closed car loads are for closed cars boxcars reefers tankcars and are represented by generic symbols in top views text in side views The above picture shows both types Loads are similar in many ways to car types They come in Sets like car collections each defined by a file of data and for open car loads a folder of images Like car types they are selected from a chooser and edited in a collection editor The installer delivers a sample set of loads more can be downloaded from the collections on the web There are a lot of moving parts associated with loads and they appear in various places in the program Here is a compact guide to relevant reading matter Load Menu popup menu for choosing a load for a car Load Chooser dialog for choosing pictorial loads for one or more cars Load Collection Editor dialog for editing load collections or modifying individual load definitions Load Definition Dialog dialog for crea
360. ween 2 and the corner 3 and let go The result is a Swapping of the two straight modules 16 Now you re ready to turn the assembly into a layout Click OK The Module Manager is dismissed and the assembled modular layout displayed 17 Add a train and run it around to convince yourself that the track is continuous 18 Save the modular layout using File gt Save As Do not save it into the Modules folder itis a full layout nota module Save it where you keep other user built layouts For this tutorial just give ita name and it will go directly under Layouts 19 Close the layout Reopen it from either the Layout Chooser or the File menu at the top of the recently used list Choose File gt Module Manager to convince yourself that you can get back the modules and continue to work with the assembly di Layouts di Demo di Featured Layouts do Layouts101 di Modules d Premium de Standard di Scenery di Sounds M eee Se Filename MyModularLayout rrw Save as type Layout Files rrw A Demo li Featured Lay d Layouts10l dJi Modules d Premium di Standard Building a Modular Layout This section describes the basic steps for building a layout from modules and gives information about how the process works How to Create a Modular Layout Creating a modular layout involves three basic steps 1 Prepare modules f you are a member of a club and you have your own module spend a pleasant
361. where the train crashes or bounces instead of rolling on through Usually this means the track sections were not connected in the input file To fix it drag one of the disconnected junctions on top of the other so they fuse and become a Single junction 2 If turnouts or slipswitches do not work properly it is likely to be due to errors in the conversion Please report it 3 Graphics files exported from WinRail and Atlas Right Track sometimes do not come out the same size and shape as the layout If this happens try exporting a new graphics file at a different zoom level At the same time re save the ral file at the same zoom then try the import again Check for Updates Check web for program and car updates Called from menu command Help gt Check for Updates This dialog appears automatically at program startup if you have Check for program updates checked in General Preferences and a program update Is available cmrm P pa t s pma ni e ie alte a ia E a f a me i E Es i B Check for Updates i s J r J a 5 Pee a Baal Taur er L install the latest released version Use this dialog to see if an update to the program is available or if you are a user of Chris Pedersen Cars to see if there are new CP collections you may obtain Program Update The top part of the dialog indicates whether a new version of the program is available If so the Download button is enab
362. window so it becomes active and try again Click To Insert When developing scripts by hand you often need to enter junction or switch numbers and positions TrainPlayercan Cy do this for you when you right click a junction or switch With the Script Editor window visible and the edit cursor positioned where you want the insertion to go right click and choose one of e Insert junction number inserts followed by the p A a i p Insert junction number Insert throw here Insert throw alternate number of the switch or junction This is typically used when entering an AT or AFTER condition t cause an action ata junction e Insert throw here inserts THROW followed by the switch number followed by the current switch position then carriage return This will ensure that the switch goes to its current position when the script executes that statement e Insert throw alternate inserts THROW switch number then the other position of the switch i e where it would be if thrown This is a shortcut for throwing the switch then inserting throw here Go To Statement If you right click a line in the script text window the menu includes a command Go To Statement This means advance the script pointer to this statement so the next time you begin playing it starts here throw 44 1 at 245 244 20 r Speed a on couple stop head out of yard throw throw throw throw throw throw throw el ead 41
363. with Windows You will also need to be aware of certain size and style limitations details are spelled out on the Car Collections page Large Car Images As of Version 5 2 certain car collections provide large detailed side views in addition to the normal toolbar sized ones Here for example is an Athearn boxcar from the Chris Pedersen Cars collection When you are working with one of these collections the large images can be seen in several places e Car Properties in the Full Image tab e Car Collection Editor optional display in place of regular side and top e Car Chooser in the Preview window All of these displays are resizable for optimal viewing enlarge until the image reaches its full size Default Cars There are two ways to add cars to a layout a using the Car Chooser which lets you pick any car from any collection or b choosing from the Add Car menu or its toolbar see Adding Cars And Trains The second method is quicker but means you don t get to choose the collection in this case the car comes from the Default collection one of a few collections specially set up for this purpose The program comes with two basic default sets Default Steam and Default Modern Examples from Default Steam are shown at the top of this page Default Modern examples are on the Car Collections page The program activates one or the other of these when you open a layout depending on the ratio of steam to diesel engines on the l
364. within the window Press and hold to auto scroll Pressing the right scroller moves the train to the left and vice versa e Uncouple Button Click to uncouple at the current position of the uncoupling pin This button has no effect if pin is at front or end of train e Speed Display Displays current speed in miles per hour MPH or kilometers per hour KPH To change from MPH to KPH Tip select a metric setting in Layout Properties or various other dialogs The default maximum speed is 100 MPH You can change this in Operation Options e Stop Button Click to stop the train Button shows lit red when stopped flashing red when in yard mode Clicking stop exits yard mode and returns direction to forward e Close Button Click to remove control panel from the screen To bring It back use View gt Control Panel e Context menu Right click anywhere on the control panel except in train control window to access the context menu with these commands e Lock in position When checked causes the control panel to become unmoveable so it can t be dragged When unchecked panel can be dragged anywhere on screen Used to prevent accidentally dragging while operating controls e Enable yard mode When checked allows control panel to be operated in yard mode Uncheck for normal operation You can also enable yard mode by using the Yard Mode toolbar button or choosing Enable Y ard Mode from the Tools menu e Locked Icon appears when contr
365. ws ora list Showing type name class AAR code filename and date Tree Contents Defaults F older of collections which can be selected as default car sets see Default Cars British Folder of British car collections Standard F older of standard car collections Premium Folder of premium collections available with Premium license only lt other collections gt Collections from previous versions 1 1 Previously all collections were stored directly in the Cartypes folder Now collections are stored under Standard or Premium folders Older collections which have not been moved will show up at the top level of the car chooser tree For instructions about reorganizing your collections see the Readme Tree Menu Open Open folder to show subfolders or files Refresh Reload contents from disk on Find Search for name or filename See Search Find Next Find Next Go to next hit after Find Properties Display folder or car collection properties teacher Export Filenames Export text or xml file of folder contents See Export Export Filenames mooti om roder Under the selected folder create new car collection from a folder of image files Dimmed if Import from Folder P i selection is nota folder See Creating a New Collection List Menu Add Car Add Car Add selected car to layout Side Views Side Views Display icons of side views Top Views Top Views Display icons of top views List View List View Show contents in list
366. wse for Folder dialog navigate to the folder where the images are stored in this case My Cars A new collection is created in your tree and under the TrainPlayer Cartypes folder The image files are copied from the original folder into the new You see the new collection in your chooser tree above right ready to use Large Car Images If the selected collection has large car images they are displayed underneath the side and top images as shown here z thi C Plug Door B Gravid Truk Western i Green Bay and Westem Aine me he Pee ee mmi 400 just BI rai TON et iy SOO p New rdeans Public Bet Stockton Terminal an a enor a See ee alla i a For optimum viewing enlarge the right panel the large image looks best when drawn full size Web Car Chooser The web car chooser is for downloading and installing car collections from the web You must have a live internet connection while using this chooser For general information about choosers see Choosers To Download a Car Collection 1 Choose a car collection in the tree and click to open it A car collection is shown as a folder with a locomotive icon When you open a collection it is downloaded to a temporary directory called the cache then shown in the list window Once a collection is downloaded to the cache it remains there for future access until you a use the Clear Download Cache command or b choose Refresh on t
367. y ina different location The new copy is not activated or added to your chooser tree although you can drag it into the tree if you d like to see it If you edit properties in this dialog the changes will apply to the published copy only an alternative is to edit the properties of the original before publishing To publish a car collection 1 Inspect the Notes box If errors are reported cancel the dialog fix the errors and try again 2 Inspect and edit Name and Comments These should be made presentable for other users If the comment box is empty you should add descriptive information and author name You might consider doing this to the original collection instead of here cancel this dialog edit in Car Collection Editor then publish 3 Choose an output folder You do not need a new folder for each collection typically you have one output folder where you put all published collections Note if you have already published this collection to that location the old version will be overwritten without warning 4 Inspect the output filename You should not normally change this This filename minus xml extension is used as the collection identifier and is written into layout files if you change it then layouts using the Original collection will not recognize the new and vice versa 5 Click Publish Files are copied the new published collection is created and the dialog is dismissed An alert informs you of successful publicati
368. yboard Menu Options Application Frame Menus Show Menus for Layout Reset d ia Document Menu animations Hone W Menu shadows Dialog controls Application Frame Menus Context Menus Menu animations Menu shadows Contest Menus Select contest meny Pesupe Hint select the context menu change the page to Commands and drag the toolbar buttons into the menu window Help Close Choose one of the two main menus Layout the menu when a document is open or Default then click Reset to reset the selected menu to factory content Choose Popups then click Reset to reset all context menus to defaults Choose the action to be taken when you expand a menu Check if you want menus to have a three dimensional look with shadows It may be necessary to reset all menus after you upgrade to a new version if the menu commands don t seem to be doing what they should To reset all menus click Reset once for each of the three menu choices Customize Options For setting miscellaneous toolbar options Called from menu command Tools gt Customize Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options T oolbar lw Show ScreenTips on toolbars iW Show shortcut keys in ScreenT ips Large Icons Dialog controls Check if you want to see a tooltip whenever the how Screen Ti Show Screen Tips mouse hovers over a toolbar button Check if you want a tooltip t
369. you can do it by selecting the group and oa Ren setting the desired values in the scenery properties dialog Roadbed Properties Settings in this part of the dialog affect Roadbed a scenery feature e Image path to a graphics file with the desired roadbed pattern The path is relative to your TrainP layer Scenery folder The default image is as shown in the picture gravel bmp from the background scenery folder Use the Browse button if you want to navigate and choose a different file e Bed width width of the generated roadbed in units selected in the Units drop down at the bottom of the dialog Setting these values does not affect ties or roadbed already on the layout The settings take effect the next time you generate new ties or roadbed Customizing Toolbars Toolbars are handy for keeping your favorite commands easily clickable The installed program has our choice of commands on the toolbars and has them in default locations You can change these to suit yourself Toolbars start out docked on the top of the main window To reposition a toolbar e Press the grabber bar at the left end of the toolbar and drag If you drag it away from the window frame it will float as with the Train and Scenery toolbar in this picture e Drag a toolbar to any edge of the window frame and it will dock there e Ifa toolbar is floating you can change its size and shape by dragging the lower right corner of the floating window a File Edit V
370. you can operate a layout it needs to be equipped with stations industries and freight cars The fastest way to get started is to use one of the hundreds of layouts already equipped as described in Quick Start The next fastest is to let the program create you a random setup using the Ops Setup Wizard as described in Slightly Less Quick Start Or in the likely event you are a do it yourselfer there is Manual Setup Once the layout is ready for ops then each time you are ready for a new session just click Generate Ops on the Ops Toolbar This generates a new switchlist displays it in the ops windows and turns on color coding and car labels for the stations and cars involved Your job is then to carry out the moves as described in How to Work a Switchlist Ops Quick Start 1 Open a layout ready for ops You can find one in your web chooser by looking for Y in the Ops column at the right F Date Ea TrainPlayer Web Collectic No Name 5X7 B Layouts CY 44 Rockport amp South Fork L 03 08 2011 09 51 42 Demo By 45 Superior amp iron Range RR 8X10 _ 03 08 2001 09 51 42 H Standard Cf 46 Jordan Valley RR 12X8 03 08 2011 09 51 42 A Layouts 101 El 47 Cero Azul RR 5X12 Layout 03 08 2011 09 51 42 E H Premium C 47 Cemo Azul RR with script 5X12 03 08 2011 09 51 42 H Featured Layouts C 48 Virginia amp Tuckee RA 12X9 03 08 2011 09 51 42 tii Lg Whats New C 49 Fairhave
371. you re ready to run What s New in Version 5 2 What For About This Manual About the Layouts Where to Go for Help FF FF a PIES 2 AZ 2ta What s New in Version 5 2 Drag Trains by Hand Hands on operation Point to a train press and drag it along the track just like a railroader s fingertip on the garage layout Move the train in either direction any speed Throw switches as you go using the space bar Bump into another train and it couples click between cars to uncouple The view auto scrolls as you drag so you don t lose sight of your car You can carry out a whole switching session without ever touching the control panel More Chris Pedersen Cars Nearly a thousand great new cars from railroad artist Chris Pedersen with detailed full size images and prototype paint schemes based on actual HO models Locomotives freight and passenger cars from Athearn Walthers and others decorated for ATSF BN Chessie and dozens of others For information and screen shots see the Chris Pedersen page on our website nF ry i Fe easy or Ce ee To provide the full benefit of Chris artwork 5 2 introduces features for displaying large car images along with easy ways to browse through them For details see Large Car Images The Chris Pedersen Car collection is available for a nominal price To buy use Purchase Upgrade or Check For Updates on the Help menu New Properties Scheme The Properties dia

TrainPlayer/TrackLayer Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents